IV-series-monitor Monitor Um 440gb GB WW 1027-3

440GB
1 Getting Started
Ultra Compact Vision Sensor 2 Installation and

Connection
IV-G Series 3 Basic Operation
Vision Sensor 4 Settings Navigator

(Setting the Judgment Condition)
IV Series 5 Operating/Adjusting
Useful Features/
6
Users Manual
Various Functions
Controlling with
(Monitor) 7 the Input/Output Line
Read this manual before use. 8 Specifications

After you read this manual, keep it in a safe place for future
reference. Status Table,
A Troubleshooting
Introduction
Introduction
Read this manual before using the product in order to achieve maximum performance.
Keep this manual in a safe place after reading it so that it can be used at any time.
Symbols
The following symbols alert you to important messages.
Be sure to read these messages carefully.
It indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result

in death or serious injury.
It indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could

result in death or serious injury.
It indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could

result in minor or moderate injury.
It indicates a situation which, if not avoided, could result in

product damage as well as property damage.
It indicates cautions and limitations that must be followed during

operation.
It indicates additional information on proper operation.
It indicates tips for better understanding or useful information.
It indicates the reference pages in this manual or the reference pages in separate manuals.
Ethernet/IP is a trademark of ODVA, inc.
Cautions
(1) Unauthorized reproduction of this manual in whole or part is prohibited.
(2) The contents of this manual may be changed for improvements without prior notice.
(3) An utmost effort has been made to ensure the contents of this manual are as complete as possible.
If there are any mistakes or questions, please contact a KEYENCE office listed in the back of the
manual.
(4) Regardless of item (3), KEYENCE will not be liable for any effect resulting from the use of this unit.
(5) Any manuals with missing pages or other paging faults will be replaced.
The company names and product names used in this manual are registered trademarks or the trademarks
of their respective companies.
Safety Information for IV/IV-G Series
Safety Information for IV/IV-G Series
General Precautions
yyDo not use this product for the purpose to protect a human body or a part of human body.
yyThis product is not intended for use as an explosion-proof product. Do not use this product in
hazardous location and/or potentially explosive atmosphere.
yyYou must verify that the IV/IV-G Series are operating correctly in terms of functionality and
performance before the start and the operation of the IV/IV-G Series.
yyWe recommend that you take substantial safety measures to avoid any damage in the event of
a problem occurring.
yyKEYENCE never warrants the function or performance of the IV/IV-G Series if it is used in manner
that differs from the IV/IV-G Series specifications contained in this instruction manual or if the
IV/IV-G Series are modified by yourself.
yyWhen the IV/IV-G Series is used in combination with other instruments, functions and
performance may be degraded, depending on operating conditions and the surrounding
environment.
yyDo not place the instruments, including peripherals, under the rapid temperature change. It may
cause condensation and may damage instruments or peripherals.
yyRemove the power cable from the power supply if you do not use this product for a long time.
440GB 1
Important Instructions
Observe the following precautions to prevent malfunction of the IV/IV-G Series and to
ensure that it is used properly.
Precautions on use
yyThe power of this product and instruments connected to this product must be turned off when
the cable is to be installed or removed. Failure to do so may cause an electric shock or a
product damage.
yyUse this product in the correct supply voltage. Failure to do so may cause a product damage.
yyFor instructions
yyDo not turn OFF the power while setting the items or saving the settings. Otherwise, all or
part of the setting data may be lost.
yyDo not let water, dust or oil stick to the camera/light of the sensor (IV series) or sensor head
(IV-G series). Failure to do so may cause a malfunction.
yyThe enclosure rating of the monitor (IV-M30) is IP40. This is not designed for water proof so be
careful to operate it.
yyWhen this product becomes dirty, do not rub it with a wet cloth, benzene, thinner, or alcohol.
Doing so may change the color or shape of the unit.fe
yyIf the unit is heavily contaminated, disconnect all the cables including the power supply cable,
wipe off the dirt with a cloth soaked with mild detergent, and then wipe with a soft dry cloth.
yyFor an LCD panel
yyDo not press the touch panel with the tip of your nail or anything that has a sharp tip such as
a pen or a screwdriver. Doing so may cause damage.
yyDo not apply shock to the touch panel or press it with excessive force. Doing so may cause
damage.
yyThe LCD panel may have some dots that are always lit (bright dots) or ones that are always
unlit (black dots). This phenomenon is not a problem.
yyDue to the unique characteristics of an LCD, displaying the same image for a long time may
cause an afterimage.
yyFor USB memory
yyUse products recommended by KEYENCE.
yyA USB memory device with a security function cannot be used.
yyUnplug the USB memory when turning on or off the power of IV/IV-G Series.
yyDo not remove the USB memory while the USB is being written on. Otherwise, all or part of
the setting data may be lost or it may cause a damage.
yyFor external master image registration
When the external master image registration is used frequently, set [Write ROM when using Ext.
Master Save?] of the input option to [No] for nonvolatile memory protection of the internal
sensor. When the option is set to [Yes], the nonvolatile memory is guaranteed to write for
100,000 times.
yyFor automatic focus function
yyAutomatic focus function is used for adjusting the focusing position at the time of installation.
This will not activate during the operation.
yyFocusing position can be registered in each program. The program configurations are guaranteed
to switch for 100,000 times. If the focusing position does not need to change for each program,
set [Auto Focus Adj Pos] to [Common] for extending the life-span.
yyDo not apply shock or vibration to the sensor (IV series) or sensor head (IV-G series) during
the focusing position adjustment. Failure to do so may cause a product damage.
2 - IV/IV-G Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Measures to be taken when an abnormality occurs
In the following cases, turn the power OFF immediately. Using the IV/IV-G Series in an abnormal
condition could cause fire, electric shock, or malfunction.
Contact our office for repair.
yyIf water or debris enters the IV/IV-G Series.
yyIf the IV/IV-G Series is dropped or the case is damaged.
yyIf abnormal smoke or odor emanates from the IV/IV-G Series.
Precautions on installation
yyTo use this product correctly and safely, avoid installing it in the following locations. Failure to
do so may cause fire, electric shock, or malfunction.
yyOutdoors
yyAltitude above 2000 m
yyLocations that are humid, dusty or poorly ventilated
yyLocations where the temperature is high such as those exposed to direct sunlight
yyLocations where there are flammable or corrosive gases
yyLocations where the unit may be directly subjected to vibration or impact
yyLocations where water, oil, or chemicals may splash onto the unit
yyTo improve the anti-noise feature, install the unit following the precautions below. Otherwise, a
malfunction may occur.
yyGround the FG cable (drain wire) of the sensor (IV series) or sensor amplifier (IV-G series).
yyDo not mount the unit in a cabinet where high-voltage equipment is already installed.
yyMount the unit as far from power lines as possible.
yySeparate the unit as far as possible from the devices that emit strong electric or magnetic
field (such as solenoid or chopper).
yySeparate the I/O signal line from the power line or high-voltage line.
yyFor power supply
yyNoise superimposed on the power supply could cause malfunction. Use a stabilized DC
power supply configured with an isolation transformer.
yyWhen using a commercially available switching regulator, be sure to ground the frame ground
terminal.
yyAttach the sensor amplifier to the DIN rail then set it on the sheet metal.
yyDevices including this unit are precision components. Do not apply shock or vibration.
yyWhen connecting to a network, let engineers who are knowledgeable about networks handle it.
- IV/IV-G Series User's Manual (Monitor) - 3

Precautions on Regulations and Standards
UL Certification
For IV-G500CA/IV-G500MA/IV-G150MA/IV-G300CA/IV-G600MA/IV-G10/IV-G15
This product is a UL/C-UL Listed product.
yyUL File No. E301717
yyCategory NRKH2, NRKH8
Be sure to consider the following specifications when using this product as a UL/C-UL Listed Product.
yyUse a power supply with Class 2 output defined in NFPA70 (NEC: National Electrical Code).
yyPower supply/External input/Control output shall be connected to a single Class 2 source only.
yyUse copper wire of AWG 16 to 18 (stranded wire) whose temperature rating is 60 C or higher for the
power terminal block.
yyEnclosure Type 1 (Based on UL50)
yyUse under pollution level 2.
For IV-500C/IV-500CA/IV-500M/IV-500MA/IV-150M/IV-150MA/IV-2000M/IV-2000MA
yyCategory NRKH, NRKH7
yyPower supply/External input/Control output shall be connected to a single Class 2 source only.
yyUse with an over current protection device which is rated 24 V or more and not more than 1A.
yyEnclosure Type 1 (Based on UL50)
yyUse under pollution level 2.
UL Certification For IV-M30

yyCategory NRAQ, NRAQ7
yyThis product is for use on a flat surface of a Type 1 enclosure.

CE Marking
For IV-G500CA/IV-G500MA/IV-G150MA/IV-G300CA/IV-G600MA/IV-G10/IV-G15/
IV-500C/IV-500CA/IV-500M/IV-500MA/IV-150M/IV-150MA/IV-2000M/IV-2000M
Keyence Corporation has confirmed that this product complies with the essential requirements of
the applicable EC Directive, based on the following specifications. Be sure to consider the following
specifications when using this product in the Member State of European Union.
zz
EMC Directive
yyApplicable Standard EN60947-5-2, Class A
yyThe length of power I/O cable, Ethernet cable and Monitor cable must be less than or equal to 30m.
Remarks:
These specifications do not give any guarantee that the end-product with this product incorporated
complies with the essential requirements of EMC Directive. The manufacturer of the end-product is solely
responsible for the compliance on the end-product itself according to EMC Directive.
For IV-M30
Keyence Corporation has confirmed that this product complies with the essential requirements of
the applicable EC Directive, based on the following specifications. Be sure to consider the following
specifications when using this product in the Member State of European Union.
zz
EMC Directive
yyApplicable Standard EN61326-1, Class A
yyThe length of Monitor power cable, Ethernet cable and Monitor cable must be less than or equal to 30m.
Remarks:
These specifications do not give any guarantee that the end-product with this product incorporated
complies with the essential requirements of EMC Directive. The manufacturer of the end-product is solely
responsible for the compliance on the end-product itself according to EMC Directive.

Version of the IV/IV-G Series
You can download the most recent operation software for the sensor (IV-150/500/2000,
IV-G150/500/300/600) and the monitor (IV-M30) from the KEYENCE web site.
Please refer to the description on the homepage for the introduction method.
URL : http://www.keyence.com/
Operation software of the Vision Sensor (IV-150/500/2000)
Version Description
R1.00.** The initial version.
R1.01.** The processing time has been speeded up.
The processing time and the response time to program switching input have been
R1.10.**
speeded up.
The following functions have been added.
yyLogic output
yyTotal status NG output
R2.00.**
yyRUN output
yyFTP client function
yyField network (EtherNet/IP, PROFINET)
This is the version of this document.
The following functions have been added.
yyDirect connection (2 units or more)
yyDigital Zoom (x4)
R.3.00.**
yyList of NG Sensor Occurrences (only when using the monitor)
yyNG hold (only when using the monitor)
yyInternal trigger control
yyStatus output reset
Operation software of the Ultra Compact Vision Sensor (IV-G150/500/300/600)
Version Description
The same functions as with version R3.00.00 of the IV series Vision Sensor are
provided. The functions below are available on the IV-G series sensor only.
R.3.00.** yyMain/expansion simultaneous input
yyMain/expansion logic output
yyMutual interference prevention function
yyUp to 8 outputs

Operation software of the monitor (IV-M30)
Version Description
R1.00.** The initial version.
R1.01.** Compatibility with Chinese (Simplified) / Chinese (Traditional).
R1.02.** Compatibility with German.
R1.10.** Compatibility with Tool Auto Tuning using a registration information file (*.ivt).
R2.00.** Compatibility with Italian / French / Spanish / Portuguese / Korean.
The following functions are added.
R.3.00.** yyDirect connection (2 units or more)
yyList of NG Sensor Occurrences function
yyNG hold function

MEMO

Structure of This Manual
Structure of This Manual

This chapter explains the system configuration and overview
1 Getting Started of IV/IV-G Series, package contents, and names and functions 1
of each part.
Installation and 2
2
This chapter explains how to mount the sensor and monitor,
Connection and explains connection procedures.
3
3
This chapter explains the basic operation and operation flow
Basic Operation
of the IV/IV-G Series.
4
4 Settings Navigator This chapter explains how to set the sensors using
(Setting the Judgment Condition) the Settings Navigator.
5
5
This chapter explains how to operate and adjust the
Operating/Adjusting
IV/IV-G Series. 6
Useful Features/
6 Various Functions
This chapter explains the useful and detailed features.
7
7
Controlling with
the Input/Output Line
This chapter explains how the input and output terminals
control each operation.
8
A
8 Specifications This chapter explains specifications and dimensions.
A Appendices This chapter explains error messages and troubleshooting, etc.

Contents
Contents
Introduction I/O cable for IV-G series..............................1-11

Symbols Vertical mounting bracket for IV-Gseries....1-12
Cautions Transverse mounting bracket for
Safety Information for IV/IV-G Series......................1 IV-Gseries...................................................1-12
General Precautions............................................1 Adjustable bracket for IV-G series...............1-12
Safety precautions on LED product.....................1 Vision Sensor (IV series): Sensor...................1-12
Important Instructions..............................................2 Optional parts for the Vision Sensor
Precautions on use..............................................2 (IV series)........................................................1-13
Measures to be taken when an abnormality Dome attachment........................................1-13
occurs..................................................................3 Polarized visible light filter attachment........1-13
Precautions on installation...................................3 Power I/O cable
Precautions on Regulations and Standards............4 (M12 12pin - strand wire).............................1-13
UL Certification.....................................................4 Mounting adapter.........................................1-13
For IV-G500CA/IV-G500MA/IV-G150MA/ Front cover (for replacement)......................1-14
IV-G300CA/IV-G600MA/IV-G10/IV-G15...........4 Bracket........................................................1-14
For IV-500C/IV-500CA/IV-500M/IV-500MA/ Intelligent Monitor............................................1-14
IV-150M/IV-150MA/IV-2000M/IV-2000MA........4 Optional parts for the monitor.........................1-15
UL Certification For IV-M30..............................4 Monitor power cable
CE Marking..........................................................5 (M8 4pin - strand wire).................................1-15
For IV-G500CA/IV-G500MA/IV-G150MA/ Protection sheet...........................................1-15
IV-G300CA/IV-G600MA/IV-G10/IV-G15/ USB memory (1GB).....................................1-15
IV-500C/IV-500CA/IV-500M/IV-500MA/ Stylus...........................................................1-15
IV-150M/IV-150MA/IV-2000M/IV-2000M...........5 Wall mounting adapter.................................1-15
For IV-M30........................................................5 Panel mounting adapter..............................1-15
Version of the IV/IV-G Series...................................6 DIN mounting adapter.................................1-15
Operation software of the Vision Sensor Communication Cable.....................................1-16
(IV-150/500/2000)................................................6 Monitor cable for a sensor with a built-in
Operation software of the Ultra Compact amplifier (M12 4pin - M12 4pin)...................1-16
Vision Sensor (IV-G150/500/300/600).................6 Ethernet cable (M12 4pin - RJ-45)..............1-16
Operation software of the monitor (IV-M30).........7 LAN cable (RJ-45 - RJ-45)..........................1-16
Structure of This Manual.........................................9 Name and Function of Each Part.......................1-17
Contents................................................................10 Ultra Compact Vision Sensor (IV-G series):
Sensor head....................................................1-17
Chapter1 Getting Started Name and function of each part of
the sensor head...................................1-17
System Configuration...........................................1-2
Basic configurations of IV/IV-G Serie................1-2 Operation of the sensor head
indicator light........................................1-17
When connecting with the Vision Sensor
Ultra Compact Vision Sensor (IV-G series):
(IV Series)......................................................1-2
Sensor amplifier..............................................1-18
When connecting with the Ultra Compact
Vision Sensor (IV-G Series)...........................1-3 Name and function of each part of
the sensor amplifier.............................1-18
Connecting the monitor and multiple
sensors..........................................................1-4 Operation of the sensor amplifier
indicator light........................................1-19
Overview of IV/IV-G Series...................................1-6
Vision Sensor (IV series): Sensor...................1-20
IV/IV-G Series...................................................1-6
Using with the intelligent monitor (IV-M30)....1-6 Name and function of each part of
the sensor............................................1-20
Using with the IV-Navigator (IV-H1)...............1-7
Judgment processing flow................................1-8 Operation of the indicator light.............1-21
Monitor............................................................1-22
Checking the Package Contents........................1-10
Sensor head....................................................1-10 Chapter2 Installation and Connection
Ultra Compact Vision Sensor (IV-G series): Mounting the Sensor............................................2-2
Sensor amplifier..............................................1-10 For Ultra Compact Vision Sensor
Optional parts for the Ultra Compact (IV-G series)......................................................2-2
Vision Sensor (IV-G series).............................1-11 Mounting the sensor head.............................2-2
Dome attachment........................................1-11 Checking the view and installed distance
Polarizing filter attachment..........................1-11 (IV-G series)..................................................2-2
Spread lens attachment...............................1-11 For Vision Sensor (IV series)............................2-3
Sensor head/amplifier cable for Checking the view and installed distance
IV-Gseries...................................................1-11 (IV series)......................................................2-3

Contents
Mounting the sensor head of the Ultra Unmounting from the DIN mounting
Compact Vision Sensor (IV-G series)...............2-4 adapter........................................................2-16
Mounting the sensor head.............................2-4 Cables................................................................2-17
When screws are secured from Connecting the Ultra Compact Vision
the sensor head.....................................2-4 Sensor (IV-G series).......................................2-17
When screws are secured from Connecting the sensor head/amplifier
the wall...................................................2-4 cable for IV-G series and sensor head........2-17
Attaching the optional mounting bracket.......2-4 Connecting the sensor head/amplifier
When using the vertical mounting cable for IV-G series and sensor
bracket for IV-G series (OP-87908).......2-4 amplifier.......................................................2-17
When using the transverse mounting Connecting the cable to the sensor
bracket for IV-G series (OP-87909).......2-5 amplifier.......................................................2-18
When using the adjustable bracket for Connecting the Ethernet cable or
IV-G series (OP-87910).........................2-5 LANcable............................................2-18
Mounting the sensor amplifier of the Ultra Connecting the I/O cable
Compact Vision Sensor (IV-G series)...............2-5 (OP-87906)..........................................2-18
Mounting the IV-G10 (Main)..........................2-5 Supplying power to the sensor
Mounting the IV-G15 (Expansion).................2-5 amplifier...............................................2-20
Mounting the attachment for IV-G series..........2-6 Connection diagram.............................2-21
Using the dome attachment Connecting the Vision Sensor (IVseries).......2-22
(IV-GD05/IV-GD10)........................................2-6 Specification of I/O circuit and current of
Mounting the dome attachment.............2-6 the Ultra Compact Vision Sensor
Mounting examples................................2-7 (IV-G series)....................................................2-24
Using the polarizing filter attachment Input circuit..................................................2-24
(OP-87899/OP-87900/OP-87901) or No-voltage input
spread lens attachment (OP-87902).............2-8 (When the NPN output is selected).....2-24
Mounting the polarizing filter Voltage input
attachment for IV-G500CA/500MA/ (When the PNP output is selected)......2-24
150MA (OP-87899), polarizing filter Output circuit...............................................2-24
attachment for IV-G300CA (OP-87900), When the NPN output is selected........2-24
or polarizing filter attachment for When the PNP output is selected........2-24
IV-G600MA (OP-87901).........................2-8 Specification of I/O circuit and current of
Mounting the spread lens attachment the Vision Sensor (IV series)...........................2-25
for IV-G150MA (OP-87902) Input circuit..................................................2-25
(for the IV-G150MA)...............................2-9 No-voltage input
Mounting the Vision Sensor (IV series).............2-9 (When the NPN output is selected).....2-25
Mounting the mounting adapter.....................2-9 Voltage input
Mounting on the wall..............................2-9 (When the PNP output is selected)......2-25
Mounting from the jig side......................2-9 Output circuit...............................................2-25
Mounting the sensor onto the mounting When the NPN output is selected........2-25
adapter........................................................2-10 When the PNP output is selected........2-25
Unmounting the sensor...............................2-10 Connecting the power cable of the monitor....2-26
Mounting the attachment for IVseries............2-11 When connecting with the Ultra Compact
Using the dome attachment (IV-D10)..........2-11 Vision Sensor (IV-Gseries) and the monitor....2-27
Mounting the dome attachment...........2-11 Connecting directly (1 unit)..........................2-27
Installed distance of the dome Connecting via network
attachment...........................................2-11 (Direct Connection (2 units or more)/
Using the polarizing filter attachment Network Connection)...................................2-28
(OP-87436/OP-87437)................................2-12 Other connections.......................................2-29
Mounting the Monitor..........................................2-13 Connection examples of the
Mounting to a wall...........................................2-13 IV series...............................................2-29
Hanging on the hook...................................2-13 Connection examples when
Mounting with the wall mounting adapter....2-13 connecting the IV series and
Unmounting from the wall mounting IV-G series sensors together...............2-30
adapter........................................................2-14 When connecting the Vision Sensor
Mounting to a panel........................................2-15 (IV series) and the monitor..............................2-31
Mounting to a panel.....................................2-15 Connecting directly (1 unit)..........................2-31
Panel cutting dimension..............................2-15 Connecting via network
Mounting to the DIN rail..................................2-16 (Direct connection (2 units or more)/
Mounting using DIN mounting adapter........2-16 Network connection)....................................2-31

Contents
Connecting the monitor cable/ Extended functions for the Image

Ethernet cable.............................................2-32 Optimization....................................................4-18
Items of extended functions for
Chapter3 Basic Operation the Image Optimization................................4-18
Imaging Area...............................................4-20
Overview of Screen and Operation......................3-2
Advanced Brightness Adjustment................4-21
Basic Operation Flow...........................................3-4
Lighting........................................................4-21
Operation when the Power is Turned on..............3-5
Color Filters (color type only).......................4-22
Operation flow when the power is turned on.....3-5
Digital Zoom................................................4-22
Operation for initial startup of the monitor
2. Master Registration (Registering an Image
(Direct Connection (1 unit))...............................3-6
as a Reference for Judgment)............................4-24
Main screen for the Master Registration.........4-24
(Direct Connection (2 units or more))................3-7
Registering the master image.........................4-25
Extended functions for the Master
(Network Connection).......................................3-9
Registration.....................................................4-26
Setting the network address of
Items of extended functions for
the monitor.....................................................3-9
the Master Registration...............................4-26
Searching for a sensor to be connected......3-10
Master image registration from
Specifying sensor to be connected by
the image history in the sensor....................4-26
IP address....................................................3-12
Registering from the image in
Operation for initial startup of the sensor........3-13
the USB memory.........................................4-28
Operation for changing the sensor head
(IV-G series only)............................................3-14 When using a batch backup file
(*.iva)...................................................4-28
Setting to the Factory Default.............................3-15
Initializing the sensor......................................3-15 When using an image capture file
(*.ivp)...................................................4-29
Initializing the monitor.....................................3-16
Brightness correction...................................4-30
Basic Operation for the Monitor..........................3-17
3. Tool Settings
Editing the value with the slider......................3-17
(Setting the Judgment Method for Targets)........4-32
Editing the tool window...................................3-18
Selecting a tool according to
Inputting characters........................................3-19
its intended purpose........................................4-32
Selecting the file in the USB memory.............3-20
Types of tools..................................................4-32
Main screen for the Tool Settings....................4-34
Chapter4 Settings Navigator Adding/Editing/Deleting a tool.........................4-35
(Setting the Judgment Condition) Adding a tool................................................4-35
Editing a tool................................................4-35
Settings Navigator................................................4-2
Deleting a tool..............................................4-35
Flow in the Settings Navigator..........................4-2
Outline tool......................................................4-36
Basic Operation of the Settings Navigator...........4-3
Setting items for the Outline tool.................4-36
Starting the Settings Navigator.........................4-3
Setting the Outline tool................................4-37
Settings Navigator screen and
operation flow....................................................4-4 Setting a search region........................4-39
Displaying the Settings Navigator guide...........4-5 Settings for disabling outlines..............4-39
Finishing the Settings Navigator.......................4-5 Setting a sensitivity..............................4-40
Extended functions for the Outline tool........4-41
Finishing by completing all steps...................4-5
Finishing without completing the step............4-5 Rotation Range....................................4-42
1. Image Optimization Search Algorithm.................................4-42
(Clearly Image a Target).......................................4-6 Tool Name............................................4-43
Color Area/Area tool........................................4-44
Setting the Image Optimization.........................4-6
Setting items for the Color Area/
Main screen for the Image Optimization...........4-7
Area tool......................................................4-44
Setting the Trigger Options...............................4-8
Setting the Color Area/Area tool..................4-46
Settings for the Trigger Options.....................4-8
Setting the Trigger Options..........................4-11 Mask settings.......................................4-49
Auto Brightness Adjustment............................4-12 Setting the upper limit..........................4-50
Extended functions of the Color Area/
Focus Adjustment...........................................4-13
Area tool......................................................4-52
Focus adjustment for
the auto focusing type.................................4-13 Advanced Color Extraction/
Advanced Brightness Extraction..........4-53
Focus adjustment for
the manual focusing type Tool Name............................................4-53
(IV-500C/IV-500M/IV-150M/IV-2000M)........4-15 Fixed Reference Area..........................4-54
Position Adjustment tool..................................4-55

Contents
Setting items for

Using the image history saved in
the Position Adjustment tool........................4-56 the sensor............................................5-16
Setting the Position Adjustment tool............4-57
Using the image files saved in
Setting a search region........................4-59 the USB memory.................................5-16
Settings for disabling outlines..............4-59 Operation flow for the Tool Auto Tuning..........5-17
Setting a sensitivity..............................4-60 Starting and finishing the Tool Auto Tuning.....5-17
Extended functions for Registering the OK/NG images to be used
the Position Adjustment tool........................4-61 for the Tool Auto Tuning..................................5-19
Rotation Range....................................4-61 Registering the images taken in
Extended functions for the Tool settings.........4-62 the Test mode..............................................5-19
Items of extended functions for Registering the images from
the Tool settings...........................................4-62 the image history saved in the sensor.........5-21
Copy Tool.....................................................4-62 Registering the images from
4. Output Assignment the file saved in the USB memory...............5-23
(Setting Details of Outputting to Output Line).....4-64 Confirming or deleting the images
Main screen for the Output Assignment..........4-64 registered for the Tool Auto Tuning.................5-26
Setting range of the Output Assignment.........4-64 Tool Auto Tuning by
Default value........................................4-65 the previous registration information...............5-27
Setting the Output Assignment.......................4-65 Tool Auto Tuning by
Extended functions for the registration information file........................5-29
the Output Assignment....................................4-66 Stabilizing the Judgment Process......................5-32
Extended functions items for Stabilizing the judgment process by
the OutputAssignment.................................4-66 taking a clear image of the target....................5-32
Logic Settings......................................4-67 Imaging the target widely.............................5-32
Total Status Conditions........................4-69 Adjusting the installed distance (WD)....5-32
Display Method of Extended Functions Menus....4-70 Using the digital zooming function.......5-32
Correcting the distorted images due to
Chapter5 Operating/Adjusting the installation..............................................5-33
Achieving adequate image brightness.........5-33
Starting an Operation...........................................5-2
Turning on the power and If the brightness cannot be adjusted
in the Auto Brightness Adjustment.......5-33
starting an operation.........................................5-2
Exiting the sensor settings and If the brightness cannot be adjusted
due to uneven brightness....................5-33
starting an operation.........................................5-2
Achieving good focus..................................5-34
Overview of the Operation Screen.......................5-3
Names and Functions of the Operation Screen....5-4 If good focus cannot be achieved
by the Auto Focus Adjustment.............5-34
Menu Screen.....................................................5-4
Reducing the image blur..............................5-34
Switching the display to the full-screen mode....5-6
Reducing the shininess of the glossy or
Enlarging the image display..............................5-6
metal surface...............................................5-35
Selecting the tool whose information to be
displayed...........................................................5-7 Using the Auto Brightness Adjustment....5-35
Selecting the tool from Using the dome attachment.................5-35
the pull-down menu...............................5-7 Using the polarizing filter attachment....5-35
Selecting the tool by tapping it on Installing the sensor at an angle..........5-35
Adjusting the color tint (for color type only)...5-36
the monitor.............................................5-7
Reducing the effect of
Selecting a display method for tools.................5-7
illumination variation....................................5-36
Display methods for tools..............................5-8
Stabilizing by correcting
For color type.........................................5-8
the misaligned target position.........................5-36
For monochrome type............................5-9
Tool settings.........................................5-36
Displaying the statistical information...............5-10
Displaying the statistical information...........5-10 Processing during an operation...........5-36
Stabilizing the position adjustment..................5-37
Hiding the statistical information..................5-12
Displaying the histogram.................................5-12 Basic adjustments................................5-37
Displaying the histogram.............................5-12 If the target tilts and the position
adjustment becomes unstable.............5-37
Hiding the histogram....................................5-14
Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment....................5-15 If the position adjustment becomes
unstable due to the effect of
Tool Auto Tuning (Automatically Adjusting
the unwanted outlines..........................5-37
the Judgment Condition)....................................5-16
Using the images taken in If the outline of the reference target
cannot be detected..............................5-38
the Test mode......................................5-16
Stabilizing the Outline tool..............................5-38

Contents

Basic adjustments................................5-38 Things can be performed with

If the outline cannot be detected the program functions.....................................6-15
when the target becomes Preparing the program functions.....................6-16
out of position......................................5-38 Preparation flow...........................................6-16
If the detection becomes unstable Preparation procedures...............................6-16
due to the effect of the unwanted Using the program functions
outline other than the target.................5-38 (changing over)...............................................6-17
If the target tilts and the outline When the [Monitor/PC] is selected in
cannot be detected..............................5-39 the Program Switch Method........................6-17
If the match rate difference When the [External IN] is selected in
between the high and the Program Switch Method........................6-18
low-quality-targets is small...................5-39 Editing a program name..................................6-19
If the outline of the target cannot be Copying a program.........................................6-19
detected...............................................5-39 Initializing a program.......................................6-20
Stabilizing the Color Area/Area tool................5-39 Sensor Image History (Confirming the Images
Basic adjustments................................5-39 whose Status Result is NG)...............................6-21
If the color you wish to judge cannot Displaying the Sensor Image History
be extracted.........................................5-39 screen.............................................................6-21
If the area search becomes Displaying from the run screen............6-21
unstable due to unwanted colors Displaying from the Sensor Setup
being extracted....................................5-39 Menu screen........................................6-21
Shortening the Processing Time........................5-40 Loading and confirming the saved images.....6-22
For the processing time..................................5-40 Clearing the saved images.............................6-23
Flow of the internal process.................5-40 Changing the logging conditions of the
Shortening the imaging processing time.........5-41 image history...................................................6-24
Selecting the tool............................................5-41 Saving the Sensor Settings and Images to
Shortening the processing time of a USB Memory...................................................6-25
each tool.........................................................5-41 Installing/Removing the USB memory............6-25
Shortening the processing time of Installing the USB memory..........................6-25
the Outline tool............................................5-41 Removing the USB memory........................6-25
Shortening the processing time of Displaying the USB Memory screen...............6-25
the Color Area/Area tool..............................5-42 Displaying from the run screen............6-25
Shortening the processing time of Displaying from
the position adjustment................................5-42 the Sensor Setup Menu screen...........6-25
Saving the sensor settings or
Chapter6 the image history.............................................6-26
Backing up in a batch..................................6-26
Useful Features/Various Functions Saving the image history individually...........6-27
List of the Useful Features...................................6-2 Transferring the settings backed up in
Useful features while running............................6-2 the USB memory to the sensor.......................6-28
Useful features during installation/ Capturing the monitor screen and saving to
adjustment........................................................6-4 the USB memory.............................................6-30
Displaying the Sensor Setup Menu Screen..........6-7 Enabling the screen capturing function.......6-30
Changing the Sensor Displayed on the Monitor Capturing the screen...................................6-30
(Change Connected Sensor Function).................6-8 Folder composition and file naming rules.......6-31
Changing the sensor to be displayed on Setting the Extended Functions of the Sensor....6-32
a monitor...........................................................6-9 Sensor advanced settings...............................6-32
Confirming the NG Occurrence Status of Environmental..............................................6-32
the Sensor Connected Setup Adjustment........................................6-32
(List of NG Sensor Occurrences Function)........6-10 Program.......................................................6-32
Overview of the List of NG Sensor System.........................................................6-32
Occurrences function......................................6-10 I/O Settings.....................................................6-33
Setting the List of NG Sensor Occurrences....6-12 Input Settings...............................................6-33
Holding the Image of the Sensor on which Output Settings............................................6-35
NG Occurred (NG Hold Function).....................6-14 Polarity.........................................................6-36
Overview of the NG Hold function...................6-14 I/O Monitor...................................................6-36
Setting the NG Hold function..........................6-14 Device settings................................................6-37
Changeover for a Target Device Name...............................................6-37
(Program Functions)...........................................6-15 Password Lock............................................6-38
Overview of the program functions.................6-15 Network Settings.............................................6-39

Contents
Advanced Network Settings............................6-40 Response time for the

FTP..............................................................6-40 switch program input...................................7-13
FTP Destination Settings.....................6-41 Response time for
Transfer Condition Settings.................6-42 the external master registration input..........7-13
Transfer Destination Folder Settings....6-44 Response time for the error clear input.......7-13
Field Network...............................................6-46 Description for symbols...............................7-13
Tilt Correction..................................................6-47
Rotate 180.....................................................6-49 Chapter8 Specifications
White Balance (for color type only).................6-50
Specifications.......................................................8-2
Program Switch Method..................................6-51
IV-G Series........................................................8-2
Auto Focus Adjustment Position
IV Series...........................................................8-4
(auto focus type only)......................................6-51
Intelligent Monitor..............................................8-6
Sensor Information..........................................6-52
Dimensions...........................................................8-8
Initializing the sensor......................................6-53
Ultra Compact Vision Sensor Sensor head.......8-8
Updating the sensor........................................6-53
Ultra Compact Vision Sensor Sensor
Setting the Advanced Monitor Information.........6-54
amplifier..........................................................8-12
Monitor Settings..............................................6-54
Optional parts for
Sensor Connect...........................................6-54
the Ultra Compact Vision Sensor ...................8-13
Monitor Device Settings...............................6-54
Dome attachment for IV-G series................8-13
Monitor Environment...................................6-54
Polarizing filter attachment for
System.........................................................6-54
IV-G500CA/500MA/150MA (OP-87899)
Sensor Connect..............................................6-55
When directly connecting with a sensor
IV-G300CA (OP-87900)
(1 unit).........................................................6-55
When directly connecting with
IV-G600MA (OP-87901)..............................8-13
multiple sensors (2 units or more)...............6-56
Spread lens attachment for IV-G150MA......8-13
When connecting with the sensor via
Sensor head/amplifier cable for
a network.....................................................6-57
IV-G series...................................................8-13
Network Settings.............................................6-59
I/O cable for IV-G series..............................8-14
Display Settings..............................................6-59
Vertical mounting bracket for IV-G series....8-14
Touch Screen Lock.........................................6-60
Transverse mounting bracket for
Language........................................................6-61
IV-G series...................................................8-14
Time................................................................6-62
Adjustable bracket for IV-G series...............8-14
Backlight.........................................................6-62
Vision Sensor..................................................8-15
Touch Panel Calibration..................................6-63
Optional parts for the Vision Sensor ..............8-16
Monitor Information.........................................6-63
Dome attachment for IV series ...................8-16
Initialize Monitor..............................................6-64
Polarizing filter attachment..........................8-17
Update Monitor...............................................6-64
Power I/O cable...........................................8-17
Mounting adapter.........................................8-17
Chapter7 Front cover..................................................8-17
Controlling with Input/Output Line Bracket........................................................8-18
Controlling Timing of Judgment with Triggers......7-2 Intelligent Monitor............................................8-19
External trigger..................................................7-2 Optional parts for the monitor.........................8-21
Internal trigger...................................................7-3 Monitor power cable....................................8-21
Operating in the shortest cycle......................7-4 Protection sheet...........................................8-21
Importing the Status Output.................................7-5 Stylus...........................................................8-21
Importing the total status / Wall mounting adapter.................................8-21
total status NG output.......................................7-5 Panel mounting adapter..............................8-21
Importing the individual status output of DIN mounting adapter.................................8-21
each detection tool / logic.................................7-6 Communication cables....................................8-22
Changing the timing of the status output..........7-7 Monitor cable for a sensor with
Cancelling One-Shot output..........................7-7 a built-in amplifier........................................8-22
Changing Over.....................................................7-8 Ethernet cable.............................................8-22
Registering the Master Image..............................7-9 LAN cable....................................................8-22
Clearing Errors...................................................7-11
Operations when Power of the Sensor is
Turned on...........................................................7-12
Input Response Time.........................................7-13

Contents
Initializing the network settings...................... A-43

Appendices For the IV-G10 / IV-G15.............................. A-43
Status Table......................................................... A-2 For the IV-500/IV-150/IV-2000.................... A-43
Status table...................................................... A-2 Maintenance...................................................... A-45
Displaying and outputting the status result...... A-4 Attaching the protection sheet....................... A-45
Displaying and outputting the status result Replacing the front cover............................... A-45
at the time of position adjustment.................... A-4 Index.................................................................. A-46
Matching Rate of the Outline Tool and Copyright notice................................................ A-53
Position Adjustment Tool..................................... A-5
Matching rate at the time of protrusion............ A-5
Cut-off process of the matching rate................ A-5
Settings List......................................................... A-6
RUN screen (menu display OFF)..................... A-6
RUN screen (menu display ON)...................... A-6
Sensor Setup Menu screen............................. A-7
Monitor Settings screen................................... A-9
Sensor Advanced screen............................... A-11
Sensor Setup screen..................................... A-15
1. Image Optimization................................. A-15
2. Master Registration................................ A-16
3. Tool Settings........................................... A-16
4. Output Assignment................................. A-19
Troubleshooting................................................. A-20
Error Messages................................................. A-23
Checking errors by observing
the PWR/ERR indicator light ......................... A-23
Confirming error messages of the monitor..... A-25
Remedy when the Monitor cannot be
Connected with the Sensor............................... A-29
Remedy when direct connection (1unit) is
unavailable..................................................... A-29
Remedy when direct connection
(2 units or more) is unavailable...................... A-30
Remedy when connection via a network is
unavailable..................................................... A-31
Confirming the status by observing
the indicator light of the sensor...................... A-34
LINK/ACT (link/activity) indicator light......... A-34
STATUS indicator light................................ A-35
the SENSOR indicator light of the monitor..... A-36
Other methods of confirming a network
connection...................................................... A-37
Confirming the existence of the sensor
from the monitor......................................... A-37
If the displayed confirmation
result is NG....................................... A-37
Confirming/Setting the IP address of
the monitor.................................................. A-38
Confirming/Setting the IP address of
the sensor................................................... A-39
Confirming the router settings.................... A-40
Remedy when data transfer via FTP is
unavailable................................................. A-41
Initializing the Network Settings
(IP Reset Switch)............................................... A-43
Settings after initialization.............................. A-43
Connecting method after initialization............ A-43
For direct connection.......................... A-43
For network connection...................... A-43

1
This chapter explains the system configurations 1
and overview of IV/IV-G Series, how to check
Getting Started
Getting Started
package contents, and the name and function of
each part.
System Configuration........................................1-2
Overview of IV/IV-G Series.................................1-6
Checking the Package Contents.....................1-10
Name and Function of Each Part....................1-17
- IV/IV-G Series User's Manual (Monitor) - 1-1

System Configuration
1 Basic configurations of IV/IV-G Serie

Getting Started
When connecting with the Vision Sensor (IV Series)
Simulator
Intelligent Monitor
IV-Navigator IVP-Converter
IV-M30
Monitor power cable

OP-87443 (2 m)
OP-87444 (5 m)
OP-87445 (10 m)
Monitor cable for a

sensor with a built-in
amplifier
OP-87450 (2 m)
Eth OP-87451 (5 m)
ern OP-87452 (10 m)
et OP-87453 (20 m)
co
mm
un USB memory
ica
tio
n
(Optional)
Dome attachment
IV-D10
Polarizing filter attachment
Sensor OP-87436/OP-87437
IV-500C
IV-500CA Power I/O cable
IV-500M OP-87440 (2 m)
IV-500MA OP-87441 (5 m)
IV-150M OP-87442 (10 m)
IV-150MA
IV-2000M
IV-2000MA
24 V DC power
Photoelectric/ Indicator light/buzzer PLC

proximity sensor etc. etc. PLC can control the trigger
Sends the signal to the Alarm can be output by input and the status output
trigger input when the the status output function. function, and can switch the
target is detected. program number.
1-2 - IV/IV-G Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

When connecting with the Ultra Compact Vision Sensor (IV-G Series)
1
Getting Started
Simulator
Intelligent Monitor
IV-Navigator IVP-Converter
IV-M30
Monitor power cable

OP-87443 (2 m)
OP-87444 (5 m)
OP-87445 (10 m)
Ethernet cable
OP-87907 (1 m)
OP-87457 (2 m)
OP-87458 (5 m)
OP-87459 (10 m)
USB memory
Sensor Head
IV-G500CA
IV-G500MA
IV-G150MA I/O cable for IV-G series
IV-G300CA OP-87906
IV-G600MA
24 V DC power
Photoelectric/ Indicator light/buzzer PLC

proximity sensor etc. etc. PLC can control the trigger
Sends the signal to the Alarm can be output by input and the status output
trigger input when the the status output function. function, and can switch the
target is detected. program number.

1 Connecting the monitor and multiple sensors

Getting Started
When Direct Connection (2 units or more) or Network Connection is selected, the intelligent monitor (IV-M30)
can select a single sensor from among multiple sensors and connect with the selected sensor.
* The IV-M30 requires a power cable.
Intelligent Monitor Ethernet switch

IV-M30 (Example) NE-Q05
LAN cable
OP-87950 (1 m)
OP-87951 (3 m)
OP-87952 (5 m) Ethernet cable
OP-87953 (10 m) OP-87907 (1 m)
OP-87457 (2 m)
OP-87458 (5 m)
Sensor head/amplifier OP-87459 (10 m)
cable for IV-G series
OP-87903 (2 m)
OP-87904 (5 m)
OP-87905 (10 m)
Sensor Head
IV-G500CA
IV-G500MA
IV-G150MA
IV-G300CA Sensor
IV-G600MA IV-500C
IV-500CA
IV-500M
IV-500MA
IV-150M
IV-150MA
IV-2000M
IV-2000MA

MEMO
Getting Started

Overview of IV/IV-G Series
1 IV/IV-G Series
Getting Started
The IV/IV-G series is a Vision Sensor. This sensor can be attached easily so complicated detection
operations such as detecting the shapes of parts with a photoelectric switch can be achieved easily.
Operation condition settings require the intelligent monitor (IV-M30) or the PC software for IV/IV-G series
IV-Navigator (IV-H1).
The sensor with monitor and the sensor with PC are connected via an Ethernet so connection with multiple
sensors besides direct single connection can be performed.
Using with the intelligent monitor (IV-M30)

zz
Direct Connection (1 unit) zz
Direct Connection (2 units or more)/Network Connection
Ethernet switch
Functions of monitor
yySetting the sensor
yyMonitoring the
operation screen
yyMonitoring the
statistical information
yyReading the image
history
Power I/O
Functions of sensor
yyCamera
yyLighting
yyImage detection
yyI/O
yySaving the image
history

Using with the IV-Navigator (IV-H1)

1
Getting Started
The IV-Navigator has the same functions as the intelligent monitor (IV-M30), excluding the List of NG
Sensor Occurrences function and NG Hold function.
For details of operations using the IV-Navigator, refer to IV/IV-G Series Users Manual (PC Software).
zz
Direct Connection (1 unit) zz
Direct Connection (2 units or more)/Network Connection
Ethernet switch
Functions of IV-Navigator
yySetting the sensor
yyMonitoring the operation screen
yyMonitoring the statistical
information
yyReading the image history
yySimulator
Power I/O
Functions of sensor
yyCamera
yyLighting
yyImage detection
yyI/O
yySaving the image
history

1 Judgment processing flow

Getting Started
This section describes the basic judgment processing flow of this device.
Trigger input
BUSY output
Total status
output
Inputs the imaging startup signal by synchronizing to the

Trigger input target position from a photoelectric switch or PLC.
Also, the trigger can be input at a regular interval with an
internal trigger function.
Light up the built-in light and image the target by using the
Imaging CMOS image sensor. BUSY output function turns ON.
According to the settings of a detection tool, the image of the target

Tool processing is scanned for detecting whether a target is high or low quality.
Up to 16 detection tools can be set. Also, misaligned
positions of the target can be corrected by using the
position adjustment tool.
After the detection process is completed, the BUSY output
function turns OFF.
Outputs the status results.
Status output When the total status result is OK, the total status output
is ON.
When the total status result is NG, the total status NG
output is ON.
Saves the image to the image history memory in the sensor.

Save images Conditions for saving the image can be selected from NG
only or All.
Color type can save 100 images, and monochrome type
can save 300 images.
* When the FTP client function is used, color type can save
70 images, and monochrome type can save 210 images.

MEMO
Getting Started

Checking the Package Contents
1 IV/IV-G series are constructed by each following model. Check that all the following packed items are
packed for each model you purchased before using.
Getting Started
Ultra Compact Vision Sensor (IV-G series): Sensor head
yyIV-G500CA yyIV-G500MA yyIV-G150MA yyIV-G300CA yyIV-G600MA
Sensor head x 1
Name and Function of Each Part (Page 1-17)
Mounting the Sensor (Page 2-2)
Cables (Page 2-17)
Ultra Compact Vision Sensor (IV-G series): Sensor amplifier
yyIV-G10 (Main) yyIV-G15 (Expansion)

Instruction Manual x 1 End unit x 2
LAN port cap (for Main)
Power terminal block

(mounted in the amplifier)
Sensor amplifier (Main) x 1 Sensor amplifier

(Expansion) x 1
Cables (Page 2-17)

Optional parts for the Ultra Compact Vision Sensor (IV-G series) 1
Getting Started
Dome attachment Spread lens attachment
yyIV-GD05 yyOP-87902 (Spread lens attachment for IV-
G150MA)
Mounting screw
(M4 x L7) x 2
Mounting screw
Mounting screw
(M3 x L5) x 2
Dome attachment for (M4 x L10) x 2
* Double-washer sems screw
IV-G series (Small) * Double-washer sems screw Spread lens
attachment x 1 Instruction Manual x 1
Instruction Manual x 1
Using the polarizing filter attachment
yyIV-GD10 (OP-87899/OP-87900/OP-87901) or spread lens
attachment (OP-87902) (Page 2-8)
Mounting screw Sensor head/amplifier cable for

(M4 x L7) x 2
IV-Gseries
Mounting screw
(M4 x L10) x 2 yyOP-87903 (2 m) yyOP-87904 (5 m)
* Double-washer sems screw yyOP-87905 (10 m)
Dome attachment for
IV-G series (Large)
Using the dome attachment (IV-GD05/
IV-GD10) (Page 2-6)
Sensor head/amplifier cable for IV-G series x 1
Polarizing filter attachment Connecting the Ultra Compact Vision Sensor
yyOP-87899 (Polarizing filter attachment for (IV-G series) (Page 2-17)
IV-G500CA/500MA/150MA)
yyOP-87900 I/O cable for IV-G series
(Polarizing filter attachment for IV-G300CA) yyOP-87906 (3 m)
yyOP-87901
(Polarizing filter attachment for IV-G600MA)
Mounting screw
(M3 x L5) x 1
I/O cable for IV-G series x 1
Connecting the Ultra Compact Vision Sensor
Instruction Manual x 1 (IV-G series) (Page 2-17)
Polarizing filter
attachment x 1
(OP-87899/OP-87900/OP-87901) or spread lens

1 Vertical mounting bracket for Adjustable bracket for IV-G series

IV-Gseries
Getting Started
yyOP-87910
yyOP-87908
Mounting screw
(M4 x L8) x 2
Mounting screw
Mounting *D
ouble-washer
(M4 x L8) x 2
bracket x 1 sems screw Bracket x 1
Mounting bracket x 1 * Double-washer sems screw

IV-Gseries
yyOP-87909
Mounting screw
(M4 x L8) x 2
Mounting bracket x 1
Vision Sensor (IV series): Sensor
yyIV-500C yyIV-500CA yyIV-500M yyIV-500MA

yyIV-150M yyIV-150MA yyIV-2000M yyIV-2000MA
Waterproof cap for Ethernet connector x 1
Mounting adapter x 1
Screw for mounting
adapter x 1
Flathead screwdriver x 1
Sensor x 1
(Manual focus type only)
The mounting adapter is mounted with the sensors in the Instruction Manual x 1
default factory setting.
Cables (Page 2-17)

Optional parts for the Vision Sensor (IV series) 1
Getting Started
Dome attachment
yyIV-D10
Mounting screw x 2
Hexagon wrench
Dome attachment x 1 (L-shaped) x 1
Using the dome attachment (IV-D10) (Page 2-11)
Polarized visible light filter attachment Power I/O cable (M12 12pin - strand wire)
yyOP-87436 yyOP-87440 (2m)
yyOP-87441 (5m)
yyOP-87442 (10m)
Mounting screw x 2
Polarized visible light

filter attachment x 1
Using the polarizing filter attachment (OP-87436/
OP-87437) (Page 2-12)
Power I/O cable (M12 12pin - strand wire) x 1
Infrared polarization filter attachment
Mounting adapter
yyOP-87437
yyOP-87460
Mounting screw x 2
Screw for the mounting
adapter x 1
Infrared polarization
filter attachment x 1 Mounting adapter x 1
Using the polarizing filter attachment (OP-87436/ Same as accessories for the sensor.
OP-87437) (Page 2-12) Optional parts in case of loss/damage.

1 Front cover (for replacement) Bracket

Getting Started
yyOP-87461
yyOP-87685
Screw for the bracket and
Mounting screw x 2 nut x 1
Mounting screw x 4
Bracket A x 1
Front cover (for
replacement) x 1 O-shaped ring
(Small x 2, Large x 1)
Bracket B x 1
Hexagon wrench (L-shaped) x 1

Optional parts for replacement.
Replacing the front cover (Page A-45)
Intelligent Monitor
yyIV-M30
Wall mounting adapter x 1

Stylus x 1
Screw for the adapter x 2
String for hanging the stylus x 1
Hexagon nut x 2
Monitor x 1
Starting Guide x 1
Mounting the Monitor (Page 2-13)
Cables (Page 2-17)

Optional parts for the monitor 1
Getting Started
Monitor power cable Wall mounting adapter
(M8 4pin - strand wire) yyOP-87464
yyOP-87443 (2m)
yyOP-87444 (5m)
yyOP-87445 (10m)
Screw for the adapter x 2
Hexagon nut x 2
Wall mounting adapter x 1

Same as accessories for monitors.
Optional parts in case of loss/damage.
Monitor power cable (M8 4pin - strand wire)
Panel mounting adapter
Protection sheet yyOP-87465
yyOP-87463
Mounting screw (lateral) x 2

Mounting screw (front) x 4
Protection sheet x 1
Panel mounting
Attaching the protection sheet (Page A-45)
adapter x 1
Mounting to a panel (Page 2-15)
USB memory (1GB)
yyOP-87502 DIN mounting adapter
yyOP-87466
USB memory x 1
Mounting screw (lateral) x 2
Stylus
yyOP-87462
DIN mounting
adapter x 1
String for hanging the
stylus x 1 Mounting to the DIN rail (Page 2-16)
Stylus x 1
Same as accessories for monitors.
Optional parts in case of loss/damage.

1 Communication Cable
Getting Started
Monitor cable for a sensor with a built- LAN cable (RJ-45 - RJ-45)
in amplifier (M12 4pin - M12 4pin)
yyOP-87950 (1 m)
yyOP-87450 (2 m) yyOP-87951 (3 m)
yyOP-87451 (5 m) yyOP-87952 (5 m)
yyOP-87452 (10 m) yyOP-87953 (10 m)
yyOP-87453 (20 m)
LAN cable (RJ-45 - RJ-45) x 1

Monitor cable for a sensor with a built-in amplifier
(M12 4pin - M12 4pin) x1
The monitor cable for a sensor with a built-in

amplifier is the cable for connecting the IV series
sensor (IV-500C/IV-500CA/V-500M/IV-500MA/
IV-150M/IV-150MA/IV-2000M/IV-2000MA) and the
monitor.
Ethernet cable (M12 4pin - RJ-45)

yyOP-87907 (1 m)
yyOP-87457 (2 m)
yyOP-87458 (5 m)
yyOP-87459 (10 m)
Ethernet cable (M12 4pin - RJ-45) x 1

Name and Function of Each Part
Ultra Compact Vision Sensor (IV-G

Operation of the sensor head indicator 1
series): Sensor head light
Getting Started
yyIV-G500CA yyIV-G500MA yyIV-G150MA
yyIV-G300CA yyIV-G600MA
Name and function of each part of the

sensor head
Indicator light
yyGreen (ON).......Comprehensive result is OK.
yyGreen (Blink).....Under startup or setting
in progress. Operation is
stopped.
1 2 2 3 4 5 6 7
Blinks once a second.
1 Indicator light yyRed (ON)...........Comprehensive result is NG.
Indicates the operating status of the sensor yyRed (Blink)........An error has occurred.
head. yy(OFF)................Standby status until the
Name and function of each part of the first judgment finishes after
sensor head (Page 1-17) starting the operation or
2 Mounting part after switching the program
Used for mounting the sensor head. number.
Also used for mounting to the dome attachment The versions of the sensor
for IV-G series. head and sensor amplifier do
Mounting the sensor head of the Ultra Compact not match.
Vision Sensor (IV-G series) (Page 2-4) yyGreen and red are ...LED Blinking is requested.
blinking alternately
3 Connector for sensor head/amplifier cable
for IV-G series
The connector can rotate.
Example of rotating
4 Camera and built-in light
5 Mounting part for the spread lens attachment
for IV-G150MA
6 Mounting part for polarizing filter attachment
for IV-G500CA/500MA/150MA, polarizing filter
attachment for IV-G300CA, polarizing filter
attachment for IV-G600MA
for IV-G series
Cables (Page 2-17)

1 Ultra Compact Vision Sensor 5 IP reset switch

Used for resetting the IP address assigned to
(IV-G series): Sensor amplifier
Getting Started
this sensor amplifier.

yyIV-G10 yyIV-G15 Initializing the Network Settings (IP Reset
Switch) (Page A-43)

6 Add-on connector
sensor amplifier
Used for adding the IV-G15 (Expansion).
IV-G10
Mounting the sensor amplifier of the Ultra
1 Compact Vision Sensor (IV-G series)
5 (Page 2-5)
2 Protection sheet is attached for shipping.
7 Power terminal block
3 Supplies power to the IV-G10. This is not
equipped with the IV-G15.
4 6 8 Add-on connector
7 Used for connecting the IV-G10 (Main).
IV-G15
1
3
5
4
8

for IV-G series
Cables (Page 2-17)
2 Indicator light
Indicates the operating status of the sensor
amplifier.
sensor head (Page 1-17)
3 Ethernet connector
Used for connecting with the intelligent monitor
(IV-M30) or PC.
Cables (Page 2-17)
When the connector is not used, attach the
included LAN port cap.
4 I/O connector
Used for connecting the I/O cable for
IV-Gseries (OP-87906).

Operation of the sensor amplifier 4 STATUS 1

indicator light Indicates the connection status within the
Getting Started
monitor.
yyGreen (ON).......Normally connected with
monitor or PC.
1
yyGreen (Blink).....IP address has been retrieved
2 but the sensor amplifier is
3 not correctly connected with
monitor or PC.
4
yyRed (ON)...........The IP address coincides with
5 other device or a network loop
is detected.
yy(OFF)................IP address is not assigned.
1 PWR/ERR Sensor amplifier is not
yyGreen (ON).......Operating. correctly connected with
yyGreen (Blink).....Under startup or setting monitor or PC.
in progress. Operation is 5 LINK/ACT
stopped. Blinks once a Indicates the linking status within monitor or
second. Ethernet switch.
yyRed (ON)...........Unrecoverable error has yyGreen (ON).......Normally linked.
occurred. yyGreen (Blink).....Normally linked, and the data
yyRed (Blink)........Recoverable error has is sending/receiving.
occurred. yy(OFF)................Sensor is not normally linked.
yy(OFF)................Power is not supplied.
2 OUT
Indicates the comprehensive result.
yyGreen................Comprehensive result is OK.
yyRed...................Comprehensive result is NG.
yy(OFF)................Setting processing.
Standby status until the
first judgment finishes after
starting the operation or
after switching the program
number.
3 TRIG
Green light lights up (one-shot) according to
input of the internal or external trigger.

1 Vision Sensor (IV series): Sensor 4 Connector for monitor cable/Ethernet cable
Connector for connecting a monitor cable or
Getting Started
yyIV-500C yyIV-500CA yyIV-500M Ethernet cable. Use this for connecting the
yyIV-500MA yyIV-150M yyIV-150MA monitor, PC, or Ethernet switch.
yyIV-2000M yyIV-2000MA Cables (Page 2-17)

sensor When the cable is not connected, attach
1 the waterproof cap for Ethernet connector
to maintain enclosure rating.
2 Tightening torque : 0.45 to 0.55 Nm
3
4 5 Indicator light
Indicates the operating status of the sensor.
Operation of the indicator light (Page 1-21)
5 6 Built-in light
LED light that illuminates the target
7 Camera
Images the object.
8 Front cover
Protects the camera and built-in lights.
The front cover is protected by the protection
sheet (blue) in the default factory setting. Remove
the sheet when the sensor is to be used.
Front cover for replacement is provided for
6 maintenance.
Replacing the front cover (Page A-45)
7
8
1 Mounting adapter
Use this for mounting and fixing the sensor.
2 Connector for power I/O cable

Connector for connecting the power I/O cable.
Use this for supplying the power to the sensor
and for connecting with external devices.
Cables (Page 2-17)
3 Focusing position adjustment screw

(manual focus type only)
Adjusts the focus of the displayed image.
Focus Adjustment (Page 4-13)

Operation of the indicator light 3 TRIG 1

Details on operations of the indicator light are Green light lights up (one-shot) according to
Getting Started
shown below. input of the internal or external trigger.
4 5 4 STATUS
Indicates the connection status within the monitor.
yyGreen (ON).......Normally connected with
monitor.
yyGreen (Blink).....IP address has been retrieved
but the sensor is not correctly
connected with monitor.
yy(OFF)................IP address is not assigned.
1 2 3
Sensor is not correctly
1 PWR/ERR connected with monitor.
Indicates the power supplying status to the yyOrange (Blink)...Indicates the focusing status
sensor and the error status of the sensor. while adjusting the focusing
yyGreen (ON).......Operating. position with the blinking speed
yyGreen (Blink).....Setting processing. Operation (manual focus type only).
is stopped. Blinks once a Focus adjustment for the
second. manual focusing type (IV-500C/
yyRed (ON)...........Unrecoverable error has IV-500M/IV-150M/IV-2000M)
occurred. (Page 4-15)
yyRed (Blink)........Recoverable error has When the sensor cannot correctly connect with
occurred. the monitor, refer to Remedy when the
yy(OFF)................Power is not supplied. Monitor cannot be Connected with the Sensor
Adjusting the focusing position (Page A-29).
(manual focus only).
For countermeasures when an error occurred, 5 LINK/ACT
refer to Error Messages (Page A-23). Indicates the linking status within monitor or
Ethernet switch.
2 OUT
yyGreen (ON).......Normally linked.
Indicates the comprehensive result.
yyGreen (Blink).....Normally linked, and the data
yyGreen................Comprehensive result is OK.
is sending/receiving.
yyRed...................Comprehensive result is NG.
yy(OFF)................Sensor is not normally linked.
yy(OFF)................Setting processing.
Standby status until the first
During searching for the sensor to be connected
judgment finishes after starting
using Direct Connection (2 units or more)
the operation or after switching
and tapping the [LED Blinking] button, [PWR/
the program number.
ERR], [OUT], and [STATUS] blink in orange
yyOrange (Blink)...Indicates the focusing status
simultaneously.
while adjusting the focusing
position with the blinking speed
(manual focus type only).
Focus adjustment for the
manual focusing type (IV-500C/
IV-500M/IV-150M/IV-2000M)
(Page 4-15)

1 Monitor 4 Indicator light (PWR)

Indicates the operating status of the monitor.
Getting Started
3 yyGreen (ON).......The power is turned ON.

yyRed (ON)...........Unrecoverable error occurred
to the sensor or monitor.
yyRed (Blink)........Recoverable error occurred to
4
the sensor or monitor.
5
yy(OFF)................
The power is turned OFF.
6
For countermeasures when an error occurred,
refer to Error Messages (Page A-23).
7
5 Indicator light (SENSOR)
Indicates the connecting status to the sensor.
yyGreen (ON).......Connected normally to the
sensor.
yyGreen ....Linked normally but it is not
8 (Slowly blinks) properly connected to the
1 2 sensor.
yy(OFF)................It is not properly connected
because it did not link
normally.
If the monitor cannot correctly connect with the
9 sensor, refer to Remedy when the Monitor
cannot be Connected with the Sensor (Page A-29).
6 LCD monitor/Stylus
Displays the operation screen and setup screen.
10 Operates by touching the screen with the stylus.
7 USB connecting connector
Connector for connecting the USB memory.
1 Power connector Connector is protected by the cover.
Connects the monitor power cable. Saving the Sensor Settings and Images to a
Cables (Page 2-17) USB Memory (Page 6-25)
2 Connector for the monitor cable/Ethernet 8 Stylus
cable Used to operate the touch-screen.
Connector for connecting the monitor cable or 9 Stylus holder
Ethernet cable. Used when connecting with the
Stores the stylus.
sensor or Ethernet switch.
Cables (Page 2-17) 10 Strap holder
3 Unlock button Holds the strap or hangs the stylus.
Push this button when dismounting the monitor from
the wall mounting adapter or DIN mounting adapter.
Unmounting from the wall mounting adapter
(Page 2-14)
Unmounting from the DIN mounting adapter
(Page 2-16)

2
This chapter explains how to mount the sensor and
monitor, and explains connection procedures.
Installation and
2
Connection
Installation and Connection

Mounting the Sensor..........................................2-2
Mounting the Monitor.......................................2-12
Cables................................................................2-16

Mounting the Sensor
Mounting the Sensor
For Ultra Compact Vision Sensor zz

IV-G150MA
(IV-G series) Installed distance
View H (mm) View V (mm)
2 yyIV-G500CA yyIV-G500MA yyIV-G150MA
WD (mm)
40 8 6
yyIV-G300CA yyIV-G600MA 50 11 8
100 22 16
Mounting the sensor head 150 34 24
Do not place the sensor in the environment zz

IV-G500CA / IV-G500MA
that exceeds the limit of sensor's resistance Installed distance
to the environment, or environment that View H (mm) View V (mm)
WD (mm)
propagates the vibration directly to the sensor.
Those may cause a damage or malfunction. 20 10 7.5
50 20 15
100 40 30
yyView and optical axis have individual differences. 200 80 60
Adjust the position by checking the actual image 300 120 90
at the time of installation. 400 160 120
yyPlace the sensor where no ambient light has 500 200 150
effect. Ambient light includes solar light, lights of
other devices, and photoelectric sensors. Also,
be careful when the light intensity of the ambient
zz
IV-G300CA
light changes. Use the shield to protect when Installed distance
View H (mm) View V (mm)
the location cannot be changed. WD (mm)
yyPlace the sensor where no object can block out 40 42 31
the internal light or the view of the sensor. 100 95 71
yyDetection may become unstable due to the 150 140 105
lights if multiple sensors are placed nearby each 200 185 139
other. Take measures as described below. 250 230 172
yyUse the mutual interference prevention function. 300 275 206
yyDelay the timing of external trigger inputs.
yyUse the shield to avoid interference.
zz
IV-G600MA
Installed distance
Checking the view and installed View H (mm) View V (mm)
WD (mm)
distance (IV-G series) 40 42 31
For IV-G series, installed distance between the view 100 95 72
and target is different depending on the type of the 200 185 140
sensor head. Check the type of the sensor head to be 300 275 208
used and its view, and place it in the proper distance. 400 365 276
View H 500 455 344
600 550 412
Indicator light
View V
Installed distance WD
View V = View H x 0.75
(H : V = 4 : 3)

Mounting the Sensor
For Vision Sensor (IV series) Checking the view and installed
distance (IV series)
yyIV-500C
yyIV-500MA
yyIV-500CA
yyIV-150M
yyIV-500M
yyIV-150MA For IV Series, installed distance between the view 2
yyIV-2000M yyIV-2000MA and object is different depending on the type of the

sensor. Check the type of the sensor to be used
Do not place the sensor in the environment and its view, and place it in the proper distance.
that exceeds the limit of sensor's resistance
View H
to the environment, or environment that
propagates the vibration directly to the
sensor. Those may cause a damage or
malfunction.
Indicator light View V
yyManual focus type needs to adjust the focusing

position after installed. Reserve the enough Installed distance
space to adjust and install it. WD
yyAt the time of installation, it is better to enable
View V = View H x 0.75
the position or direction adjustment of the
(H : V = 4 : 3)
sensor by installing the adjustment system at
the sensor mounting area.
yyView and optical axis have individual differences.
Adjust the position by checking the actual image
at the time of installation.
yyPlace the sensor where no ambient light has The sensor amplifier
indicator light is the
effect. Ambient light includes solar light, lights of front surface of an
other devices, and photoelectric sensors. Also, image.
be careful when the light intensity of the ambient
light changes. Use the shield to protect when the
location cannot be changed.
yyPlace the sensor where no object can block out
the internal light or the view of the sensor.
yyDetection may become unstable due to the
lights if multiple sensors are placed nearby each
other. Take measures as described below.
yyDelay the timing of external trigger inputs.
yyUse the shield to avoid interference.

Mounting the Sensor
zz
Standard range type (color/monochrome) Mounting the sensor head of the Ultra
600
Compact Vision Sensor (IV-G series)
2
Installed distance WD (mm)
500
yyIV-G500CA yyIV-G500MA yyIV-G150MA
yyIV-G300CA yyIV-G600MA
400
300
Mounting the sensor head
200
150
When screws are secured from the
100 sensor head
50 yyScrew : M3 x 2
0
25 50 70 100 130 150 200 250 yyTightening torque : 0.3 to 0.6 Nm
210
View H (mm)
zz
Short range type
150

When screws are secured from the wall
100 yyScrew : M4 x 2
yyTightening torque : 0.7 to 1.5Nm
yyScrew hole on the sensor head: M4 female
50 (whose length of screw engagement should
be 2.5 to 3.5 mm)
0
10 12 20 30 36 40
View H (mm)
zz
Long range type
2500
2000
1500 Attaching the optional mounting

bracket
1000

When using the vertical mounting
500
bracket for IV-G series (OP-87908)
300
Attach the bracket using the screws attached to
0
45 100 200 300 400 OP-87908.
View H (mm) yyTightening torque : 0.7 to 1.5Nm
The value of View H and V will be a half of the Mounting
value on the figures above when using the digital examples
zooming function.

Mounting the Sensor
When using the transverse mounting Mounting the sensor amplifier of the Ultra
bracket for IV-G series (OP-87909) Compact Vision Sensor (IV-G series)
Attach the bracket using the screws attached to 2
OP-87909. Mounting the IV-G10 (Main)

1 Adjust the position of the DIN mounting
Mounting adapter and the DIN rail by pulling down the
examples stopper of the sensor amplifier IV-G10 (Main),
and then push up the stopper to lock it.
When using the adjustable bracket for

IV-G series (OP-87910)
Attach the bracket using the screws attached to
OP-87910.
Mounting
examples
Stopper
Mounting the IV-G15 (Expansion)

An expansion unit is used for attaching to the main unit.
When using the adjustable bracket for IV-G One expansion unit can be added to one main unit.
series (OP-87910), connect the convex part to
the sensor head. yyFor adding an expansion unit, be sure to
mount it to the DIN rail.
yyWhen a sensor amplifier (Expansion) is to
be added, confirm that the power is turned
Convex OFF. If the sensor amplifier is added with
part the power ON, the device may be damaged.
yyBe sure to push the sensor amplifier
(Expansion) into the main unit all the way.
If the sensor amplifier is connected at an
angle or is not push into the main unit
firmly, the device may be damaged.
1 Remove the protection seal form the

sensor amplifier IV-G10 (Main).
IV-G10 (Main)
Protection seal

Mounting the Sensor
2 Mount the sensor amplifier IV-G15 Mounting the attachment for IV-G
(Expansion added) to the DIN rail. series
2 Attach it in the same way as
IV-G10 (Main) (Page 2-5).
Mounting the

3 Mount the expansion unit to the main unit IV-GD10)

until it clicks.
IV-G10 (Main)
yyUse the dome attachment at a correct installation
distance. Failure to do so may lose the effect of
the dome attachment.
IV-G15 yyAdjust the brightness with the dome attachment
(Expansion) mounted.
Auto Brightness Adjustment (Page 4-12)
yyFor the color type, adjust the white balance with
the dome attachment mounted.
White Balance (for color type only)
(Page 6-50)

Mounting the dome attachment
1 Mount the IV-G series sensor head on the
4 Attach the end units (OP-26751: 2 pack) dome attachment for IV-G series with the
front side of the sensor head connected
on both sides of the main and expansion
units mounted, and secure them with two to the attachment.
screws on each side.
Attach the sensor amplifier to the DIN rail

then set it on the sheet metal.
When the IV-GD05 is used When the IV-GD10 is used
Attach the sensor head so that the light-

receiving part of the sensor head fits into the
hole of the dome attachment for IV-Gseries.

Mounting the Sensor
2 Fix the dome attachment for IV-G series

Mounting examples
with attached mounting screws. Mounting screw (long)
yyTightening torque : 0.5N m (M4 x L10)
2

IV-G series
(OP-87909)
Screws for
Mounting screw securing the
(short) sensor head
(M4 x L7) x 2 are tightened
on this side.
Use the attached mounting screws (M4 x L7)

for mounting the IV-G series sensor head. To attach the adjustable bracket for IV-G series
yyIf the attached mounting screws (M4 x L10) (OP-87910), connect the convex part to the
or screws with no double-washer sems IV-GD05/IV-GD10.
(M4 x L7) are used, the sensor head may be
damaged.
yyThe attached mounting screws (M4 x L10)
are used for securing the mounting bracket.
yyIf the attached mounting screws are not to
be used, use double-washer sems screws
(M4 x L7). Convex part
yyTighten the mounting screws on the one side

of the sensor head. If they are to be used on If the sensor head and dome attachment
for IV-G series are to be directly mounted
the opposite side, tighten them on the same
to sheet metal without using the transverse
side.
mounting bracket for IV-G series (OP87909),
yyThe mounting method for the IV-GD10 is
vertical mounting bracket for IV-G series
described here. The IV-GD05 can also be
(OP87908), or adjustable bracket for IV-G
mounted in the same way.
series (OP87910), pay attention to the
following items:
The vertical mounting bracket for IV-G series yyIf they are to be secured from the sheet metal
(OP-87908), transverse mounting bracket for side with screws, be sure to use M4 screws
IV-G series (OP-87909), or adjustable bracket for (whose length of screw engagement should
IV-G series (OP-87910) can be used with the be 2.5 to 3.5 mm), and the tightening torque
IV-GD05/IV-GD10 mounted on the sensor head. should be 0.7 to 1.5 Nm.
To use the bracket, attach it on the other side of yyIf the screws are to be secured from the
the sensor head on which the mounting screws sensor head side, be sure to use the M3
(M4 x L7) were tightened in step 2. screws double-washer sems screws
To attach the bracket, use the two attached or screws with spring washer and flat
mounting screws (M4 x L10). washer should be used, and the tightening
torque should be 0.5 Nm. If screws larger
than M4 are used, the sensor head will be
damaged.

Mounting the Sensor

If the IV-GD05/IV-GD10 is used with the
(OP-87899/OP-87900/OP-87901) or
2 IV-G300CA/IV-G600MA, the view will be as shown
below.
spread lens attachment (OP-87902)
When the IV-G300CA is used
Installed distance View View yyAdjust brightness with the polarization filter
WD (mm) H (mm) V (mm) attachment mounted.
0 24 31 Auto Brightness Adjustment (Page 4-12)
30 46 51
the polarization filter attachment mounted.
When the IV-G600MA is used White Balance (for color type only)
Installed distance View View (Page 6-50)
WD (mm) H (mm) V (mm)
0 38 45

Mounting the polarizing filter
attachment for IV-G500CA/500MA/
50 73 78
150MA (OP-87899), polarizing filter
attachment for IV-G300CA (OP-87900),
or polarizing filter attachment for
IV-G600MA (OP-87901)
1 Hook the groove on the sensor head

onto the hook on the polarizing filter
attachment, and push it in until you hear
the clicking sound.
Hook the groove
on the sensor head
onto the hook on the
attachment.
Push until you hear

the clicking sound.

Mounting the Sensor
2 Secure the polarizing filter attachment with Mounting the Vision Sensor
the attached screw. (IV series)
yyIV-500C yyIV-500CA yyIV-500M
2
yyIV-500MA yyIV-150M yyIV-150MA

yyIV-2000M yyIV-2000MA
Mounting the mounting adapter

Use the mounting adapter (accessory or OP-87460)
to mount the sensor.
Mounting the spread lens attachment

for IV-G150MA (OP-87902)
The mounting adapter is mounted with the sensors in
(for the IV-G150MA)
the default factory setting. Remove it from the sensor.
Unmounting the sensor (Page 2-10)
1 Mount the sensor head to the spread lens
attachment with correct orientation, as
Mounting on the wall
shown below. yyScrew : M3 x 4
Use the commercially available screws which
have head thickness of 3 mm or lower.
yyTightening torque : 1.0 Nm or lower
2 Secure the spread lens attachment with the

attached screw.
Mounting from the jig side
yyScrew : M4 x 4
Use the commercially available screws.
For details on mounting hole dimensions, refer to

Dimensions (Page 8-8).

Mounting the Sensor
Mounting the sensor onto the mounting Unmounting the sensor

adapter
2 1 Dismount the screw.
1 Mount the sensor to the left and right
stopper on the mounting adapter.

Sensors cannot be mounted on the side with the
indicator light.
Indicator light
Push the sensor to the

stopper of the fixing screw
2 Pull out the stopper of the mounting
adapter and unmount the sensor.
Pull out the

stopper
Push until you hear the clicking sound from

the both side stoppers
2 Fix the mounting adapter and sensor

using the attached screws.
yyScrew : M3 x 1
Use the attached screws.
yyTightening torque : 0.45 to 0.55 Nm
Remove the
protection sheet

Mounting the Sensor
Mounting the attachment for 2 Fix the dome attachment with attached
IVseries dedicated screws.
yyScrew : Dedicated screw x 2
Use the attached dedicated screws.
2
Using the dome attachment (IV-D10)

The supported models are IV-500C/IV-500CA/
IV-500M/IV-500MA/IV-150M/IV-500MA.
yyDo not remove the front cover of the sensor.

yyUse the dome attachment at a correct
installation distance. Failure to do so may lose
the effect of the dome attachment.
yyAdjust the brightness with the dome attachment
mounted.
the dome attachment mounted.
White Balance (for color type only) (Page 6-50)

Installed distance of the dome
Mounting the dome attachment attachment

62 to 112 mm from the front face of the sensor
1 Mount the attachment by aligning the (0 to 50 mm from the front face of the dome attachment)
concave part of the dome attachment with
the mounting screw of the front cover of Sensor type
the sensor. yyStandard range type
yyShort range type
Installed distance
from the front face
of the sensor
Screw hole for
mounting the
attachment
62 to 112 mm
Front cover
mounting screw Concave part
(0 to 50 mm)
Concave part
Target

Mounting the Sensor
Using the polarizing filter attachment 2 Fix the polarizing filter attachment with
the attached dedicated screws.
(OP-87436/OP-87437)
2 yyScrew : M2.5 x 2
Use the attached dedicated screws.
yyDo not remove the front cover of the sensor.

yyThere are the polarized visible light filter
attachment (OP-87436) and the infrared
polarization filter attachment (OP-87437). Use
the correct polarization filter attachment in
accordance with the illuminant of the sensor light.
Failure to do so may lose the effect.
yyAdjust the brightness with the polarization filter
attachment mounted.
the polarization filter attachment mounted. Remove the protection sheet
(blue)
White Balance (for color type only) (Page 6-50)
1 Mount the attachment by aligning the

concave part of the polarizing filter
attachment with the mounting screw of
the front cover of the sensor.
Screw hole for

mounting the
attachment
Front cover
mounting screw
Concave part
Concave part

Mounting the Monitor
Mounting to a wall Mounting with the wall mounting

Use the wall mounting adapter (accessories or OP- adapter
87464). The monitor can be operated by the following 2
Hang it on the hook with the wall mounting adapter methods.

mounted to the monitor, or mount the monitor to the yyUnhang to pick up the monitor from the hook and
wall mounting adapter mounted on the wall. operate it.
yyOperate it while mounted on the wall.
Hanging on the hook
For operation take the monitor from the hook and 1 Mount the wall mounting adapter to the wall.
operate it while holding it in your hands. zz
Mounting by creating a screw hole in the wall
yyScrew : M3 x 2
1 Mount the monitor to the wall mounting Use commercially available screws.
adapter by aligning the stopper of the wall yyTightening torque : 0.27 to 0.33 Nm
mounting adapter to the groove on the
rear monitor.
Slide the monitor down all the way, and confirm
that the monitor is locked.
zz
Mounting by creating a plated through
hole on the panel
yyScrew : M3 x 2, Nut : M3 x 2
Use the attached screws and nuts.
Stopper
2 Hang the monitor on the hook.

2 Mount the monitor to the wall mounting Unmounting from the wall mounting
adapter by aligning the stopper of the wall
adapter
2 mounting adapter to the groove on the
rear monitor. Unlock the monitor from the wall mounting adapter
Slide the monitor down all the way, and confirm by pulling toward the unlock button. And slide up to
that the monitor is locked. unmount the monitor mounted to the adapter.
Unlock
Stopper

Mounting to a panel 3 Mount the monitor with the panel adapter

mounted to the control board from the
Operate the monitor by mounting it to the panel
side such as a control board.
rear side, and fix it with the screws.
yyMountable board thickness : 1 to 4 mm
2
Mount the panel adapter (OP-87465) to the monitor,
yyScrew : M3, 7 mm long, with 4 washers

and mount it to the panel.
Mounting to a panel
1 Connect the power cable and monitor

cable to the monitor.
Cables (Page 2-17)
2 Mount the panel adapter to the monitor

and fix it with the attached screws.
Strap holder
yyScrew : M3, 11 mm long, with 2 washers
Stylus can be hung from the strap holder using

the hanging string (accessory).
Panel cutting dimension

(Panel cutting square hole dimension)
111 +1
(Panel cutting square hole dimension)
-0
4-3.5
(Circular hole position for screw)
+1
92 -0
100
110
(Circular hole position for screw)

Mounting to the DIN rail 2 Adjust the position of the DIN mounting
adapter and the DIN rail by pulling down
Mount the DIN mounting adapter (OP-87466) to the
2 monitor, and mount it to the DIN rail.
the stopper of the adapter, and then push
up the stopper to lock it.
The monitor can be operated by the following methods.
yyPick up the monitor from the DIN mounting

adapter and operate it.
yyOperate it while mounted on the DIN rail.
Mounting using DIN mounting adapter
1 Mount the monitor to the DIN mounting Stopper

adapter.
Slide the monitor until the end of the stopper,
and confirm that the monitor is locked.
Unmounting from the DIN mounting
adapter
Unlock the monitor from the DIN mounting adapter
by pulling toward the unlock button. And slide up to
unmount the monitor mounted to the adapter.
Unlock
Stopper
zz
Fixing to the DIN mounting adapter
To fix the monitor to the DIN mounting adapter,
use the attached screws.
yyScrew : M3 x 2
Use the attached flat head screw.

Cables
Cables
Connecting the Ultra Compact Connecting the sensor head/amplifier

Vision Sensor (IV-G series) cable for IV-G series and sensor
amplifier 2
Connecting the sensor head/amplifier

cable for IV-G series and sensor head 1 Insert the cable into the sensor as shown
below.
1 Insert the cable into the sensor as shown Adjust the pins and
the pin connection
below.
Adjust the pins and the
pin connection
2 Turn the screw-on connector in the

2 Turn the screw-on connector in the clockwise direction to tighten it.
clockwise direction to tighten it. yyTightening torque : 0.4 to 0.8 Nm
yyTightening torque : 0.8Nm or less
To tighten the screw by hand, turn it until the

connector of the cable touches the sensor
head firmly. Then turn it more about by 5
using a tool such as plyers.

Cables
Connecting the cable to the sensor

Connecting the I/O cable (OP-87906)
amplifier Connect the cable to the sensor amplifier as
2 shown below.
Align the connectors.

Connecting the
Ethernet cable
Connecting the
I/O cable for IV-G series

Connecting the Ethernet cable or
LANcable
Connect the cable to the sensor amplifier as To disconnect the cable, hold the tabs on both
shown below. sides of the connector pushed in and pull it out.
To disconnect the cable, pull the cable while

holding the tab on the Ethernet cable pushed in.

Cables
zz
Terminal number and wiring color of the I/
O cable for IV-G series (OP-87906) yyIndividually insulate the unused input-
Terminal Wiring
Assigning output cables.
yyFor input cables of this sensor, connect
2
Name default Description
No. color with non-contact output (transistor output/

value
SSR output). For contact output (relay
Set external output), incorrect input may be operated
trigger.
Ext. due to the contact bouncing.
A1 Brown IN1 Rising timing ()
Trigger
or falling timing
() can be set.
zz
Pin assignment (I/O cable for IV-G series:
connector side)
A2 Red IN2 OFF Input assignable
A3 Orange IN3 OFF function
yyProgram bit0 to
A4 Yellow IN4 OFF bit4
yyClear Error
A5 Green IN5 OFF
yyExt. Master Save A10 B10
A6 Blue IN6 OFF yyOFF (not used)

A1 B1 B10 A10
A7 Purple Unused Unused
A8 Gray Unused Unused
Unused B1 A1
A9 White Unused Unused
A10 Black Unused Unused
Total Status Output
B1 Brown OUT1
(N.O.) assignable
function
BUSY
B2 Red OUT2 yyTotal Status
(N.O.) yyTotal Status NG Pin No. Color Pin No. Color
Error yyRUN
B3 Orange OUT3 B10 Black A10 Black
(N.C.) yyBUSY
yyError B9 White A9 White
yyPosition
B4 Yellow OUT4 OFF Adjustment B8 Gray A8 Gray
yyStatus result of B7 Purple A7 Purple
B5 Green OUT5 OFF each tool
B6 Blue A6 Blue
(Tool 1 to 16)
B6 Blue OUT6 OFF B5 Green A5 Green
yyLogical
B7 Purple OUT7 OFF operation result
B4 Yellow A4 Yellow
of each tool
B8 Gray OUT8 OFF (Logic 1 to 4) B3 Orange A3 Orange
yyOFF (not used) B2 Red A2 Red
B9 White Unused Unused
Unused B1 Brown A1 Brown
B10 Black Unused Unused
Cable specification : AWG28
The output assignment, N.O./N.C., and input

line assignment can be changed.

Cables
zz
Pin assignment (I/O cable for IV-G series:
Supplying power to the sensor
connector of the external device) amplifier
2 Pin No. Color The power terminal block is mounted on the bottom
B10 B10 Black of the Main Sensor Amplifier (IV-G10).
yy24 V : Supplies DC24V

B9 White
yy0 V : Wire to 0 V of the power supply.
B8 Gray
yyFG : Ground
B7 Purple
B1
A10
B6 Blue Follow the instructions mentioned below to
B5 Green avoid damage caused by bad connections.
B4 Yellow yyThe nominal cross-sectional area of the
B3 Orange wire for connecting the power should be
A1
0.8 mm2 to 1.3 mm2 (AWG16 to 18).
B2 Red
yyLength of removing insulation from the wire
B1 Brown should be about 9 mm.
A10 Black yyThe stripped part of the wire should not be
A9 White soldered (pre-soldered).
yyInsert the wires to the power terminal block
A8 Gray
all the way.
A7 Purple yyConnect the wires directly to the power
A6 Blue terminal block. Do not use a crimp-type
A5 Green terminal.
A4 Yellow
A3 Orange 1 Insert the wire to B by pushing A in with a
screwdriver.
A2 Red
A1 Brown
2 When the wire is inserted into the end,

remove the screwdriver.
Pull the wire out slightly to confirm that it is
secured.

Cables
Connection diagram
zz
Selecting NPN output
When NPN is selected in the Polarity 2
24 V line of power terminal External device

block (DC24V)
Load
OUT1 to OUT8*
DC24V
IN1 to IN6*
0 V line of power terminal block (NPN)

(0 V)
FG of power terminal block
* For the terminal number and wiring color, refer

to Terminal number and wiring color of
the I/O cable for IV-G series (OP-87906)
(Page 2-19).
zz
Selecting PNP output
When PNP is selected in the Polarity
24 V line of power terminal External device
block (DC24V)
(PNP)
IN1 to IN6*
DC24V
OUT1 to OUT8*
0V line of power terminal block Load

(0 V)
FG of power terminal block
* For the terminal number and wiring color, refer

to Terminal number and wiring color of
the I/O cable for IV-G series (OP-87906)
(Page 2-19).

Cables Cables
Connecting the Vision Sensor 3 Wire each cable according to its intended
(IVseries) purpose.
2 zz
Selecting NPN output
1 Adjust the pins of the connector for the When NPN is selected in the Polarity (Page 3-13)
power I/O cable and pin connection of the External device

cable connector, and connect the cable to Brown (DC24V)
the sensor. Black/White/
Gray/Orange Load
(OUT) IN
Pink/Yellow/
Light Blue/Purple/ DC24V
Green/Red
(IN) OUT
Adjust the pins and the (NPN)

Blue (0V)
pin connection
Drain wire (FG)
yyBlack (OUT1) / White (OUT2) /

Gray (OUT3) / Orange (OUT4)
yyPink (IN1 : External trigger) / Yellow (IN2) /
Light Blue (IN3) / Purple (IN4) /
Green (IN5) / Red (IN6)
2 Tighten the connector by turning the screw- Use it by assigning the optional function
on connector in the clockwise direction. to OUT1 to OUT4 and IN2 to IN6.
Tightening torque of the screws needs to be 1.0 zz
Selecting PNP output
to 1.5 Nm. When PNP is selected in the Polarity (Page 3-13)
External device
Brown (DC24V)
Pink/Yellow/
Light Blue/Purple/ (PNP)
Green/Red
(IN) OUT
Black/White/ DC24V
Gray/Orange
(OUT) IN
Load
Blue (0V)
Drain wire (FG)

When connecting the connector, insert it
without tipping and tighten it well. If the
tightening is weak, vibration can loosen yyBlack (OUT1) / White (OUT2) /
the connector and cause bad connections. Gray (OUT3) / Orange (OUT4)
Also, the enclosure rating may not be yyPink (IN1 : External trigger) / Yellow (IN2) /
maintained with loose connection. Light Blue (IN3) / Purple (IN4) /
* Indication is retighten approximately Green (IN5) / Red (IN6)
90 to 120 with tools such as pliers Use it by assigning the optional function
after tightening with hands. to OUT1 to OUT4 and IN2 to IN6.

Cables
Wiring Assigning
Name Description
color default value
Brown DC24V - + side of power 2
- side of power

Blue 0V -
GND of input-output cable
Output assignable function
Black OUT1 Total Status (N.O.)
yyTotal Status
yyTot. StatusNG
White OUT2 BUSY (N.O.) yyRUN
yyBUSY
yyError
Gray OUT3 Error (N.O.) yyPos. Adj.
yyJudge result of each tool (Tool 1 to Tool 16)
yyLogical operation result of each tool (Tool 1 to Tool 4)
Orange OUT4 OFF
yyOFF (not used)
Set external trigger.
Pink IN1 External trigger
Rising timing () or falling timing () can be set.
Yellow IN2 OFF
Input assignable function
Light Blue IN3 OFF
yyProgram bit0 to bit4
Purple IN4 OFF yyClear Error
Green IN5 OFF yyExt. Master Save
yyOFF (not used)
Red IN6 OFF
Drain FG - Insulated frame
Cable specification yyBrown/Blue/Black/White/Gray/Orange : AWG25
yyPink/Yellow/Light Blue/Purple/Green/Red : AWG28
yyWith braided shield cable (with drain cable)
yyThe output cable assignment can be changed.
4. Output Assignment (Setting Details of Outputting to Output Line) (Page 4-64)
yyN.O./N.C. can be changed.
Output Settings (Page 6-35)
yyThe input cable assignment can be changed.
Input Settings (Page 6-33)
yyIndividually insulate the non-used input-output cables.

yyFor input cables of this sensor, connect with non-contact output (transistor output/SSR output).
For contact output (relay output), incorrect input may be operated due to the contact bouncing.

Cables
Specification of I/O circuit and current of the Output circuit

Ultra Compact Vision Sensor (IV-G series)
2
When the NPN output is selected
When NPN is selected in the Polarity, the circuit
Input circuit becomes open collector NPN output circuit.
yy Maximum rating : 26.4 V, 50 mA

No-voltage input (When the NPN (20 mA when the Expansion
output is selected) (IV-G15) is connected)
yy Remaining voltage : 1.5 V or lower
When NPN is selected in the Polarity, the circuit
becomes no-voltage input circuit. External DC24V
power supply is not necessary. Brown
yyON voltage : 2 V or lower
Load
Overcurrent protection circuit
yyOFF current : 0.1 mA or lower
Main circuit
yyON current : 2 mA (short circuit)
OUT1 - OUT8
DC24V
*
+3.3V
0V
Main circuit
IN1 - IN6
*
* Refer to Terminal number and wiring color
of the I/O cable for IV-G series (OP-87906)
(Page 2-19).
0V Use by assigning the optional functions to OUT1 to
OUT8

When the PNP output is selected
(Page 2-19). When PNP is selected in the Polarity, the circuit
Use by assigning the optional functions to IN2 to 6 becomes open collector PNP output circuit.
yy Maximum rating : 26.4 V, 50 mA

Voltage input (When the PNP output is (20 mA when the Expansion
(IV-G15) is connected)
selected)
yy Remaining voltage : 2 V or lower
When PNP is selected in the Polarity, the circuit DC24V
becomes voltage input circuit.
yyInput maximum rating : 26.4 V
yyON voltage : 18 V or higher
yyON current : 2 mA (for 24 V)

Main circuit
yyOFF current : 0.2 mA or lower OUT1 - OUT8

DC24V
*
Load
0V
Main circuit
IN1 - IN6
*
(Page 2-19).
0V Use by assigning the optional functions to OUT1 to
OUT8

(Page 2-19).
Use by assigning the optional functions to IN2 to 6

Cables
Specification of I/O circuit and current Output circuit

of the Vision Sensor (IV series)

When the NPN output is selected
2
When the NPN is selected in the Polarity (Page
Input circuit

3-13), the circuit becomes open collector NPN output
No-voltage input (When the NPN circuit.

output is selected) yyMaximum rating : 26.4 V, 50 mA
When the NPN is selected in the Polarity (Page yyRemaining voltage : 1.5 V or lower
DC24V
3-13), the circuit becomes no-voltage input circuit.
External power supply is not necessary. Brown
yyON voltage : 2 V or lower
Load
yyOFF current : 0.1 mA or lower
Main circuit
yyON current : 2 mA (short circuit) OUT1 - OUT4
DC24V
*
+3.3V Brown
Main circuit
0V
IN1 - IN6
Blue
*
* Black (OUT1) / White (OUT2) / Gray (OUT3) /
Orange (OUT4)
Use by assigning the optional functions to OUT1
0V to OUT4
Blue
* Pink (IN1 : External trigger) / Yellow (IN2) /
When the PNP output is selected
Light Blue (IN3) / Purple (IN4) / Green (IN5) / Red (IN6)
When the PNP is selected in the Polarity (Page
3-13), the circuit becomes open collector PNP output
circuit.
Voltage input (When the PNP output is

yyMaximum rating : 26.4 V, 50 mA
selected)
yyRemaining voltage : 2 V or lower
When the PNP is selected in the Polarity (Page DC24V
3-13), the circuit becomes voltage input circuit.
Brown
yyInput maximum rating : 26.4 V
yyON voltage : 18 V or higher
yyON current : 2 mA (for 24V)

Main circuit
yyOFF current : 0.2 mA or lower OUT1 - OUT4

DC24V
*
Brown
Load
0V
Main circuit
IN1 - IN6 Blue

* * Black (OUT1) / White (OUT2) / Gray (OUT3) /
Orange (OUT4)
Use by assigning the optional functions to OUT1
0V to OUT4
Blue
* Pink (IN1 : External trigger) / Yellow (IN2) /
Light Blue (IN3) / Purple (IN4) / Green (IN5) / Red (IN6)

Cables
Connecting the power cable of the 3 Wire to the power supply.

monitor
2
1 Align the arrow mark of the power cable
and the direction of the front monitor, and

connect the cable to the monitor.
Brown (DC24V)
DC24V
Blue (0V)
Monitor power cable
(2m/5m/10m)
Cable specification Brown/Blue : AWG24
Arrow mark
2 Turn the screw-on connector in the

clockwise direction to tighten it.

Cables
When connecting with the Ultra When you cannot tighten the screw by hand
any more, use a tool such as pliers for further
Compact Vision Sensor (IV-Gseries) tightening. Tightening torque, retorque degree, and
and the monitor acceptable spaces between connectors are shown 2
below.

Connecting directly (1 unit) yyTightening torque : 0.8 to 1.0 Nm
yyRetightening degree : 5 to 10
Connects the sensor amplifier (IV-G10) and monitor yySpaces between connectors (reference value):
using an Ethernet cable. 2.2mm
If the connector cable tightening is weak,

vibration may loosen the connector
and cause bad connections or cable
disconnections. Also, the enclosure rating
may not be maintained with loose connection.
Properly follow the procedures above and
tighten the connector completely.
Align the pins and the
pin connection
Check the spaces between the Ethernet cable
connector and the cable connector.
Spaces between
connectors
Sensor Head
Ethernet cable
OP-87907 (1 m)
OP-87457 (2 m)
OP-87458 (5 m)
OP-87459 (10 m)

Cables
Connecting via network (Direct Connection (2 units or more)/Network Connection)

The Ultra Compact Vision Sensor (IV-G series) and Vision Sensor (IV series) can be connected together
2 on a network using an Ethernet switch as shown below.
Ethernet switch
LAN cable
OP-87950 (1 m)
OP-87951 (3 m)
OP-87952 (5 m)
OP-87953 (10 m)
Sensor head/amplifier cable Ethernet cable

for IV-Gseries OP-87907 (1 m)
OP-87903 (2 m) OP-87457 (2 m)
OP-87904 (5 m) OP-87458 (5 m)
OP-87905 (10 m) OP-87459 (10 m)
Sensor
IV-500C
IV-500CA
IV-500M
Sensor Head IV-500MA
IV-G500CA IV-150M
IV-G500MA IV-150MA
IV-G150MA IV-2000M
IV-G300CA IV-2000MA
IV-G600MA
*The monitor and Ethernet cable can be connected in the same way as Connecting directly (1 unit)
(Page 2-27).

Cables
Other connections
This section shows connection examples for when the IV-G10 and IV-G15 are to be connected.
yyIV-G10 : Sensor amplifier for IV-G series (Main) 2
yyIV-G15 : Sensor amplifier for IV-G series (Expansion)

yyIV-M30 : Intelligent Monitor
yyIV-150/IV-500/IV-2000 : IV series sensor
Connection examples of the IV series
IV- IV- IV- IV- IV- IV- IV- IV- IV- IV- IV- IV- IV- IV-
G10 G15 G10 G15 G10 G15 G10 G15 G10 G15 G10 G15 G10 G15
Ethernet cable Ethernet cable

LAN cable LAN cable LAN cable
IV-M30 IV-M30
Ethernet
switch
Ethernet cable
IV-M30 IV-M30
Up to 16 sensor amplifiers (IV-G10/

IV-G15) can be connected to a
monitor (IV-M30).
IV- IV- IV- IV- IV- IV- IV- IV- IV- IV- IV- IV- IV- IV- IV- IV-
G10 G15 G10 G15 G10 G15 G10 G15 G10 G15
G10 G10 G15 G10 G15 G10
LAN cable
LAN cable LAN cable LAN cable LAN cable
LAN cable LAN cable LAN cable
Ethernet Ethernet cable

switch
IV-M30
IV-M30
The IV-G10 and IV-G15 functions as an Ethernet switch.

Do not configure a network loop in the network of IV-G10, IV-G15, IV-M30 and Ethernet switch.
If a network loop is configured, there can be no communication with the monitor and IV-G series
sensor. (The STATUS light of the sensor amplifier that cannot be communicated with is ON (red).)
In this case, turn the power OFF, release the loop, and turn the power ON again.

Cables

Connection examples when connecting the IV series and IV-G series sensors
together
2
IV- IV- IV-150
IV- IV-
IV-500
G10 G15 G10 G15 IV-2000
LAN cable Ethernet cable

IV-M30 IV-150 Ethernet

IV-500 switch
IV-2000 Ethernet cable
IV-150 IV-150
IV-500 IV-500
IV-2000 IV-2000
IV-M30
Do not confiugure the network loop shown below.
IV- IV- IV- IV- IV- IV- IV- IV- IV- IV- IV- IV- IV- IV-
G10 G15 G10 G15 G10 G15 G10 G15 G10 G15 G10 G15 G10 G15
LAN cable
LAN LAN cable LAN cable
LAN cable LAN cable LAN cable LAN cable
cable
Ethernet Ethernet LAN cable LAN cable

switch switch Ethernet
LAN cable switch
IV-M30 IV-M30 IV-M30

Cables
When connecting the Vision Sensor Connecting via network (Direct

(IV series) and the monitor connection (2 units or more)/Network
connection) 2
Connecting directly (1 unit) Connect each Ethernet cable to the monitor and

Connect the sensor and monitor using the monitor sensor.
cable. Connect the other side of the Ethernet cable to the
Ethernet switch.
Ethernet switch
Monitor cable for a sensor

with a built-in amplifier
(2 m/5 m/10 m/20 m)
Ethernet cable
(2m/5m/10m)
For details on connecting the monitor cable, refer to

Connecting the monitor cable/Ethernet cable
(Page 2-32).
For details on connecting the Ethernet cable, refer

to Connecting the monitor cable/Ethernet cable
(Page 2-32).
The sensor and monitor do not support PoE

(Power over Ethernet). Supply power using
the power cable.

Cables
Repeat the steps (1) and (2) and when you cannot
Connecting the monitor cable/
tighten the screw by hand any more, use a tool
Ethernet cable
2 This section describes the details on connecting the
such as pliers for further tightening. Tightening
torque, retorque degree, and acceptable spaces
monitor cable/Ethernet cable using the example of between connectors are shown below.
connecting the monitor cable to the sensor. yyMonitor cable for a sensor with a built-in
amplifier/Ethernet cable
1 Align the pin connection parts of the (OP-87450/OP-87451/OP-87452/OP-87453/
monitor cable/Ethernet cable connector
OP-87457/OP-87458/OP-87459)
with three pins of the cable connector,
Tightening torque : 0.8 to 1.0 Nm
and connect the cable to the sensor.
Retightening degree : 5 to 10
Spaces between connectors (reference value)
For sensors : 0 mm
For monitors : 2.2 mm
If the connector cable tightening is weak,

vibration may loosen the connector and cause
Align the pins and bad connections or cable disconnections.
the pin connection Also, the enclosure rating may not be
maintained with loose connection.
Properly follow the procedures above and
tighten the connector completely.
Check the spaces between the monitor cable/

Ethernet cable and the cable connector.
* Same procedures for monitors. zz

For sensors
2 Tighten the connector by turning the Spaces between

screw-on connector in the clockwise connectors
direction. When connecting the connector,
insert it without inclination while pushing
zz
For monitors
in and tighten it well.

(2)
When the screw stops rotating by the
locking mechanism, further tighten it
while pushing.
(1)
Tighten the screw-on connector
Spaces between
connectors
* Same procedures for monitors.

3
This chapter explains the contents of the monitor
display and operation of the IV/IV-G Series, basic
Basic Operation operation flow, and operation when turning on the
power for the first time.
It also explains procedures to restore the sensor
and monitor to the default factory settings and basic 3
operation of monitor.
Basic Operation
Overview of Screen and Operation...................3-2
Basic Operation Flow.........................................3-4
Operation when the Power is Turned on..........3-5
Setting to the Factory Default.........................3-15
Basic Operation for the Monitor......................3-17

Overview of Screen and Operation
This section explains monitor displays and operation.

For details of what can be set on each screen and its operation, see to the applicable references.
Run screen
Images and judges based on
3 the judgment condition.
Starting an Operation
(Page 5-2)
Basic Operation
Full-screen display/Zooming
Use the [Zoom] button to
enlarge the view of the monitor
Switching the display
Switching ON/OFF of to the full-screen mode
the menu display (Page 5-6)
Enlarging the image
display (Page 5-6)
Tool display
Select the display patterns
of tools from OFF / Window /
Process 1 / Process 2
Selecting a display method
for tools (Page 5-7)
A B
Statistics display
Displays statistical information
of status on the monitor.
Displaying the statistical
Monitor Settings
information (Page 5-10)
Sets each function of the monitor.
Setting the Advanced Monitor Information
(Page 6-54)
Histogram display
Displays histogram of status
on the monitor.
Displaying the
histogram (Page 5-12)

Program list
Checks or initializes
Sensor Setup Menu the program.
3
Sets condition to judge a target. Things can be performed
Displaying the Sensor Setup with the program functions
Menu Screen (Page 6-7) (Page 6-15)
Basic Operation
Settings Navigator
Sets the program to be used
for judgment.
Chapter 4 Settings Navigator
(Page 4-1)
A B
Limit Adjustment
Adjusts the judgment threshold.
Adjusting Thresholds for
Judgment (Page 5-15)
Sensor Advanced
Performs the sensor advanced settings.
Setting the Extended Functions of
the Sensor (Page 6-32)
Tool Auto Tuning
Automatically adjusts threshold of
tool and extraction conditions of
Color Area/Area tool in accordance
with OK/NG image.
Tool Auto Tuning (Automatically
Adjusting the Judgment
Condition) (Page 5-16)
Sensor Image History

Operates the sensor image history.
Sensor Image History (Confirming the
Images whose Status Result is NG)
A
(Page 6-21)
USB Memory
Sets the operation when using USB memory.
Saving the Sensor Settings and Images
to a USB Memory (Page 6-25)
B

Basic Operation Flow
Basic Operation Flow
Mounting, connecting, and wiring the sensor and monitor

Mount the sensor and monitor, and then connect and wire the cable.
Chapter 2 Installation and Connection (Page 2-1)
3
Turning on the power
Basic Operation
Turn on the power of the sensor and monitor, and then perform the initial startup setting.
Operation when the Power is Turned on (Page 3-5)
Settings Navigator
Create the program to be used for operation in [Settings Navigator] (Sensor Setup).
STEP 1: Setting of image optimization

Set the image optimization for clearly imaging a target. Adjust the image for
defining the differences in the high and low-quality-target.
Set the trigger option, and adjust the brightness and imaging focus.
1. Image Optimization(Clearly Image a Target) (Page 4-6)
STEP 2: Registration of a master image

Image the high-quality-target and register the master image to serve as the
reference of judgment.
2. Master Registration (Registering an Image as a Reference for Judgment)
(Page 4-24)
STEP 3: Tool setting

Set the tool to judge a target.
Set the tool onto the master image and set the threshold for judgment. Up to 16
detection tools and 1 position adjustment tool in one program can be set.
3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method for Targets) (Page 4-32)
STEP 4: Output assignment

Assign the function to output to each output line.
Starting the operation/adjustment

Switch the settings screen to the run screen, and start the operation. If the setting is
inappropriate, adjust the thresholds and tool settings (Tool Auto Tuning).
Chapter 5 Operating/Adjusting (Page 5-1)

Operation when the Power is Turned on
Operation flow when the power is

turned on
(1) When the power of the monitor is turned on for
the first time, set the display language, date
Turn on the power and time, and the connection method with the
sensor. 3
(1) For the connection method with the sensor,
Basic Operation
there are Direct Connection (1 unit or 2 units
Initial start-up of the or more) and Network Connection.
monitor
yyDirect Connection
(1 unit) (Direct Connection (1 unit)) (Page 3-6)
yyDirect Connection Operation for initial startup of the monitor
(2 units or more) (Direct Connection (2 units or more))
yyNetwork Connection (Page 3-7)
(4) (5)
(2) (Network Connection) (Page 3-9)
(2) When the sensor is turned on for the first time,
Initial start-up of
perform the Initial Sensor Setup (IV-G series only)
the sensor
and set the polarity of the sensor.
(3) Operation for initial startup of the monitor
(Direct Connection (1 unit)) (Page 3-6)
(3)
The Sensor Setup Menu screen opens. Set the
Sensor settings menu Run Connecting... activation condition in Settings Navigator. After the
setting is completed, operation begins.
Chapter 4 Settings Navigator (Setting the
Judgment Condition) (Page 4-1)
(4) After the second time of starting the monitor
and sensor, the operation begins when the
power is turned on.
(5) When the connection is failed, the process
remains in the connecting screen.
Connected with the Sensor (Page A-29)
The sensor can be independently operated.

Operation for initial startup of the 5 Turn on the power of the sensor.
monitor (Direct Connection (1 unit))
Turn on the power of the sensor before the monitor
1 Turn on the power of the monitor. is restarted by tapping the [OK] button in step 6.
The screen to select the language opens.
3 6 Tap the [OK] button.
2 Select the language to be displayed on
Basic Operation
the monitor and tap the [OK] button.
The monitor restarts and connects to the

sensor.
[English] is selected as the default setting.
If a language other than [English] is selected,
yyWhen the monitor is connected with the sensor
the Information screen opens. Tap the [OK]
button. The monitor will restart automatically. for the first time, perform the Initial Sensor Setup
and set the polarity of the sensor. For details,
3 Set the current date and time, and tap the refer to Operation for initial startup of the
[OK] button. sensor (Page 3-13).
yyAfter the second time connecting with the sensor,
the run screen opens.
yyWhen the connection is unavailable with the

frozen connection screen, refer to Remedy
when direct connection (1unit) is unavailable
(Page A-29).
yyFor the direct connection (1 unit), the IP address
yyMove to the item to be set by the [] or [] is automatically set.
button and enter the numbers. yyIf the monitor is directly connected (1 unit) with
yyTap the [Delete] button to reset the display of the sensor when the PROFINET function is
the selected item. being used, the PROFINET function will stop. To
4 Tap the [1 unit] button and tap the [OK] use the PROFINET function again, restart the
sensor.
button.
The Complete Configuration screen opens.

Operation for initial startup of the monitor 5 Turn on the power of the sensor.
(Direct Connection (2 units or more))
Turn on the power of the sensor before the
1 Turn on the power of the monitor. monitor is restarted by tapping the [OK] button
in step 6.
3
2 Select the language to be displayed on 6 Tap the [OK] button.
Basic Operation
Network setting screen opens.

[English] is selected as the default setting.
If a language other than [English] is selected, 7 Tap the [OK] button.
button. The monitor will restart automatically.
3 Set the current date and time, and tap the

[OK] button.
The monitor restarts.

After the restart, the sensor connection setup
screen opens.
yyMove the input cursor to the item to set by the Do not connect a device other than IV/
[] or [] button and enter the numbers. IV-G series sensors, IV-M30, and a PC on a
yyTap the [Delete] button to reset the display of
network.
the selected item.
4 Tap the [2 units or more] button and tap 8 Tap the [Search Sensor] button.
the [OK] button.
Searching the sensor begins.



for the first time, perform the Initial Sensor Setup
refer to Operation for initial startup of the
sensor (Page 3-13).
3 yyAfter the second time connecting with the sensor,
the Run screen or the Sensor Setup Menu screen
Basic Operation
opens.
When the searching is finished, the searched
result will be displayed.
yyIf the IP address of the sensor has not been set,
it is automatically assigned.
yyUp to 16 sensors can be searched for. yyWhen the connection is unavailable with a
yyAny device whose version is older than frozen connection screen, refer to Remedy
R3.00.00 cannot be connected. when direct connection (2 units or more) is
unavailable (Page A-30).
9 Select a sensor to be connected and tap yyFor direct connection (2 units or more), the IP
the [Connect] button. address is automatically set.
yyFor direct connection (2 units or more), the
sensor on which PROFINET has been set will
not be detected.
yyBy tapping the [LED Blinking] button, the

indicator light of the selected device operates
as described below. Use this function for
checking the sensor.
For the IV-G series
yyThe indicator light on the sensor head
blinks alternately (green and red).
yyThe indicator light on the sensor amplifier
blinks (orange).
For the IV series
yyThe light on the sensor blinks (orange).
yyBy tapping the [Device Name Setting] button,
the screen for entering the device name will
open. For details, refer to Device Name
(Page 6-37).
yyBy tapping the [Search Again] button, the
search for a sensor will restart.

Operation for initial startup of 4 Select the [Network Connection] button

the monitor (Network Connection) and tap the [OK] button.
When connecting to a network, let engineers who

are knowledgeable about networks handle it. 3
Basic Operation
Setting the network address of the
monitor
1 Turn on the power of the monitor.
5 Tap the [OK] button.
2 Select the language to be displayed on
The Network Settings screen opens.
[English] is selected in the default setting. 6 Tap each [Edit] button of the IP address,
subnet mask, and default gateway.
If a language other than [English] is selected,
button. The monitor will restart automatically.
3 Set the current date and time, and tap the

[OK] button.
The screen to set each item opens.
At the initial startup or initialization of

the monitor, the monitor starts up with
192.168.10.1 as the IP address.
yyMove to the item to be set by the [] or [] If there is a device with the same IP address
on the network, change the IP address before
button and enter the numbers.
connecting the monitor to the network.
yyTap the [Delete] button to reset the display of
the selected item.

7 Set the IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Searching for a sensor to be connected
Default Gateway individually, and then tap
the [OK] button. Automatically searches for a sensor on the network
and connects with it.
IP address
3 yyThe search time is about 10 seconds.
yySearching range and retrievable number of units
are as follows.
Basic Operation
yySensor with no IP address (default) :

A maximum of 8 units can be retrieved within a
range that the BOOTP packet from the sensor
reaches (Page A-43).
The system returns to the network setup screen. yySensor with IP address :
A maximum of 16 units can be retrieved on
8 Tap the [OK] button. the local network to which the monitor is
connected.
1 Turn on the power of the sensor.

2 Tap the [Search Sensor] button.

After restarted, the Sensor Connect screen
opens.
Searching for sensor begins.
There are two ways to set the sensor to be

connected. For details of procedures, refer to
each reference.
zz
When the sensor on the network is
searched result will be displayed.
Searching for a sensor to be connected
(Page 3-10) If no sensor is found, refer to When the
connection cannot be established by searching
zz
When the sensor is specified by the IP
for the sensor (Page A-32).
address
Specifying sensor to be connected by IP
address (Page 3-12)

zz
When a sensor with no IP address is found The confirmation dialog appears.
3
Empty
Basic Operation
Tap the [Yes] button to copy the network
zz
When a sensor with an IP address is found
settings of the monitor.
When copying is completed, the information
screen opens.
IP address
3 When multiple sensors are found, select

the sensor to be connected with the [<] or
[>] button. Tap the [OK] button.
The sensor network setup screen opens.
4 Connect to the sensor.
zz
When connecting to the sensor with no IP
address
Tap the [Connect] button.
Tap each [Edit] button of the IP address, subnet

mask, and default gateway, and set these items
individually.
The confirmation dialog appears. When the monitor's IP address is copied,

the sensor's and monitor's IP address will be
duplicated. Make sure to change the IP address.
IP address
Tap the [OK] button.

The system returns to the network setup screen

Specifying sensor to be connected by
for the sensor to be connected.
IP address
Used when the IP address of the sensor to be
connected is defined beforehand.
3 1 Turn on the power of the sensor.
Basic Operation
2 Tap the [Specify Sensor] button.


for the first time, perform the Initial Sensor Setup
refer to Operation for initial startup of the
sensor (Page 3-13).
yyAfter the second time connecting with the sensor, 3 Enter the IP address of the sensor to be
the run screen or the Sensor Setup Menu screen connected and tap the [Connect] button.
opens.
zz
When connecting to the sensor with set IP
address
The run screen or the Sensor Setup Menu

screen opens.
If the monitor cannot connect with the sensor, refer

to When the connection cannot be established
by specifying the sensor (Page A-33).
The monitor connects to the selected sensor
and the run screen or the Sensor Setup Menu
screen opens.

Operation for initial startup of 3 Select the Polarity of the sensor and tap
the sensor the [OK] button.
When the sensor in the default setting is to be

connected, perform the Initial Sensor Setup
(IV-G series only) and select the polarity of the
sensor (NPN or PNP).
3
Basic Operation
After the polarity is selected, set up the sensor in
Settings Navigator.
For details on polarity, refer to Specification
of I/O circuit and current of the Ultra Compact The Sensor Setup Menu screen opens.
Vision Sensor (IV-G series) (Page 2-24) or
Specification of I/O circuit and current of the 4 Tap the [Sensor Setup] button and set up
Vision Sensor (IV series) (Page 2-25). the program.
1 Tap the [Go] button.
For details of the Settings Navigator, refer to

The Initial Sensor Setup begins. After Judgment Condition) (Page 4-1).
initialization is completed, the initialization
completion screen opens.
The Polarity screen opens.

Operation for changing the sensor 3 Tap the [Sensor Setup] button.
head (IV-G series only)
If a sensor head connected to a sensor amplifier
is changed, initialization of the sensor head is
3 required.
Turn on the monitor and initialize the sensor
Basic Operation
amplifier following the instructions on the displayed

screen.
For details, refer to Chapter 4 Settings
The information of the sensor head saved Navigator (Setting the Judgment Condition)
in the sensor amplifier. Before initializing the (Page 4-1).
sensor amplifier, it is recommended to perform
[BatchBackup].
For details, refer to Backing up in a batch
(Page 6-26).
1 Tap the [Initialize Sensor] button.
Initializing the sensor begins. After initialization

is completed, the initialization completion screen
opens.
The Sensor Setup Menu screen opens.

Setting to the Factory Default
Initializing the sensor 3 Tap the [System] button and then the
[Initialize Sensor] button.
Initializes information set in the sensor and uses
factory default setting.
yyThe following settings will not be initialized. 3

yyPolarity (Switching NPN/PNP)
Basic Operation
(Page 6-36)
yyNetwork Settings (IP Address / Subnet Mask /
Default Gateway / Port number (TCP))
(Page 6-39)
yyTo initialize the registered programs individually, 4 Tap the [Go] button.
refer to Initializing a program (Page 6-20).
1 Set the menu display of the monitor to ON

and tap the [Sensor Setup] button.
The confirmation dialog appears.

Initialization begins. After initialization is completed,
the initialization completion screen opens.
2 Tap the [Sensor Advanced] button.
The system returns to the Sensor Advanced

The Sensor Advanced screen opens. screen.

Initializing the monitor 4 Tap the [OK] button.

Initializes information set in the monitor and uses
factory default setting.
3 The following settings will not be initialized.

yyLanguage (Page 6-61)
Basic Operation
yyTime (Page 6-62)
1 Set the menu display of the monitor to ON Initialization begins. After initialization is completed,
and tap the [Monitor Settings] button. the initialization completion screen opens.
The Monitor Settings screen opens.
2 Tap the [System] button and then the The monitor restarts.
[Initialize Monitor] button. After restarting, set the display language, date
and time, and the connection method with the
sensor.
For the connection method with the sensor,
there are Direct Connection (1 unit or 2 units
or more) and Network Connection.
(Direct Connection (1 unit)) (Page 3-6)
3 Tap the [Go] button. (Direct Connection (2 units or more))
(Page 3-7)
(Network Connection) (Page 3-9)

Basic Operation for the Monitor
Editing the value with the slider zz

Setting by the [+] / [-] button
By tapping the [+] / [-] button, the value of a
The value of a trigger interval and the threshold of
trigger interval increases or decreases (slider
each tool can be edited.
slides in accordance with the value changed).
This section explains how to edit the value with
the slider using an example of a trigger interval in
[Internal].
3
Basic Operation
1 In the Image Optimization settings of The value
the Settings Navigator, tap the [Internal] is updated
button in [Trigger Options]. according to the
The slider appears on the monitor. slider position
Tap the [+] / [-] button to slide the

slider
For the slider which sets both upper and lower

limit, select the slider to be set and tap the [+] /
[-] button to set it.
zz
Setting by inputting a value
2 Set the trigger interval. By tapping the button of the trigger interval,
the screen to input a value opens.
zz
Setting by the slider
Input the value of a trigger interval and tap the
Touch the slider, and then slide it to the right or
[OK] button.
left to set the trigger interval. According to the
slider position, the value of a trigger interval is
updated.
Tap the button
The value
is updated
according to the
slider position
Slide the slider to the right or left
Input the value

of a trigger
interval
yyBy tapping the button, the value can be

reset to 0.
yyBy tapping the button, the last number
can be deleted.

Editing the tool window zz

Changing the size of the tool window
By touching either side of the tool window,
The tool window displayed when the tool is set in
or will be displayed. The height or width of
the Settings Navigator can be edited to any size or
the tool window can be changed by touching
direction. and dragging it.
3 This section explains how to edit the tool window
using an example of [Outline] tool.
Basic Operation
1 In the tool setting of the Settings

Navigator, tap the [Add Tool] button and
tap the [Outline] button.
The tool window of the Outline tool will be By touching one of the corners of the tool
displayed at the center of the monitor. window, will be displayed. The size of the
tool window can be changed by touching and
dragging it.
Tool window
When the [ Circle] is selected in the Window

2 Set the tool window of the Outline tool. shape settings, the size of the circle can be
changed by touching and dragging the outline
zz
Selecting the shape of the tool window
of the circle.
On the screen to set the detection tool, the
screen to select the shape of the tool window
opens by tapping the [Window Shape ] button.
[ Rect] or [ Circle] can be selected.
Rect Circle
zz
Changing the direction of the tool window
By touching and dragging the arrow mark on
the upper right of the tool window, the direction
of the tool window can be changed.
zz
Moving the tool window
By tapping inside the tool window, will be
displayed. Move the tool window by touching
and dragging it.
The operations when an image is enlarged by

the [Zoom] button are as follow.
yySlide the slider while tapping inside the tool
window to move the tool window.
yySlide the slider while tapping outside the tool
window to change the image display position.

Inputting characters 3 Edit the program name.

(1) (2) (3) (4)
The programs or tools to be displayed on the
monitor can be named arbitrary.
This section explains how to input characters using (5)
an example of [Program Name].
3
(6)
Basic Operation
According to the items to be set, the number of
characters, character types, and characters which
can be input are different.
(7) (8) (9)
1 On the Sensor Setup Menu screen, tap the (1) Program name
[Detail] button. Displays a program name being editing.
(2) [] button
Moves a cursor position to the left.
(3) [] button
Moves a cursor position to the right.
(4) [Delete] button
Deletes one character to the left of the cursor.
(5) Number of characters which can be input
2 Select the program to change the name Displays a number of characters that can be
and tap the [Edit] button.
input as a program name.
Select the
program
(6) Character button
Inputs an arbitrary character.
According to selection of the [Upper/Lower]
button, characters that can be input are different.
(7) [Upper/Lower] button
Switches a character to be input to uppercase /
lowercase.
(8) [Cancel] button
Cancels a character input setting and returns to
the Program details screen.
(9) [OK] button
Saves a character input setting and returns to
the Program details screen.
4 After the characters are entered, tap the

[OK] button.

Selecting the file in the USB memory 5 Select the file to be sent.
(1)
This section explains how to select the file in the USB
memory connected to the monitor using an example
of [Transfer Program Settings]. (2)
3 1 On the Sensor Setup Menu screen, tap the (3)

[USB Memory] button.
Basic Operation
(4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9)
(1) Folder display

Displays a tree of currently displayed folder.
(2) [Up One Folder]
By selecting the [Up One Folder] and tapping
2 Tap the [Transfer Program Settings] button. the [OK] button, you can go to the upper
hierarchy of currently displayed folder.
(3) File / Folder display
Displays a file and folder stored in the currently
displayed folder.
By selecting the folder and tapping the [OK]
button, you can go into the selected folder.
(4) [First] button
Moves to top page in the folder.
(5) [<<] button
3 Tap the [OK] button. Moves to previous page in the folder.
The folder and file in the USB memory are displayed.
(6) [>>] button
4 Select the folder that stores the data and Moves to next page in the folder.
tap the [OK] button. (7) [Last] button
Moves to last page in the folder.
Select (8) [Cancel] button

Cancels a setting and returns to the Sensor
Setup Menu screen.
(9) [OK] button
When the folder is selected, you can go into the
selected folder. When the file is selected, the
The folder and file stored in the selected folder selection of a file will be determined.
will be displayed.
6 After selecting a file, tap the [OK] button
and proceed to the next setting.

4
This chapter explains the functions and operations
of the [Settings Navigator].
Settings Navigator
Settings Navigator..............................................4-2
4
Settings Navigator (Setting the Judgment Condition)

Basic Operation of the Settings Navigator......4-3
1. Image Optimization
(Clearly Image a Target).....................................4-6
2. Master Registration
(Registering an Image as a Reference for
Judgment).........................................................4-24
3. Tool Settings ( Setting the
Judgment Method for Targets)........................4-32
4. Output Assignment (Setting Details of
Outputting to Output Line)..............................4-64
Display Method of Extended Functions
Menus................................................................4-70

Settings Navigator
Settings Navigator
In the Settings Navigator, the setting items of the program required for judging the target with the sensor
are set in each step. While sequentially following the steps with navigation buttons, perform the setting
using the menu buttons in accordance with the Settings Navigator guide.
Navigation
button
4 Settings
Navigator guide
Menu button
Flow in the Settings Navigator
STEP 1. Image Optimization settings

Set the image optimization for clearly imaging a target. Adjust the image for
defining the differences in the high and low-quality-target. Set the trigger
option, adjust the brightness and imaging focus.
1. Image Optimization(Clearly Image a Target) (Page 4-6)
STEP 2. Registration of a master image

Image the high-quality-target and register the master image to serve as the
reference of judgment.
2. Master Registration (Registering an Image as a Reference for Judgment)
(Page 4-24)
STEP 3. Tool settings

Set the tool to judge a target. Set the tool onto the master image and set the
threshold for judgment. Up to 16 detection tools and 1 position adjustment
tool in one program can be set.
3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method for Targets) (Page 4-32)
STEP 4. Output assignment

Assign the function to output to each output line.
4. Output Assignment (Setting Details of Outputting to Output Line)
(Page 4-64)

Basic Operation of the Settings Navigator
Starting the Settings Navigator 6 Perform the following operation.

zz
When the program which has not been set
1 Turn on the power of the sensor and in step 5 is selected
monitor. Tap the [Start] button.
When the sensor is in the following condition,

the Sensor Setup Menu will be displayed.
Proceed to step 5.
yyWhen the power is turned on for the first time
4
yyIf all programs are not being set

yyIf the sensor is being setting up
yyChanging the sensor head (IV-G series only)
The Settings Navigator guide screen opens.
2 Tap the [Menu] button. Tap the [OK] button and start setting [1. Image
Optimization].
1. Image Optimization(Clearly Image a
Target) (Page 4-6)
zz
When the program which has been set in
step 5 is selected
Tap the [Start] button. Or tap the shortcut button
for each step.
The menu bar appears.
3 Tap the [Sensor Setup] button.

Shortcut button
The Settings Navigator guide screen of the

selected step opens.
The confirmation dialog appears. Tap the [OK] button and start the setting.
1. Image Optimization(Clearly Image a
4 Tap the [OK] button. Target) (Page 4-6)
5 Tap the [Sensor Setup] button. as a Reference for Judgment) (Page 4-24)
3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method for
Targets) (Page 4-32)
Outputting to Output Line) (Page 4-64)
For details of the Navi Guide, refer to

Displaying the Settings Navigator guide
(Page 4-5).
The startup screen of the Settings Navigator opens.

Settings Navigator screen and operation flow

This section explains each setting screen to be displayed in the Settings Navigator and the operation flow.
For details of the contents that can set on each setting screen and its operation, refer to the applicable
references.
4 1. Image Optimization
A
(Clearly Image a Target)
(Page 4-6)
(Registering an Image as a
Reference for Judgment)
(Page 4-24)
3. Tool Settings
3. Tool Settings (Setting the
Judgment Method for Targets)
(Page 4-32)
4. Output Assignment
(Setting Details of Outputting
to Output Line) (Page 4-64)
* If the IV series is used, up to 4
outputs are available.

Displaying the Settings Navigator guide 3 Tap the [Yes] button.

The settings in the Settings Navigator will be
zz
When the Navi Guide is ON saved and the system returns to the Sensor
Setup Menu screen.
yyThe step guide appears only the first time
when moving to each step.
yyThe extended functions guide appears only yyBy tapping the [No] button, the confirmation
dialog to cancel the settings appears. By
the first time when displaying the Extended tapping the [Yes] button, the screen closes
Functions menu.
yyTo display the step guide and extended
without saving the settings.
yyBy tapping the [Cancel] button, the system 4
functions guide again, finish and then start the returns to the Settings Navigator screen.

Settings Navigator again.
yyThe function guide always appears when Finishing without completing the step
touching the following function buttons.
Focus Adjustment / Fine Tune Outline / Margin / 1 Tap the [Save] button at the upper right of
the screen.
Color Extraction / Brightness Extraction /
Fixed Reference Area
You can display the function guide by tapping

the button on the upper right of the screen
when operating the corresponding functions.
zz
When the Navi Guide is OFF
The step guide / extended functions guide /
function guide are not displayed zz
When the required settings are completed
The confirmation dialog to save appears.
Finishing the Settings Navigator zz

When the required settings are not
completed
This section explains the procedure for finishing the The confirmation dialog to finish appears.
Settings Navigator. yyBy tapping the [Yes] button, the confirmation
dialog to save appears.
Finishing by completing all steps yyBy tapping the [No] button, the system returns
to the Settings Navigator screen.
1 Set all steps in the Settings Navigator.
2 Tap the [Complete] button at the lower The required settings have not been completed
yet. Even if the [OK] button is tapped, the
right of the [Output Assignment] screen. proper operation cannot be performed.
2 Tap the [Yes] button.

The settings in the Settings Navigator will be
saved and the system returns to the Sensor
Setup Menu screen.
yyBy tapping the [No] button, the confirmation

dialog to cancel the settings appears. By
When the program setting is changed, tapping the [Yes] button, the screen closes
the confirmation dialog to save appears. without saving the settings.
* If the IV series is used, up to 4 outputs are yyBy tapping the [Cancel] button, the system
returns to the Settings Navigator screen.
available.
1. Image Optimization 2. Master Registration 3. Tool Settings 4. Output Assignment
1. Image Optimization(Clearly Image a Target)
Setting the Image Optimization

In this section, set the Image Optimization for taking an image of a target. Adjust the image for defining
differences in high and low-quality-targets.
zz
Trigger Options
A trigger in this manual indicates the timing to start imaging with the built-in camera of the sensor. In the
Trigger Options, set the timing to image a target within the field of view of this device. This device can
4 image a target at any timing and can image continuously.

Setting the Trigger Options (Page 4-8)
Checking the view and installed distance (IV-G series) (Page 2-2)
Checking the view and installed distance (IV series) (Page 2-3)
zz
Auto Brightness Adjustment
The sensor images a target by receiving the reflected light of the built-in light exposed to a target using
the CMOS image sensor.
In the Auto Brightness Adjustment, a target can be imaged with an appropriate brightness by
automatically adjusting the light intensity and shutter speed according to the shape and surface
condition (color, shininess, material).
zz
Focus Adjustment
Adjusts the focus of lens. Adjusts for clearly imaging the shape of a target. Auto focus can adjust the
focusing position automatically.

Trigger Options Auto Brightness Adjustment Focus Adjustment Extended functions
Main screen for the Image Optimization

This section explains the main screen for the Image Optimization.
(1) (3)
(4)
(5)
(2) (6)

(7) (8) (9) (10) (11)
(1) [Back] button (7) Extended functions display button

The system returns to the Sensor Setup Menu Displays the extended functions menu for the
screen. Image Optimization.
(2) Image taken by the sensor Extended functions for the Image Optimization
Displays an image taken by the sensor. (Page 4-18)
The image type to be displayed differs depending (8) [Trigger Options] button
on the settings screen. Performs the settings for the Trigger Options.
(3) [Save] button Setting the Trigger Options (Page 4-8)
Saves the settings and returns to the Sensor
(9) [Auto Brightness Adjustment] button
Setup Menu screen.
Automatically adjusts brightness.
(4) [Image Type] display Auto Brightness Adjustment (Page 4-12)
Displays the image type.
(10) [Focus Adjustment] button
yy .................Displays an image taken by
Automatically adjusts focus.
the currently imaging sensor. Focus Adjustment (Page 4-13)
(5) [Trig] button
(11) [Next] button
If [External] is selected for [Trigger Options] or
Proceeds to "2. Master Registration".
[Internal Trigger Control with IN1 Input] is set to
2. Master Registration (Registering an Image as
[Yes], the [Trig] button will be displayed.
a Reference for Judgment) (Page 4-24)
The [Trig] and [Pause] button switches by each
time the button is tapped.
yy[Trig]..................Images by temporarily inputting
the internal trigger. Tap this
button when the position is to be
defined while a target is being
imaged in a state where the
external trigger cannot be input.
yy[Pause]..............Finishes the imaging with
internal trigger.
(6) [Zoom] button
Switches to full-screen display and the image of
the sensor can be zoomed.
Switching the display to the full-screen mode
(Page 5-6)
Setting the Trigger Options

A trigger in this manual indicates the timing to start imaging with the built-in camera of the sensor. In the
Trigger Options, set the timing to image a target within the field of view of this device. This device can
image a target at any timing, and can image continuously.
Settings for the Trigger Options
4 Items Description Setting range

Default
value
yyInternal
Starts imaging continuously within
the time interval specified in the
trigger interval setting.
If [Internal Trigger Control with IN1
Input] is set to [Yes], the external
input can control the internal trigger.
Trigger Select the type of the timing to
yyExternal Internal
(Trigger type) start imaging.
Starts imaging with the external
trigger synchronized with the
target's motion from a photoelectric
sensor or PLC installed outside.
The time (trigger delay) between
inputting the trigger until imaging
starts can be set.
Set when the [Internal] is
selected in the trigger type
Trigger interval setting. 1 to 10000 ms 50 ms
Set an interval (cycle) to
automatically start imaging.
Set when the [External] is
selected in the trigger type
setting.
Used when the output timing
of the sensor for the trigger
Trigger Delay occurrence and the imaging 0 to 1000 ms 0 ms
timing of this device cannot be
synchronized.
This device starts imaging after
the time set in the trigger delay
of the trigger input passes.

zz
Internal trigger
Trigger interval Trigger interval

(1)
Internal trigger
(2)
Imaging/
internal processing 4
(3)

Status output
(1) The trigger will be input automatically according to the trigger interval settings.
(2) Performs the internal processing after the imaging.
(3) Outputs the status result.
zz
If [Internal Trigger Control with IN1 Input] is set to [Yes]
IN1 (1) Trigger interval Trigger interval
Internal Trigger
(2)
Imaging/
internal processing
(3)
Status output
(1) The trigger will be input within the period of Internal trigger interval + 1ms after IN1 is input (the
trigger is input while IN1 is input). Thereafter the trigger will be input according to the trigger interval
settings.
(2) Performs the internal processing after imaging.

zz
External trigger
Trigger delay
(1)
External trigger
(2)
4 Imaging/
internal processing
(3)
Status output
(1) Start imaging by inputting the trigger at an arbitrary timing.

When the trigger delay interval is set, the imaging start time will be delayed in the specified period.
(2) Performs the internal processing after imaging.

Setting the Trigger Options 5 Set the trigger interval or trigger delay.
zz
When the [Internal] is selected in step 4
1 Start the Settings Navigator. Set the trigger interval within the range of 1 to
Starting the Settings Navigator (Page 4-3) 10000 ms.
2 Display the main screen for the Image If the internal trigger time is shorter than the
Optimization. processing time (Page 5-40), a trigger error
(Page 4-4)
occurs.
Internal trigger (Page 7-3)
4
Error Messages (Page A-23)

3 Tap the [Trigger Options] button.
The screen to set the Trigger Options opens. zz

When the [External] is selected in step 4
Set the trigger delay within the range of 1 to
4 Select the trigger type. 1000 ms.
Select the [Internal] or [External] button.
The setting of the trigger interval and trigger

delay can be changed by using the slider or
inputting the value.
Editing the value with the slider (Page 3-17)
6 After the setting is completed, tap the [OK]

button.
The system returns to the main screen for the
Image Optimization.

Auto Brightness Adjustment 4 Tap the [OK] button.

In the Auto Brightness Adjustment, the target
Image Optimization.
can be imaged with an appropriate brightness by
automatically adjusting a light intensity, an exposure
time and an imaging mode according to the shape yyThe brightness of an image can be adjusted
and surface condition (color, shininess, material). manually.
Advanced Brightness Adjustment (Page 4-21)
4 1 Start the Settings Navigator. yyDuring the auto brightness adjustment, the
Starting the Settings Navigator (Page 4-3) sensor automatically images a target by
inputting the internal trigger regardless of the

2 Display the main screen for the Image Trigger Options settings.
Optimization. yyDo not move a target during the auto brightness
Settings Navigator screen and operation flow adjustment. The focus may not be adjusted
(Page 4-4) correctly.
3 Tap the [Auto Brightness Adjustment]

button.
After the adjustment is completed, the

Brightness adjustment completed. message
appears.

Focus Adjustment Focus adjustment for the auto focusing

Adjusts the focusing position for clearly imaging the type
shape of a target.
Adjusting the methods differ depending on the type 1 Start the Settings Navigator.
of the sensor connected (manual focusing type/ Starting the Settings Navigator (Page 4-3)
auto focusing type).
2 Display the main screen for the Image
zz
Auto focusing type
The focus position is adjusted automatically.
Optimization.
4
When the [Auto] button is tapped, the focusing (Page 4-4)

position is adjusted automatically again.
The focus can be adjusted manually with the 3 Tap the [Focus Adjustment] button.
slider displayed on the monitor.
When the sensor detects multiple matching
positions for the focusing position, the optional
positions are marked on the slider. Select
the focus position from the detected optional
positions.
zz
Manual focusing type
Turn the focus adjustment screw using the
attached flathead screwdriver to adjust the
When the [Auto Focus Adj Pos] (Page 6-51) is
focusing position. set to [Common], the following dialog appears.
yyPlace a target at the appropriate position.

yyDo not move a target during the focus adjustment.
The focus may not be adjusted correctly.
The guide screen for the Focus Adjustment opens.
The focusing position is adjusted automatically.

5 Adjust the focusing position as needed. 6 After the setting is completed, tap the [OK]
button.
zz
When the focusing position is to be
adjusted automatically again The system returns to the main screen for the
When the [Auto] button is tapped, the focusing Image Optimization.
position is adjusted automatically again. When the [Cancel] button is tapped, the focus
will be reset to the previous position.
4 yyDuring the auto adjustment, the sensor

automatically images a target by inputting the
internal trigger regardless of the Trigger Options

settings (Page 4-8). Also, when the continuous
lighting (Page 4-21) is set, the sensor images
with the flash lighting.
zz
When the focusing position is to be yyThe auto adjustment searches the positions that
adjusted manually can be focused over the entire area regardless
Adjust the focus by the slider. of the imaging area settings (Page 4-20).
For details of settings by using the slider, refer to

Editing the value with the slider (Page 3-17).
zz
When multiple focusing positions exist
When there are multiple positions that can be
focused, the sensor adjusts to the closest position
to the sensor. The options of the position that can
be focused will be indicated with ( ) mark.
To change the focusing position to the optional
position, tap the [Next Pos] or the options ( ) of
the focusing position.

Focus adjustment for the manual 6 Turn the focus adjustment screw of
the sensor with the attached flathead
focusing type (IV-500C/IV-500M/
screwdriver, and adjust the focus until the
IV-150M/IV-2000M)
focus value reaches the peak mark.
1 Start the Settings Navigator.

Starting the Settings Navigator (Page 4-3)
2 Display the main screen for the Image 4

Optimization.

(Page 4-4)
3 Tap the [Focus Adjustment] button.

Bar gauge
Peak mark
The peak mark is displayed on the position

where the focus is at the maximum. Turn the
The Settings Navigator guide opens. focus adjustment screw to make the bar gauge
on the peak mark position.
4 Tap the [OK] button. By tapping the [Peak Clear] button, the peak
The focus indicator will be displayed on the mark will be hidden, and the current focusing
monitor. value will be updated as a maximum value.
5 Image the target. When the focus cannot be adjusted by

watching the focus indicator on the monitor,
you can check with the blinking cycle of the
[Yes], input the external trigger. STATUS and OUT of the indicator light.
If an external trigger cannot be input, tap the yyQuickly blinks....... Focused.
button (Page 4-7) to image the target by yySlowly blinks........ Not focused. Adjust to the
inputting an internal trigger temporarily. Imaging most blinking position.
by inputting an internal trigger finishes by the STATUS indicator light
button.
OUT indicator light


button.
Image Optimization.
The focus indicator indicates the positions that

can be focused over the entire area regardless of
4 the imaging area settings (Page 4-20).

MEMO

Extended functions for the Image Optimization

Adjust the Image Optimization in the extended functions menu.
Items of extended functions for the Image Optimization
Default
Items Description Setting range
value
4 yyEntire
Sets the imaging area (image Sets the field of view of the imaging area
size of the sensor). When the for the sensor to the entire area.
Imaging Area imaging area is reduced, the yyPartial Entire
shutter speed and judging Edit a tool window and set an arbitrary area
process become faster. in the sensor's field of view as an imaging
area.
IV-500C(A) 1 to 100
IV-500M(A) 1 to 120
IV-150M(A) 1 to 120
Bright IV-2000M(A) 1 to 100

Adjusts the brightness of an IV-G500CA 1 to 105 20
image manually. IV-G500MA 1 to 130
IV-G150MA 1 to 115
IV-G300CA 1 to 115
Advanced
Brightness IV-G600MA 1 to 125
Adjustment yyNormal
This mode is the basic imaging mode. The
target can be imaged with less noise.
yyHDR
Imaging Mode Select to image a target such as a metal
Selects imaging mode for that reflects light and has high contrast. Normal
sensor. yyHighGain
Select to shorten the exposure time and
when the imaging environment is in a dark
place. Lowers imaging quality due to high
gain.
yyOFF
Turns OFF the built-in light.
yyFlash
The built-in light lights within the exposure
Selects lighting mode for built-in when imaging.
Lighting Flash
light. yyDC (Except for the IV-G300CA/
IV-G600MA)
The built-in light lights continuously
regardless of specified exposure time when
imaging a target.

Default
value
Applies color filters if the outline
of a certain color cannot be
displayed when the image is OFF/Red/Green/Blue/Cyan/Magenta/
Color Filters OFF
displayed in monochrome by a Yellow
color type sensor.
(Color type only)
Digital Zoom Sets the digital zoom.

Zoom OFF/Zoom Mag: x2/ Zoom 4
Zoom Mag: x4 (IV-G series only) OFF

Specify an area in the sensor's Specify an arbitrary area.
Zoom Screen
field of view as the zooming To move the zoom area to the center of the
Area center
area. screen, tap the [Screen Center] button.
Emphasize the edge (outline) of
Filter ON/OFF OFF
the image.

Imaging Area
For details of editing the tool window, refer to
1 Display extended functions menu for the Editing the tool window (Page 3-18).
Image Optimization.
Display Method of Extended Functions Menus 4 After the setting is completed,
tap the [OK] button.
(Page 4-70)
4 2 Tap the [Imaging Area] button. Image Optimization.
When an imaging area is specified, the area

outside the specified area will be displayed in

black.
The screen to set the imaging area opens.
3 Select type of imaging area.
Outside of specified area
If [Partial] is selected, edit the imaging area.
Imaging area
yyIf the tool has been set, a rectangular area

containing tool windows of all tools which have
been set will be displayed as [Actv Range].
The imaging area cannot be set smaller than
the active range. To narrow down the imaging
area, change the placement of the tool
windows before adjusting the imaging area.
yySet an area including the center of the field of
the view when trapezoidal correction (Page
6-47) is to be performed. A region that cannot
be exposed is created in the exposure area.

Advanced Brightness Adjustment Lighting
1 Display extended functions menu for the 1 Display extended functions menu for the
Image Optimization. Image Optimization.
Display Method of Extended Functions Menus Display Method of Extended Functions Menus
(Page 4-70)
(Page 4-70)
2 Tap the [Advanced Brightness Adjustment]
button. 2 Tap the [Lighting] button. 4

The screen to adjust brightness opens.
3 Select the lighting mode from
3 Set brightness and an imaging mode. [OFF]/[Flash]/[Continuous].
According to the brightness and imaging mode,
the exposure time will be calculated automatically.
Exposure time
4 After the setting is completed,

yyFor the details of settings with the slider or The system returns to the main screen for the
by inputting a value, refer to Editing the Image Optimization.
value with the slider (Page 3-17).
yyBy tapping the [Auto] button, a light intensity,
an exposure time and an imaging mode can yyIf the lighting mode is changed, re-register
be adjusted automatically. the master image and re-set the tool.
Otherwise a correct judgment may not be
4 After the setting is completed, possible.
yyWhen [DC] has been selected, the light
The system returns to the main screen for the goes off for approximately 0.3 ms with the
Image Optimization.
IV series or 0.2 ms with the IV-G series right
before imaging.
When the master image is registered and yyWhen the IV-G300CA/IV-G600MA is used,
settings other than Trigger Options and [DC] cannot be selected.
imaging area are changed, the confirmation
message that recommends you to re-register
the master image appears. Tap the [OK]
button and re-register the master image.
as a Reference for Judgment) (Page 4-24)

Color Filters (color type only) Digital Zoom
This is disabled for the Color Area tool. 1 Display extended functions menu for the
Image Optimization.
Display Method of Extended Functions Menus
1 Display extended functions menu for the (Page 4-70)
Image Optimization.
4
(Page 4-70)
2 Tap the [Digital Zoom] button.
2 Tap the [Color Filters] button.
3 Sets the magnification of digital zoom.

The image changes to monochrome. In the
Selectable magnifications are as follows:
example in the figure above, the red and blue
yyIV Series: OFF/x2
outlines become unclear.
yyIV-G Series: OFF/x2/x4
3 Select the color to apply the color filter.
Select the filter for the color or the complementary
color to be detected. Select red here.
The color filter corresponding to the selected

color will be applied. The red color becomes
brighter and the outline with the blue color
becomes clear.
Clarified outline
4 After the setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.

Image Optimization.

4 Set the zoom area and filter as needed. zz

Filter
zz
Zoom area The edge of the image (outline) displayed with
The zoom area for digital zoom is specified. digital zoom can be emphasized. Tap the [Filter]
Tap the [Zoom Area] button. button.

The zoom area can be moved. Specify the area If [Edge Emphasis] is set to [ON], an image with
to be zoomed. the outline emphasized will be displayed.
Zoom area
To move the zoom area to the center of the 5 After the setting is completed, tap the [OK]
screen, tap the [Screen Center] button. button.
If the zoom area is moved, the imaging area Image Optimization.
and tool window are moved together. It is
recommended to re-register the master image
and re-set the tool.

(Registering an Image as a Reference for Judgment)
Registers a master image to be a reference for judgment.
Main screen for the Master Registration

This section explains the main screen for the master image registration.
(1) (3)
(4)
4 (2) (5)
(6) (7) (8)
(1) [Back] button (6) Extended functions display button

Returns to the settings screen for the Image Displays extended functions menu for the
Optimization. master image registration.
1. Image Optimization(Clearly Image a Target) For details, refer to Extended functions for
(Page 4-6) the Master Registration (Page 4-26).
(2) Master image (7) [Register Live Image as Master] button
Displays a master image. If no master image is Registers an image taken by the sensor as a
registered, [No Master Image] will be displayed. master image.
(3) [Save] button For details, refer to Registering the master
Saves the settings and returns to the Sensor image (Page 4-25).
Setup Menu screen. (8) [Next] button
(4) [Image Type] display Proceeds to "3. Tool settings".
Displays an image type. 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment
Method for Targets) (Page 4-32)
yy .................Displays a master image (still
image).
the sensor which is currently
imaging.
yy .................Displays an image in the
Sensor Image History.
yy .................Displays an image in USB
memory.
yy .................Indicates that the monitor is in
the Test mode.
(5) [Zoom] button
Switches the display in full-screen mode and
makes it possible to enlarge an image on the
monitor.
For details, refer to Switching the display to
the full-screen mode (Page 5-6).

Register Live Image as Master Extended functions
Registering the master image 7 Tap the [OK] button.

2 Display the main screen for the Master

Registration.
(Page 4-4)
4
The master image will be registered and returns

3 Place the high-quality-target as reference to the main screen for the Master Registration.
of judgment on the imaging position.
4 Tap the [Register Live Image as Master] The disabling outline settings (Page 4-39, Page 4-59)
button. will be initialized. Set the disabling outline settings
again as needed.
Switches to the [LIVE] screen.
5 Image the target.

[Yes], input the external trigger.
If an external trigger cannot be input, tap the
button (Page 4-7) to image the target by
inputting an internal trigger temporarily. Imaging
by inputting an internal trigger finishes by the
button.
6 Check the image displayed on the monitor

and tap the [Register] button.
The confirmation dialog for the Master Registration

appears.

Extended functions for the Master Master image registration from the
Registration image history in the sensor
Registers an image of the image history in the
Items of extended functions for the memory of the sensor as a master image.
Master Registration Sensor Image History (Confirming the Images
whose Status Result is NG) (Page 6-21)
zz
Select Img From Image History
4 Registers an image of the image history in the 1 Display the extended functions menu for
memory of the sensor as a master image. the Master Registration.

To perform the master image registration from (Page 4-70)
the image history in the sensor, the image to
be registered as a master image in the image 2 Tap the [Select Img From Image History]
history must be saved. button.
Sensor Image History (Confirming the
Images whose Status Result is NG) (Page 6-21)
zz
Select Img From USB Memory
Registers the image in USB memory as a master
image.
yySave the image to be registered as a master

image to the USB memory in advance. The [Sensor Image History] screen opens.
yyThe files which can be registered as a
master image are batch backup files (*.iva)
and image capture files (*.ivp).
3 Select the image to be registered as
a master image and tap the [Register]
Saving the Sensor Settings and Images button.
to a USB Memory (Page 6-25)
zz
Brightness Correction
By setting a reference of brightness to the master Select the image
image, effects of changing the brightness can be
reduced.
yyThe brightness correction can be set when

the master image is registered.
yyFor the Color Area tool of the color type, the
brightness correction will be disabled. For details of how to operate the screen,
refer to Loading and confirming the saved
images (Page 6-22).
The selected screen opens on the monitor.

4 Check the image displayed on the monitor


If the imaging area of the loaded image is

different, the confirmation dialog appears. If an
area that has not been imaged is registered,
the area will be displayed in black.

The new master image will be registered and
returns to the main screen for the Master
Registration.

Registering from the image in the USB 5 Select the image to be registered as
a master image and tap the [Register]
memory
button.
Select the batch backup file (*.iva) or image capture
file (*.ivp) stored in USB memory, and register as a
master image.
Select the

When using a batch backup file (*.iva) image
4 Backing up in a batch (Page 6-26)
1 Connect the USB memory which stores

the batch backup files (*.iva) to the USB

port.
Installing the USB memory (Page 6-25) For details of how to operate the screen,
refer to Loading and confirming the saved
2 Display the extended functions menu for images (Page 6-22).
the master image registration.
The selected image will be magnified.
(Page 4-70) 6 Check the image displayed on the monitor
3 Tap the [Select Img From USB Memory]
button.
The data in USB memory will be displayed.

4 Select the file to be registered as a master different, the confirmation dialog appears. If an
area that has not been imaged is registered,
image and tap the [OK] button.

Select the file
For details of selecting the files in the USB

memory, refer to Selecting the file in the
USB memory (Page 3-20).
returns to the main screen for the master image
The image of selected file will be displayed. registration.

When using an image capture file (*.ivp) 5 Check the image displayed on the monitor
Saving the image history individually (Page 6-27) and tap the [Register] button.
1 Connect the USB memory which stores

the image capture files (*.ivp) to the USB
port.
Installing the USB memory (Page 6-25)
2 Display the extended functions menu for 4

the master image registration.

Display Method of Extended Functions Menus The confirmation dialog appears.
(Page 4-70)
3 Tap the [Select Img From USB Memory] different, the confirmation dialog appears. If an
button. area that has not been imaged is registered,
The data in USB memory will be displayed.
4 Select the file to be registered as a master

image and tap the [OK] button.
returns to the main screen for the master image
registration.
Select the file

The selected image will be magnified.

Brightness correction 5 Set the tool window to be a reference of

brightness correction and tap the [OK]
button.
For the Color Area tool of the color type, this will
be disabled.
1 Display the extended functions menu for

the Master Registration.
4 Display Method of Extended Functions Menus
Tool window to
be a reference
(Page 4-70) of brightness
collection
2 Tap the [Brightness Correction] button.
For the region to be a reference of brightness
correction, specify the following.
yyA region with average medium brightness.
A region with strong shininess and reflection
and a region which is too dark may not be
corrected properly.
yyA region with a constant imaging status
which does not change such as device parts
The information screen opens (color type only). other than the targets .
3 Tap the [OK] button. For details of editing the tool window, refer to
The settings screen for the Brightness Correction
Editing the tool window (Page 3-18).
opens.
In the case of color operation type, the image
will be displayed in monochrome. 6 Tap the [Test] button.
4 Tap the [Select Region] button.
If the brightness in the specified region is

changed using the masking shield, check that
The screen to set a reference of the brightness the brightness of the entire image is corrected.
correction opens.

7 Tap the [Before Corr]/[After Corr] button

and check the operation status before
brightness correction and status after
brightness correction.

8 Tap the [Back] button.
The system returns to the settings screen for
the Brightness Correction.

button.
Image Optimization.
yyWhen brightness correction is not to be used,

tap the [Delete] button on the screen in step 4.
yyBrightness correction corrects the brightness of
the entire image to make the average brightness
in the tool window to be a reference of brightness
correction the same as the brightness of the
master image.

3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method for Targets)
In this section, set the tool to judge whether a target Types of tools
is high-quality-target or low-quality-target in the
master image. zz
Outline tool
The aspects of a target registered as a master A detection tool to calculate the matching rate for
image are set as a high-quality-target. During an the target to be examined based on the outline
operation, the sensor judges whether it is a high- information of a registered high-quality-target.
Judges whether a target is a high or low-quality-
quality-target or low-quality-target by judging the
product by setting the threshold to the matching
differences in the registered high-quality-target and
4 a target to be examined.
rate.
Outline tool (Page 4-36)
Up to 16 detection tools in one program and up to Tool settings
1 position adjustment tool can be set. Those tools Master image Outline extraction processing
can judge a target at the same time.
Selecting a tool according to its

intended purpose
Processing and judgment during an operation
Select a tool according to with the purpose of an Internal processing <Judge is OK>
examination.
Detection tool to be used

Purposes Color Area/
Outline tool
Area tool
To detect the surface/ Searches a target which has the outline of same shapes

rear face of parts as an outline of a high-quality-target.
Outline can be detected even if a target is rotated.
To detect the
-
orientation of parts Example when the result was NG
To detect mixture of No same shapes exist Different shape
parts with different - (Detection of existence) (Shape detection)
shapes
To detect assembly

deficiencies of parts
To detect processing

defects of parts Different direction
(Detection of direction)
To detect differences
-
in sizes (areas)
To detect mixture of
-
different colors
The matching rate is indicated in 0 to 100.

100 indicates that an outline is completely matched.
The matching rate decreases in accordance with
the number of non-matched parts.

zz
Color Area/Area tool zz
Position Adjustment tool
A tool to calculate the matching rate in the area A tool to correct the differences in positioning
(number of pixels) of a target to be examined as (position gap) of a target to be examined. The
the basis (100 %) of the area (number of pixels) position adjustment is used with other detection
of a registered high-quality-target. This judges
whether a target is a high or low-quality-product tools.
by setting the threshold to the matching rate. Position Adjustment tool (Page 4-55)
If the sensor is a color type, the tool will be Color
Area tool. The system judges by the area with an Tool settings
arbitrary specified color. Master image 4
If the sensor is a monochrome type, the tool will

be the Area tool. The system judges by the area
with an arbitrary specified brightness.
Color Area/Area tool (Page 4-44)
Tool settings
Color extraction process
(Color type) Tool window
Brightness extraction process Position adjustment window
Master image (Monochrome type)
Processing during an operation
Position adjustment process
Processing and judgment during an operation

Internal processing <Judge is OK>
Tool window
Position adjustment window
Search area of the tool window
Compares the area of a target as defining an

area of high-quality-target to 100 %.
Example when the judgment was NG
Area is narrow Area is wide
yyThe matching rate is indicated in 0 to 100 (default).

100 indicates that an area is completely
matched. The matching rate decreases as
the area of a target narrows.
yyThe setting range of the display range and
threshold for matching rate can be changed to
0-200 or 0-999. Also, a target can be judged
by setting the threshold to the upper limit.
Setting the upper limit (Page 4-50)

Main screen for the Tool Settings

This section explains the main screen for the Tool settings.
(1) (4)
(2) (5)
(6)
(3)
(7)
4
(8) (9) (10) (11) (12)
(1) [Back] button (7) [View] button

Returns to the Master Registration screen. Displays a menu to select the display pattern of
2. Master Registration (Registering an Image tools.
as a Reference for Judgment) (Page 4-24) Selecting a display method for tools (Page 5-7)
(2) [Tool Name] button (8) Extended functions display button
Displays a name of the selected tool on the Displays the extended functions menu for the
monitor. From the pull-down menu, the selected Tool Settings.
tool can be switched. Extended functions for the Tool settings
(3) Master image (Page 4-62)
Displays the master image and tool window. If (9) [Add Tool] button
a search region is set, the tool window which Adds tools.
indicate the search region (light blue) will be Adding a tool (Page 4-35)
displayed.
(10) [Edit Tool] button
By tapping the tool window, the selected tool
Edits settings for the selected tool.
can be switched.
Editing a tool (Page 4-35)
(4) [Save] button
(11) [Delete Tool] button
Saves the settings.
Deletes the selected tool.
Finishing the Settings Navigator (Page 4-5)
Deleting a tool (Page 4-35)
(5) [Image Type] display
(12) [Next] button
Displays an image type.
Proceeds to the Output Assignment settings.
yy .................Displays a master image (still
image).
yy .................Indicates that the monitor is in Outputting to Output Line) (Page 4-64)
the Test mode.
the sensor which is currently
imaging.
(6) [Zoom] button
Switches to the full-screen display and makes it
possible to enlarge an image on the monitor.
For details, refer to Switching the display to
the full-screen mode (Page 5-6).

Adding/Editing/Deleting a tool Editing a tool

Edits the settings of a tool which has already been set.
Adding a tool
Newly sets a tool.
1 Select a tool to edit the settings.
1 Tap the [Add Tool] button.
4

yyIf no tools are set, only the [Add Tool] button
is displayed.
yyIf one or more tools are set in one program,
the [Edit Tool] and [Delete Tool] button are
2 Tap the [Edit Tool] button.
displayed.
2 Tap the tool to be added. 3 Edit setting items for each tool.
Position Adjustment tool (Page 4-55)
Deleting a tool
Deletes an unnecessary tool.
By tapping the button, the help screen for 1 Select a tool to be deleted.
tools appears.
3 Set setting items for each tool.

2 Tap the [Delete Tool] button.

The selected tool will be deleted and returns to
the main screen for the Tool settings.

Outline tool Color Area/Area tool Position Adjustment tool Extended functions
Outline tool
Setting items for the Outline tool
Items Description Setting range Default value

yy Rect
Specifies with the rectangular window.
Window Shape
4 Selects the window shape to

An arbitrary size, position, and angle
can be specified with stylus.
specify an area of the target Rect
yy Circle
to be detected.
Specifies with the circular window.
Edit Window
An arbitrary size and position can be

specified with stylus.
yyEntire Entire
Search Region
Specifies an area to search the

Specifies the entire imaging area as a (Without position
outline of a target. By specifying adjustment)
search region.
the smaller area as a search
yyPartial Partial
region, the processing time will
Specifies a search region to an arbitrary (With position
be shortened.
size in the imaging area. adjustment)
yyUndo
The previous operation can be cancelled.
Remove Outline
Judges by disabling an You can undo back to 5 operations before.

unnecessary outline which yyClear
interrupts the stabilized Initializes all the disabling processes. Not specified
detection. Specify by tracing yyEraser Width
the extracted outline with stylus. Selects the eraser width (light/medium/
Fine Tune Outline
heavy) of the pen when specifying an

unnecessary outline.
yyHigh
Extracts an outline of the image with
low contrast. Used when an outline you
wish to detect cannot be extracted.
Sensitivity
The extraction sensitivity of

yyNorm
an outline can be selected Norm*1
Extracts the standard outline.
according to the target.
yyLow
Reduces the extracted volume of an
outline. Reduces the extracted volume of
an outline that is not necessary to detect.
Adjusts a threshold (matching
rate*2) used in the OK/NG
judgment. During threshold
Limit adjustment, the system turns
0 to 100 70
Adjustment to the Test mode so that the
thresholds can be adjusted to
the applicable value during an
operation.
*1 If digital zoom set to [Zoom Mag: x4] on the IV-G300CA/IV-G600MA, the default value is [High].
*2 The matching rate of 100 indicates that an outline is completely matched.
Matching rate decreases in accordance with number of non-matched parts.

Setting the Outline tool 6 Select a tool window shape.

2 Display the main screen for the Tool settings.

(Page 4-4)
4
3 Tap the [Add Tool] button and tap the Rect Circle

[Outline] button.
Adding a tool (Page 4-35)
The main screen for the Outline tool settings opens.
4 Tap the [Edit Window] button.

The system returns to the screen to set the
[Window Shape] and [Search Region].
8 Set the position, size, and angle of the

tool window in accordance with the target.
Set the tool

window
The screen to set the [Window Shape] and
[Search Region] opens.
yyOnce the tool window is tapped, you can

proceed to step 8.
yyBy tapping the < > extended functions
display button, the extended functions menu
for the Outline tool will be displayed.
Extended functions for the Outline tool
(Page 4-41)
5 Tap the [Window Shape] button. 9 Set a search region as needed.

Setting a search region (Page 4-39)

button.
Outline tool settings.
11 Adjust the outline as needed.

Settings for disabling outlines (Page 4-39)
The screen to select the window shape opens. Setting a sensitivity (Page 4-40)

12 Tap the [Limit Adjustment] button. 14 Adjust the threshold of anomaly detection
by checking the matching rate.
<Setting example>
If the matching rate of the high-quality-target is
higher than 90 and if the matching rate of the low-
quality-target is lower than 40, set the threshold to 65
which is an intermediate value between 40 and 90.
4
The sensor turns to the Test mode.
13 Image a high-quality-target and a low-

quality-target.
Matching rate Threshold
yyA target is detected as OK if the matching
rate is greater than the threshold, and
inputting an internal trigger temporarily. Imaging detected as NG if the matching rate is lower
by inputting an internal trigger finishes by the than the threshold.
button. yyAccording to the status result of the tool, the
display color of the tool changes.
Selecting a display method for tools (Page 5-7)
yyThe threshold can be changed using the
slider or by inputting values.
yyThe thresholds can also be set in [Limit
Adjustment] of the Sensor Setup Menu screen.
Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment (Page 5-15)
yyFor details of the matching rate, refer to
Matching Rate of the Outline Tool and
Position Adjustment Tool (Page A-5).

button.

Tool settings.

Setting a search region

Settings for disabling outlines
When a range of the search region is to be specified, Perform the following procedures to delete an
perform the following procedures. unnecessary extracted outline in the tool window.
1 Tap the [Search Region] button. 1 Tap the [Fine Tune Outline] button.

The selection screen for a search region opens. The Settings Navigator guide opens.
2 Tap the [Partial] button.
2 Specify an outline which detection is not
needed by tracing it with stylus.
The specified outline changes from green to yellow.
The editing screen for a search region opens.
3 Set a tool window indicates the search region. The outline that the
outline extraction has
disabled (yellow)
yyThe eraser width (light/medium/heavy) of the

Search region pen when tracing an outline can be switched
via [Eraser Width].
yyThe [Undo] button is applicable up to 5 times.
yyFor details of editing the tool window, refer to 3 After the setting is completed, tap the [OK]
Editing the tool window (Page 3-18). button.
yyThe search region cannot be rotated. The system returns to the main screen for the

button.
The system returns to the screen to set [Window
Shape] and [Search Region].


Setting a sensitivity
According to the target, perform the following
procedures when the extraction sensitivity of an
outline is selected.
1 Tap the [Fine Tune Outline] button.
4
The outline
cannot be
extracted
The Settings Navigator guide opens.

2 Select the extraction sensitivity of an outline.
Select the [High] in this section.

button.
Extracted
outline


Outline tool > Extended functions Color Area/Area tool Position Adjustment tool Extended functions
Extended functions for the Outline tool

Default
value
Sets a range of the rotating direction to search
an outline of the target.
The system judges NG if an angle of the
target exceeds its rotation range even if the
Rotation
target is the same shape.
yyIf the setting of the rotation range is too wide,
4
0 to 180 (Unit: 1) 20
Range the acceptable range of variations of angles

when a target is placed can be increased.
yyIf the setting of the rotation range is too
narrow, the processing time can be shorten.
yyThis can be used for judging the direction of
the target by limiting the rotation range.
yyON
The tool window will search
with the range few degrees
Select whether or not to allow the margin for wider than the setting value of
Margin ON
the limited angle set in Rotation Range. rotation range.
yyOFF
The tool window will search only
within the set rotation range.
yyHigh Accuracy
Differences in outlines can be
detected with a high degree of
accuracy.
Search The detection mode of the Outline tool can be yyHigh Speed High
Algorithm selected according to the target. Outlines can be judged faster than Accuracy
in high accuracy mode.
There may be an influence from
the background or unnecessary
outlines other than the target.
An arbitrary name such as the name of a
target can be set in tools. Tool names can be Up to 8 characters in one byte
Tool Name (None)
checked on the run screen. English characters can be set.


Rotation Range 5 After the setting is completed, tap the [OK]
button.
1 Display the extended functions menu of The system returns to the main screen for the
the Outline tool.
(Page 4-70)
2 Tap the [Rotation Range] button.
Search Algorithm
1 Display the extended functions menu of

4 the Outline tool.
(Page 4-70)
2 Tap the [Search Algorithm] button.

3 Set a rotation range of the Outline tool.
3 Select the type of search algorithm (High

Speed/High Accuracy).
For details of setting using the slider or by

inputting value, refer to Editing the value
with the slider (Page 3-17).
4 Set a margin of the rotation range.

button.
yySelect [ON] when detection is not stable yySelect [High Accuracy] when detection is not
because of the influence of the rotation angle stable because of a small difference in the
of the target. The tool window will search with matching rate of a high and low-quality-target.
the range few degrees wider than the setting yySelect [High Accuracy] when detection is
value of rotation range. (The tool window not stable because of the influence of an
will search few degrees even if the rotation
unnecessary outline other than the target such
range is set to 0)
yySelect [OFF] when you would like to detect as the background.
the target in accordance with the set rotation yySelect [High Speed] to shorten the processing
angle of the target. time.

Tool Name

the Outline tool.
(Page 4-70)
2 Tap the [Tool Name] button.

4

The screen to set the tool name opens.
3 Input an arbitrary name.
For details of how to enter characters, refer to

Inputting characters (Page 3-19).

button.
The tool name which has been set will be displayed.
If the display language (Page 6-61) is changed,

characters might be garbled.

Color Area/Area tool
Setting items for the Color Area/Area tool

Default
value
yy Rect
4 An arbitrary size, position, and angle
can be specified with stylus.
yy Circle
Select the window shape to
Specifies with the circular window.
Window Shape specify an area of the target Rect
to be extracted.
yyEntire
The entire area (imaging area) of
an image displayed in the monitor
becomes the extraction target.
Edit Window
Adds a rectangular/circular yy Rect

Add Mask mask region in the tool Specifies a rectangular mask region
window frame. or a mask cutting region. An arbitrary
Inside the mask region size, position, and angle can be
Mask is excluded from an area specified with stylus.
Shape extraction target. yy Circle
Mask
Specifies a circular mask region or Rect

Adds a rectangular/circular a mask cutting region. An arbitrary
Cut mask cutting region in the mask size and position can be specified
region. with stylus.
Inside the mask cutting
yySetting counts
Clip region, the mask is disabled
Adding or cutting the mask can be
Shape and it becomes the target of
set up to 20 times.
the area extraction.
yyExtract Area [+]
Expands a range of the color to be
extracted and expands an extraction
area.
yyExtract Area [-]
Contracts a range of the color to be
Tap a color to be extracted extracted and narrows an extraction
Color Extraction
on the master image and set area. (No extraction)
(For color type)
an extraction range.
yyUndo
The previous operation can be
cancelled.
yyClear
Cancels the selection of the tapped
color.
The color range to be
to Live Image extracted can be set on the - -
Live image of the target.

Default
value
yyExtraction Area
Sets the upper and the lower limit
of brightness in a range within 0 to
255 with the tapped brightness as a
Tap brightness to be extracted reference.
Brightness Extraction
on the master image and set yyUndo (No extraction)
(For monochrome type)
the extraction range. The previous operation can be
cancelled. 4
yyClear

Cancels the selection of the tapped
brightness.
A brightness range to be
to Live Image extracted can be set on the - -
Live image of the target.
Adjusts a threshold
(matching rate*) used in the
OK/NG judgment. During the
thresholds adjustment, the 0 to 100 (when the upper limit setting
Limit Adjustment 50
system switches to the Test is OFF)
mode so that a threshold can
be adjusted to an applicable
value during an operation.
Sets the upper limit of the
threshold. yyEnable
Upper Set when the OK/NG Activates the upper limit setting.
Disable
Limit judgment is desired if the yyDisable
target area is larger than the Deactivates the upper limit setting.
Upper Limit
OK area.
yy0-200
When the upper limit of Sets the upper and the lower limit of
the threshold is ON, select a threshold in a range within 0 to 200.
the threshold scale in
Scale yy0-999 0-200
accordance with the range
of the matching rate required Sets the upper and the lower limit of a
for the judgment. threshold in a range within 0 to 999.
The slider movement unit is 5.
* The matching rate is 100 when an area matches perfectly. This becomes smaller with a narrower area
and larger with a wider area. If the matching rate exceeds the upper limit of the threshold adjusting
range, it will be saturated to the upper limit of the threshold adjusting range.

Setting the Color Area/Area tool 6 Select a tool window shape.


4 (Page 4-4)
3 Tap the [Add Tool] button and tap the Rect Circle
[ColorArea] button (color type) or [Area]

button (monochrome type).
The main screen for the Color Area/Area tool
settings opens.
When [Entire] is selected, the tool window will
4 Tap the [Edit Window] button. be hidden.

[Window Shape] and [Mask].
8 Set the position, size, and angle of tool

window in accordance with a target.
Set the tool

The screen to set the [Window Shape] and window
[Mask] opens.

proceed to step 8.
yyBy tapping the < > extended functions
display button, the extended functions menu
for the Color Area/Area tool will be displayed.
Extended functions of the Color Area/ For details of editing the tool window, refer to
Area tool (Page 4-52) Editing the tool window (Page 3-18).
5 Tap the [Window Shape] button. 9 Perform the mask setting as needed.
Inside the mask region is excluded from the
area extraction target.
Mask settings (Page 4-49)

Color Area/Area tool settings.
The screen to select the window shape opens.

11 Set the area to be the target to extract. zz

For monochrome type
Tap the [Brightness Extraction] button.
zz
For color type
Tap the [Color Extraction] button.

The screen to select brightness to be extracted
opens.
The screen to select a color to be extracted opens.
Tap the brightness to be the reference of
Tap the color to be the reference of judgment
judgment for the color area.
for the color area.
The tapped brightness will be extracted.

The tapped color will be extracted.
yyIf the areas of brightness that have not been
yyIf the areas of color that have not been extracted
extracted are tapped repeatedly, the extraction
are tapped repeatedly, the extraction range can
range can be added.
be added.
yyAdjust the slider, and the range of the brightness
yyTap the [+] / [-] button of the extraction range,
to be extracted can be expanded/reduced.
and the range of color to be extracted can be
expanded/reduced.
yyFor details of settings by using the slider, refer to

Editing the value with the slider (Page 3-17).
yyBy tapping the [to Live Image] button, the
yyBy tapping the [to Live Image] button, the
range of the color to be extracted can be set
range of the brightness to be extracted can
with the Live Image of the target.
be set with the Live image of the target.
yyWhen the color extraction is to be performed
yyWhen the brightness extraction is to be performed
again, tap the [Clear] button and then tap the
again, tap the [Clear] button and then tap the color
color to be the reference of judgment again.
to be the reference for judgment again.
After the setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.
After the setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.
Color Area tool settings.
Area tool settings.

12 Tap the [Limit Adjustment] button. 15 Set the upper limit as needed.
Setting the upper limit (Page 4-50)

button.

The sensor turns to Test mode.
13 Image a high-quality-target and a low-

quality-target.
inputting an internal trigger temporarily. Imaging The system returns to the main screen for tool
by inputting an internal trigger finishes by the settings.
button.
14 Adjust the threshold of anomaly detection

<Setting example>
If the matching rate of the high-quality-target is
higher than 90 and if the matching rate of the low-
quality-target is lower than 40, set the threshold to 65
which is an intermediate value between 40 and 90.
yyA target is detected as OK if the matching rate is

greater than the threshold, and detected as NG
if the matching rate is lower than the threshold.
yyIn accordance with status result of the tool,
the display color of the tool changes.
Adjustment] of the Sensor Setup Menu screen.

Mask settings 5 Set the position, size, and angle of the

Perform the following procedures if a mask region mask shape in accordance with the target.
is to be specified in the tool window.
Set mask shape
1 Tap the [Mask] button

The screen to set a mask region opens.
2 Tap the [Add Mask] button. 6 After the setting is completed, tap the [OK]
button.
The system returns to the screen to set a mask
region.
7 Tap the [Cut Mask] button to cut a mask

region.
The screen to set a mask region and a mask

shape opens.
3 Tap the [Mask Shape] button.

The screen to set a mask cutting region and
cutting shape opens.
8 Tap the [Clip Shape] button.
4 Select the mask shape and tap the [OK]

button.

9 Select the cutting shape and tap the [OK]

Setting the upper limit
button. To perform the OK/NG judgment when an area of
the target is wider than an area of a high-quality-
target, perform the following procedures.
1 Tap the [Upper Limit] button.
4
10 Set the position, size, and angle of the

cutting shape in accordance with the target.
Set clip shape
2 Tap the [Enable] button for the upper limit

threshold and select the scale.

11 After the setting is completed, tap the [OK] Select the scale in accordance with a range of
button. the matching rate required for judgment.
mask region. 3 After the setting is completed, tap the [OK]
button.
12 Repeat steps 2 to 11 as needed and set The slider to set the upper limit and the lower
the mask region. limit of the threshold will be displayed.

button.
Area not be
masked
Masked area

[Window Shape] and [Mask].

4 Adjust the threshold of anomaly detection


Matching rate Threshold (upper limit)
Threshold (lower limit)
yyJudged OK when the matching rate is within

threshold range, and NG when it is outside
the range.
yyIn accordance with status result of the tool,
the display color of the tool changes.
Adjustment] of the Sensor Setup Menu
screen.

button.

Outline tool Color Area/Area tool > Extended functions Position Adjustment tool Extended functions
Extended functions of the Color Area/Area tool
Default
value
yyH (hue)
0 to 359
(both starting point
yyColor type
4
Advanced Color and ending point)
Extraction Specifies a color to be extracted as HSB -
yyS (saturation)
(For color type) (H: Hue, S: Saturation, B: Brightness).
0 to 255
Advanced Brightness
yyB (Brightness)
Extraction
0 to 255
(For monochrome type)
yyMonochrome type
Specifies brightness value to be 0 to 255 -
extracted.
A color/brightness range to be extracted
to Live Image - -
can be set on the Live image of the target.
An arbitrary name such as name of a
Up to 8 characters
target can be set to tools. Tool names can
Tool Name in one byte English (None)
be checked on the run screen.
characters can be set.
yyDisable
Matches the area
extracted from the
master image as the
criteria of a rate of
100%.
yyEnable: Large
Select a condition which the matching rate Matches 1/10th of
Fixed Reference Area Disable
of the Color Area/Area is 100%. the total sensor view
as the criteria of a
rate of 100%.
yyEnable: Small
Matches 1/100th of
the total sensor view
as the criteria of a
rate of 100%.

Advanced Color Extraction/

Tool Name
Advanced Brightness Extraction
1 Display the extended functions menu of the Color Area/Area tool.
the Color Area/Area tool. Display Method of Extended Functions Menus
Display Method of Extended Functions Menus (Page 4-70)
(Page 4-70)
2 Tap the [Advanced Color Extraction] button. 2

Tap the [Tool Name] button.
For monochrome type, tap the [Advanced

4
Brightness Extraction] button.

The screen to set the tool name opens.
3 Input an arbitrary name.

3 Specify a color or brightness of the
extraction target.
zz
For color type

zz
For monochrome type
button.
The tool name which has been set will be displayed.
When the [to Live Image] button is tapped, the

color extraction condition can be checked with
the Live image.

button.
The system returns to the main screen for the If the display language (Page 6-61) is changed,
characters might be garbled.


Fixed Reference Area 5 Extract the color/brightness range to be judged.
zz
Extract from the Live image
Select [Enable] if the color/brightness to be judged Tap the [Color Extraction]/[Brightness Extraction]
in the master image cannot be detected. button.
By tapping the [to Live Image] button, extract the color/
brightness range to be judged from LIVE image.
The Color Area/Area tools with the fixed reference
area set as [Enable] are excluded from a Tool
4 Auto Tuning target.

the Color Area/Area tool.

Menus (Page 4-70)
2 Tap the [Fixed Reference Area] button. The color/brightness range to be extracted
can be specified by using [Advanced Color
Extraction]/[Advanced Brightness Extraction].
zz
Extract from the master image, and then
move the tool window
Tap the [Edit Window] button and move the tool
window.
By tapping the [Color Extraction]/[Brightness
Extraction] button, extract the color/brightness
range to be judged.
The Settings Navigator guide opens. Tap the [Edit Window] button again, and move
the tool window to the position where the color/
brightness is to be judged.
3 Perform the Fixed Reference Area.

Extract
the color/
brightness
Move
6 After the setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.


Position Adjustment tool

If there are varies of the position determining of the target, the position to be judged is also declined from
the tool window and cannot be judged correctly.
The amount that the target is off-centered in regards to the master image will be calculated by the internal
sensor and corrected by the position adjustment tool, so the off-centered position can be detected correctly
even if the position was off-centered.
Tool settings
Master image
Run
4

Tool window Tool window
Position adjustment window Position adjustment window
Search region of the tool window
yyWhen the Position Adjustment tool is being used, the processing time will be longer.
yyIn the case of the Outline tool, the search range position will be adjusted. The outline of a target is
searched in adjusted search range and the searched outline will be judged.
yyUsed when an area of the target to be examined and a relative position of the target are determined
and when there is variability in determining the position (position or angle) of a target. For example,
intended purposes are shown below.
- For package box, whether or not the seal is put in the determined area and direction.
- For components, whether logos/symbols/insignias are in-print or not.
yyIf the position adjustment fails, the result of position adjustment is NG. In this case, the total status
result is NG. The individually set detection tool will not be judged. Failure of position adjustment can
be checked with position adjustment output. Review the position adjustment settings and position
determining accuracy for a target.
yyWhen the Position Adjustment tool is added, the following settings for the detection tools have been set
will be changed.
- Outline tool : When the search region is the entire range, the value will be initialized to the default
value in which the position adjustment is enabled.
- Color Area/Area tool : When the window shape is the entire range, the value will be initialized to the
default value in which the position adjustment is enabled.
yyOnly one Position Adjustment tool can be set in one program. By setting the position adjustment, the
position adjustment will be applied to all detection tools.
yyFor details of matching rate, refer to Matching Rate of the Outline Tool and Position Adjustment
Tool (Page A-5).

Setting items for the Position Adjustment tool
Items Description Setting range Default value

yy Rect
Window Shape
Select a shape of the window An arbitrary size, position, and angle

to specify the range of a target can be specified with stylus.
Rect
to be position adjustment yy Circle
4
Edit Window
reference. Specifies with the circular window.


Specifies an area to search yyEntire
Search Region
a target to be a reference Specifies the entire imaging area as a

of position adjustment. By search region.
Entire
specifying the narrower area as yyPartial
a search region, the processing Specifies a search region to an arbitrary
time will be shortened. size in the imaging area.
yyUndo
The previous operation can be cancelled.
Remove Outline
Unnecessary outlines which You can undo back to 5 operations before.

obstruct the steady position yyClear
adjustments can be disabled. Initializes all the disabling processes. Not specified
Specifies by tracing the yyEraser Width
extracted outline with stylus. Selects the eraser width (light/medium/
Fine Tune Outline
heavy) of the pen when specifying an

unnecessary outline.
yyHigh
Extracts an outline of the image with
low contrast. Used when an outline you
wish to detect cannot be extracted.
Sensitivity
The extraction sensitivity of yyNorm

an outline can be selected Extracts the standard outline. Norm*1
according to the target. yyLow
Reduces the extracted volume of an
outline. Reduces the extracted volume
of an outline that is not necessary to
detect.
Adjusts a threshold (matching
rate*2) which judges whether
the position adjustment is
succeeded or failed. During
Limit
threshold adjustment, the 0 to 100 70
Adjustment
system switches to the Test
mode so that the threshold can
be adjusted to an applicable
value during an operation.
*1 If digital zoom is set to [Zoom Mag: x4] on the IV-G300CA/IV-G600MA, the default value is [High].
*2 The matching rate of 100 indicates that an outline is completely matched.
The matching rate decreases with more non-matching parts.

Setting the Position Adjustment tool 6 Select a tool window shape.


(Page 4-4)
4
3 Tap the [Add Tool] button and then the Rect Circle

[Pos.Adj.] button.
The main screen for the Position Adjustment tool
settings opens.
4 Tap the [Edit Window] button. 7 Tap the [OK] button.

[Window Shape] and [Search Region].
8 Set the position, size, and angle of tool

window in accordance with a target.
Set the tool

window
The screen to set the [Window Shape] and

[Search Region] opens.

proceed to step 8.
yyBy tapping the < > extended functions display
button, the extended functions menu for the Set the position and size of tool window as
position adjustment tool will be displayed. large as possible by selecting the part that is
Extended functions for the Position dissimilar in shape.
Adjustment tool (Page 4-61) Stabilizing the position adjustment (Page 5-37)
5 Tap the [Window Shape] button. For details of editing the tool window, refer to
9 Set a search region as needed.


button.
The screen to select the window shape opens.
Position Adjustment tool settings.

11 Adjust the outline as needed. 14 Adjust a threshold to judge whether or not

Settings for disabling outlines (Page 4-59) the position adjustment is succeeded by
Setting a sensitivity (Page 4-60) checking the matching rate.
12 Tap the [Limit Adjustment] button.
4
The sensor turns to the Test mode.

yyIf there are many variations of target shapes
13 Image the target. that a tool window has been set to, set the
threshold to a lower matching rate.
[Internal Trigger Control with IN1 Input] is set to rate is greater than the threshold, and
[Yes], input the external trigger. detected as NG if the matching rate is lower
If an external trigger cannot be input, tap the than the threshold.
button (Page 4-7) to image the target by yyIn accordance with status result of the tool,
inputting an internal trigger temporarily. Imaging the display color of the tool changes.
by inputting an internal trigger finishes by the Selecting a display method for tools (Page 5-7)
button.
yyThe threshold can also be set in [Limit Adjustment]
of the sensor setting menu screen.

button.
The system returns to the main screen for tool

settings.

Setting a search region

Settings for disabling outlines
To limit a range (adjusting range of position Perform the following procedures to delete an
adjustment) to search a target to be a reference, unnecessary extracted outline in the tool window.
set it in the search region setting. When a range
of the search region is to be specified, perform the 1 Tap the [Fine Tune Outline] button.
following procedures.
1 Tap the [Search Region] button. 4

The selection screen for a search region opens. 2 Specify the unnecessary outline in basic
shapes of position adjustment by tracing
2 Tap the [Partial] button. it with stylus.
The specified outline changes from green to
yellow.
The editing screen for a search region opens.
3 Set the tool window indicates a search region. The outline that the
outline extraction
has disabled
(yellow)
yyThe eraser width (light/medium/heavy) of the

Search region
pen when tracing an outline can be switched
via [Eraser Width].
yyThe [Undo] button is applicable up to 5 times.
yyFor details of editing the tool window, refer to 3 After the setting is completed, tap the [OK]
button.
yyThe search region cannot be rotated. The system returns to the main screen for the
button.
The system returns to the screen to set [Window
Shape] and [Search Region].


Setting a sensitivity
According to the target, perform the following
procedures when the extraction sensitivity of an
outline is selected.
1 Tap the [Fine Tune Outline] button.
4
The outline
cannot be
extracted

2 Select the extraction sensitivity of an outline.
Select [High] in this section.

button.
Extracted
outline


Outline tool Color Area/Area tool Position Adjustment tool > Extended functions Extended functions
Extended functions for the Position Adjustment tool

Default
value
Sets a range to adjust the position to the rotating direction.
The status result of position adjustment is NG without adjusting
Rotation the position if an angle of a target exceeds its rotation range. 0 to 180
yyIf the setting of rotation range is too wide, the acceptable range 20
Range of variation in angles when a target is placed can be set wider. (Unit: 1)
yyIf the setting of rotation range is too narrow, the 4
processing time can be shorten.

yyON
The tool window will
search with the range
few degrees wider
Select whether or not to allow the margin for the limited than the setting value
Margin ON
angle set in Rotation Range. of rotation range.
yyOFF
The tool window will
search only within the
set rotation range.
Rotation Range
1 Display the extended functions menu for 4 Set a margin of the rotation range.
the Position Adjustment tool.
(Page 4-70)
2 Tap the [Rotation Range] button.
yySelect [ON] when the position adjustment

is not stable because of the influence of the
rotation angle of the target.
The tool window will search with the range
3 Set the rotation range of the Position few degrees wider than the setting value of
rotation range.
Adjustment tool.
(The tool window will search few degrees
even if the rotation range is set to 0.)
yySelect [OFF] when you would like to detect
the target in accordance with the set rotation
angle of the target.

button.
For details of settings by the slider or inputting
value, refer to Editing the value with the
slider (Page 3-17).

Extended functions for the Tool settings
Items of extended functions for the Tool settings
Default
value
Copies a tool which has been set, and pastes it to the
4 Copy Tool same position. - -
This is for outline tool and color area/area tool.
Copy Tool
This section explains using example of the Outline tool.
1 Select the copy source tool. 4 Tap the [OK] button.

Select the copy
source tool.
2 Display the extended functions menu for The copied tool window with the selected status
will be displayed in the copy source tool window.
the Tool settings.
Display Method of Extended Functions Menus Name of copied tool
(Page 4-70)
3 Tap the [Copy Tool] button.
Copied tool
The tool number which has not been set

The confirmation dialog appears. will be automatically assigned to the copy
destination tool number.
If 16 tools are set, tools cannot be copied.
5 Tap the [Edit Tool] button and set the copied
tool.
3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment

MEMO

(Setting Details of Outputting to Output Line)
Set the output items to be assigned to the output (5) Extended functions display button
line. Displays the extended functions menu for the
Connecting the Ultra Compact Vision Sensor Output Assignment.
(IV-G series) (Page 2-17) Display Method of Extended Functions
Connecting the Vision Sensor (IVseries) Menus (Page 4-70)
(Page 2-22)
Chapter 7 Controlling with Input/Output Line Setting range of the Output
(Page 7-1) Assignment
4
Main screen for the Output Setting
Description
Assignment range
Do not output.
OFF
zz
When the IV-G series is used Output function will be constantly OFF.
(1) When the total status result of the
tools which have been set was OK,
the output function turns ON.
Total Status
(2)
The condition of the total status can
be selected from [All Tools OK] /
[Any Tool OK] / [Logic 1] to [Logic 4].
(3) Tot. When the total status result was

StatusNG NG, the output function turns ON.
(4)
When the sensor is running with no
(5) RUN system error occurred, the output
function turns ON.
zz
When the IV series is used
The output function turns ON when
(1)
the system is in a state that cannot
input additional trigger; such as
BUSY
during imaging, judging processing,
(2) switching programs, and registering
external master images.
The output function turns ON
(3) when an error has occurred; such
(4) as system error, memory readout
Error
error for startup, external master
(5) registration error, trigger error (when
the trigger settings are enabled).
(1) [Back] button
Returns to the Tool settings screen. When position adjustment processing
Pos. Adj. is finished normally, the output function
3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment turns ON.
When the status result of specified
(2) Output assignment button tool is OK, the output function turns
Tool 01 to 16
Assigns the output item to each output line. ON. Status results can be output for
each tool.
(3) [ON]/[OFF] button for the trigger error output
When the status result of specified logic
Select whether to enable/disable the output Logic 1 to 4
is OK, the output function turns ON.
when the trigger error occurred.
Error Messages (Page A-23)
(4) [Complete] button
Finishes the Settings Navigator.

Output Assignment Extended functions
Default value Setting the Output Assignment

OUT1 :Total Status (N.O.)
OUT2
OUT3
:BUSY (N.O.)
:Error (N.C.) 1 Start the Settings Navigator.
OUT4 :OFF Starting the Settings Navigator (Page 4-3)
OUT5* :OFF
OUT6* :OFF 2 Display the main screen for the Output
OUT7* :OFF Assignment.
OUT8* :OFF
Trigger Error : Off
(Page 4-4)
4
* When the IV-G Series sensor is used.

3 Tap the item name of output line to perform
yyN.O./N.C. can be changed. output assignment and select the output item.
yyThe input cable assignment can be changed.
4 Finish the Settings Navigator.


Extended functions for the Output Assignment
Extended functions items for the Output Assignment
Default
value
yyUnused
4 The selected items are not used in
a logical formula.
Assigns the logical operation yyUsed
results of each detection tool to When the status results of the

Logic Settings the output function. selected items were OK, the total Unused
Up to 4 items, Logic 1 to 4, can status output function turns ON.
be defined. yyUsed (Inverse)
When the status results of the
selected items were NG, the total
status output function turns ON.
yyAND
Calculates the logical multiply
Selects the logical operation (AND) of all selected items.
Logic AND
method of logics. yyOR
Calculates the logical sum (OR) of
all selected items.
yyAll Tools OK
When all of the status results of the
detection tools was OK, the total
status output function turns ON.
Selects a condition for the total yyAny Tools OK
Total Status status result. The total status When any of the status results of
All Tools OK
Conditions result is displayed in accordance the detection tools was OK, the total
with the selected condition. status output function turns ON.
yyLogic 1 to 4
When the status result of the set
logic was OK, the total status
output function turns ON.

Logic Settings 5 Select items to be integrated into the logic.

1 Display the extended functions menu for
the Output Assignment.
Menus (Page 4-70)
2 Tap the [Logic Settings] button.

4

Red checks are displayed at the items which
"Used" is selected.
Blue checks are displayed at the items which
"Used (Inverst)" is selected.
The Logic Settings screen opens.
The status result of the logic is calculated from
3 Tap the number which the logic judgement OK/NG of all of the items which [Used] or [Used
(Inverse)] has been set.
condition is to be defined.
zz
Logic : AND
Tool A
Tool B Logic 1 to 4
Tool C
(Inverse)
Image of logic output when the Logic

is [AND]
Tool A Tool B Tool C Logic

When an undefined detection tool has been
defined to a logic, [An undefined tool is selected.] OK OK OK NG
is displayed on the right side of the logic number. NG OK OK NG
OK NG OK NG
4 Select the logical operation method of the logic. NG NG OK NG
OK OK NG OK
NG OK NG NG
OK NG NG NG
NG NG NG NG
yyWhen [AND] has been selected, the logic

output is the logical multiply (AND) of the
status results of each selected item.
yyWhen [OR] has been selected, the logic
output is the logical sum (OR) of the status
results of each selected item.

zz
Logic : OR 6 When the setting is completed, tap the
[OK] button.
Tool A
The system returns to the Logic Settings screen.
Tool B Logic 1 to 4
Tool C
(Inverse)
7 Tap the [Close] button.
Image of logic output when the Logic Outline tool settings.
is [OR]
4 Tool A Tool B Tool C Logic

OK OK OK OK
NG OK OK OK
OK NG OK OK
NG NG OK NG
OK OK NG OK
NG OK NG OK
OK NG NG OK
NG NG NG OK
yySelect either [Unused]/[Used]/[Used

(Inverse)] for each item (Position Adjustment/
Tool 01 to Tool 16/Logic 1 to Logic 4).
yyWhen the status results of the [Used] items
were OK, the status output function for items
in the logic turns ON.
yyWhen the status results of the [Used
(Inverse)] items were NG, the status output
function for items in the logic turns ON.
yyTo define a logic which has been set to
another logic, use the logic number which
is greater than the logic number which has
been set.
For example, use either of Logic 2 to Logic 4
in case of defining Logic 1 to another logic.
When the program number has been changed

and you went to [Run] from [Program] after
the power ON, the judgement is not done if no
trigger input. The judgement output of each
tool is OFF.

Total Status Conditions zz

Any Tools OK
When any of the detection tools was OK, the
1 Display the extended functions menu for total status output function turns ON.
the Output Assignment. OK
Display Method of Extended Functions Tool A
NG
Menus (Page 4-70)
OK
Tool B
2 Tap the [Total Status Conditions] button. NG
Total OK
Status NG
4

Image of total status output when the total
status condition is [Any Tools OK]
For [Any Tools OK], the status result of the

position adjustment is not included in the total
status conditions.
3 Select a total status condition.
zz
Logic 1 to 4
When the status result of the defined logic was
OK, the total status output function turns ON.
Logic OK
1 to 4 NG
Total OK
Status NG
The total status result is displayed in Image of total status output when the total
accordance with the selected condition. status condition is [Logic 1 to 4]
zz
All Tools OK
When all of the detection tools were OK, the yyWhen the position adjustment failed, the
total status output function turns ON. status result of each tool is NG.
OK yyIf the Area tool window is protruded from
Tool A the imaging area when position adjustment
NG
succeeded, the tool cannot be judged and
OK
Tool B the status result is NG.
NG
Total OK
Status NG
4 When the setting is completed, tap the
[OK] button.
Image of total status output when the total The system returns to the main screen for the
status condition is [All Tools OK] Outline tool settings.

In each setting for Settings Navigator, the extended

functions menu will be displayed by tapping the < >
extended functions display button at the lower left on
the screen.
This section explains how to display the extended
functions menu using an example of the Image
Optimization screen.
For details of extended functions menu, refer to
4 details in each step.

2 Display the main screen for the Image

Optimization.
(Page 4-4)
3 Tap the < > extended functions display

button at the lower left of the window.
The extended functions menu will be displayed.
Tap the arbitrary button and set the extended

functions menu.
The extended functions menu will be hidden

by tapping the < > button.

5
This chapter explains the procedures for starting
the operation, the names and functions of each part
Operating/Adjusting and the adjustment procedures to fully utilize the
judgment ability of the IV/IV-G Series.
Starting an Operation.........................................5-2
Overview of the Operation Screen....................5-3
Names and Functions of the 5
Operation Screen...............................................5-4
Operating/Adjusting
Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment...............5-15
Tool Auto Tuning
(Automatically Adjusting the Judgment
Condition)..........................................................5-16
Stabilizing the Judgment Process..................5-32
Shortening the Processing Time....................5-40

Starts an operation in accordance with the program created with the Settings Navigator.
The sensor can be independently operated.
Turning on the power and starting Exiting the sensor settings and
an operation starting an operation
1 Turn on the power of the sensor and monitor. 1 Exit the settings of the sensor, such as
Settings Navigator.
2 Confirm that the operation screen opens. Finishing the Settings Navigator (Page 4-5)
5 The Sensor Setup Menu screen opens.
2 Tap the [RUN] button.

Operating/Adjusting
If the image or status result does not update,

refer to Troubleshooting (Page A-20).
The run screen opens and the operation starts.
When the power of the monitor is turned on for If the image or status result does not update,
the first time, the initial settings screen opens. refer to Troubleshooting (Page A-20).
(Page 3-5)

Overview of the Operation Screen
Overview of the Operation Screen
Start screen
Menu OFF (Page 5-4)
Menu ON (Page 5-4)

5
Zoom/Full-screen mode
Operating/Adjusting
(Page 5-6)
Hides the title and menu button, and displays
the entire image.
Changes the display magnification of an
image.
Display setting screen

Selects the [Tool View] and [Analysis] menu,
and set the information to display on the
monitor.
Statistics display screen Histogram display screen Selecting the display

(Page 5-10) (Page 5-12) method of the tool.
(Page 5-7)
Displays the statistical Displays the histogram of the
information of the status result. status result.

Names and Functions of the Operation Screen
In the operation screen, the displayed items will be different depending on the ON/OFF of the menus.
Menu Screen
zz
Menu OFF zz
Menu ON
(8) (9) (8) (9)
(1) (1)
(2) (2)
(10) (10)
(11) (11)
(3) (3)
(12)
(4) (4) (13)

5 (5) (5)
(14)
(19)
Operating/Adjusting
(7) (20)
(21)
(6)
(15) (16) (17) (18)
(1) Title (7) [OFF] button

Displays the device name (Page 6-37), program Switches to the display in Menu OFF mode.
number (Page 6-7), and program name of the
(8) Status gauge
sensor (Page 6-19).
Displays status results (OK/NG) of the tool
(2) Tool Name selected on the monitor, a line indicating the
Displays the tool number and tool name of the threshold, and a value of the matching rate.
tool selected on the monitor (Page 4-34). When the status gauge is tapped, the operation
The selected tool can also be switched. turns to Threshold Adjustment mode (Page 5-15).
(3) Brightness correction region Judge is OK (green) Judge is NG (red)
When the brightness correction is being set, the
brightness correction region will be displayed
with a blue frame.
(4) Tool window Threshold Matching rate
Displays the tool region which has been set with
green frame when the status result is OK, and
For details of the status results, refer to
displays with red frame when the status result is
Displaying and outputting the status result
NG.
(Page A-4).
The tool selected by tapping the region can also
be switched.
(9) OK/NG display
Displays the total status result.
(5) Search region The total status conditions can be selected
If the search region of the selected tool is being from [All Tools OK]/[Any Tool OK]/[Logic 1] to
set to partial, the search region will be displayed
[Logic4].
with a light blue frame. If the position adjustment
is being set, the search region after the position yyIf the total status result is OK, OK will be
adjustment will be displayed. displayed.
yyIf the total status result is NG, NG will be
(6) [Menu] button displayed.
Switches to the display in Menu ON mode. yyWhen [NG Hold Function] is set to [ON] and
When the touch panel is locked, the will total status result is NG, is displayed and
be displayed. the screen is held.
Touch Screen Lock (Page 6-60)

(10) Processing time (19) [NG] button

Displays the time from receiving an external When the function of List of NG Sensor
trigger or an internal trigger to output the status Occurrences is used and the sensor is
result. In the case of the One-Shot output (Page registered on the list, the [NG] button will be
6-35), the ON-Delay Time is not included.
displayed.
(11) Condition Display The number of NG occurrences on the sensor
Displays the Condition of the monitor. registered is displayed.
......... Indicates Running.
......... Indicates Test mode. The status (20) [HOLD CLR] button
result will not be output. If the screen is held after detecting an NG when
(12) [Trig] button the NG Hold Function activated, this button
If [External] is selected for [Trigger Options] or releases the held screen. 5
[Internal Trigger Control with IN1 Input] is set to (21) [Chnge Connected Snsr] button
Operating/Adjusting
[Yes], the [Trig] button will be displayed. A trigger is
When [Direct Connection (2 units or more)] or
issued by each tap on a button. This button is used
when the external trigger cannot be input. [Network Connection] is selected, the [Chnge
The button can be set to be displayed or hidden. Connected Snsr] button will be displayed.
Display Settings (Page 6-59) Detects the connected sensor and changes the
(13) [Zoom] button sensor to connect to.
Switches the display in full-screen mode and makes
it possible to enlarge the images on the monitor.
Switching the display to the full-screen mode When [OFF] is selected in the display method of
(Page 5-6) the tool (Page 5-7), the tool name, search region,
tool window, and status gauge will be hidden.
(14) [View] button
Displays the menu to select display methods for
the tools and analysis screen.
Selecting a display method for tools
(Page 5-7)
(15) [Monitor Settings] button
Displays the Monitor Settings screen.
(Page 6-54)
(16) [Sensor Image History] button
Displays the Sensor Image History screen.
Sensor Image History (Confirming the Images
(17) [USB Memory] button
Displays the USB Memory screen.
Saving the Sensor Settings and Images to
a USB Memory (Page 6-25)
(18) [Sensor Setup] button
Stops the running mode to display the Sensor
Setup Menu screen.
If the password lock has been set to the sensor,
will be displayed.
Displaying the Sensor Setup Menu Screen
(Page 6-7)
Password Lock (Page 6-38)
Switching the display to the full- Enlarging the image display

screen mode In the full-screen mode, the display magnification of
When the [Zoom] button displayed in the Menu ON images can be changed.
screen is tapped, the title and menus displayed on
the monitor become hidden and the display will be 1 Switch the display to the full-screen mode.
switched to the full-screen mode. Switching the display to the full-screen
mode (Page 5-6)
1 Tap the [Zoom] button. 2 Change the magnification ratio to the desired
ratio by tapping the or button.
5 If the [Zoom] button is not displayed, tap the [Menu]
button at the lower left corner of the screen.
Operating/Adjusting
Move button
yyThe selectable ratios are 1.0x/1.5x/2.0x/3.0x.

Switches to the full-screen mode. yyThe display is enlarged each time you tap on
the [+] button.
yyThe display is reduced each time you tap on
the [-] button.
yyIn the enlarged display, the enlarged area
currently displayed is indicated at the left of
the [Back] button.
Enlarged area currently
displayed
Entire image
yyIf the [Back] button is tapped while the
image is enlarged, the screen returns to the
Menu ON screen maintaining the current
magnification ratio.
3 Adjust the display position of the enlarged

image as needed.
yyYou can change the display position of the

enlarged image by tapping the move button or
swiping the image on the monitor.
yyIf you tap the [+] or [-] button after changing
the display position, the image will be
enlarged/reduced with reference to the
center of the image displayed on the monitor.
4 After the setting is completed, tap the

[Back] button.

Selecting the tool whose Selecting a display method for tools

information to be displayed When the [View] button is tapped on the Menu ON
There are two methods for selecting the tool, whose screen, the menus of [Tool View] and [Analysis] are
information you wish to display; (1) selecting the tool displayed.
from the pull-down menu and (2) tapping the tool
window on the monitor If one of the display methods for [Tool View] is selected
and the [OK] button is tapped, the display on the
Selecting the tool from the pull-down menu

monitor changes in accordance with the selected
1 Select the tool whose information you display method.
wish to display from the pull-down menu
by tapping the tool name.
1 Tap the [View] button.
5
Select the tool If the [View] button is not displayed, tap the [Menu]
Operating/Adjusting
button at the lower left corner of the monitor.
Information of the selected tool will be displayed.
Information of
the selected tool The menus of [Tool View] and [Analysis] are
displayed.
Selected tool 2 Tap the display method for [Tool View] in

accordance with the intended purpose.
Selecting the tool by tapping it on the monitor

1 Tap the tool window of the tool whose
information you wish to display.
Selected tool
For details of the display methods for [Tool View],

refer to Display methods for tools (Page 5-8).
Tap the tool
Information of the tapped tool will be displayed.

button.
The display method for tools changes in
accordance with the selected menu.
Information of
the tapped tool
tapped tool

Display methods for tools zz

Process 1
Depending on the type of the sensor (color or

monochrome type), selectable display methods are
Outside the tool
different. window

For color type Inside the tool
window
zz
OFF
Compared to when the [Window] is selected, the
5 following are different. The rest are the same.

Selected tool
Operating/Adjusting
yyOutline tool
Displays inside the tool window in
monochrome, and outside of the tool window
in color. Indicates the recognized outline with
The tool windows and search regions of all tools a series of points in green (OK) or red (NG).
become hidden. The tool name and the status If the brightness correction has been set, the
gauge will also be hidden. inside the tool window is displayed with the
corrected brightness.
zz
Window
yyColor Area tool
Displays the extracted region in green (OK) or
red (NG).
zz
Process 2
Outside the
search region
Inside the
Selected tool search region
yyDisplays the frame of the tool window with a
thick line. If the mask region is set to the Color
Area tool, the region that the tool window and
mask region are combined will be displayed. Compared to when the [Process 1] is selected,
yyDisplays the frame of the search region in light the following are different. The rest are the same.
blue. Selected tool
Non selected tools yyOutline tool
yyDisplays the frame of the tool window with a Displays inside the tool window and search
thin line. region in monochrome, and outside of the
yyThe search region and the mask region will not search region in color.
be displayed. If the brightness correction has been set,
Common inside the search region is displayed with the
corrected brightness.
When the result of position adjustment and the
yyColor Area tool
status result of the tool are OK, the tool will be
Displays inside the tool window in
displayed in green. If one of the status results is
monochrome. The extracted region is
NG, the tool will be displayed in red.
displayed in the color of the target.
Displays the brightness correction window in blue.

For monochrome type zz

Process
zz
OFF
This is selectable for the Area tool and for the
The tool windows and search regions of all tools

Outline tool for which [Brightness Correction] has
not been set. 5
become hidden. The tool name and the status Compared to when the [Window] is selected, the
Operating/Adjusting
gauge will also be hidden. following are different. The rest are the same.
zz
Window Selected tool
yyOutline tool
Indicates the recognized outline with a series
of points in green (OK) or red (NG).
yyArea tool
Displays the extracted region in green (OK) or
red (NG).
If the brightness correction has been set, the
inside the tool window will be displayed with
the corrected brightness and outside the tool
Selected tool window will be displayed with the brightness
yyDisplays the frame of the tool window with a before correction.
thick line. If the mask region is set to the Area
tool, the region that the tool window and mask
zz
Process 1
region are combined will be displayed.
yyDisplays the frame of the search region in light
blue. Outside the tool
window
Non selected tools
Inside the tool
yyDisplays the frame of the tool window with a
window
thin line.
yyThe search region and the mask region will not
be displayed.
Common This is selectable for the Outline tool for which
When the result of position adjustment and the [Brightness Correction] has been set.
status result of the tool are OK, the tool will be Compared to when the [Window] is selected, the
displayed in green. If one of the status results is following are different. The rest are the same.
NG, the tool will be displayed in red. Selected tool
Displays the brightness correction window in blue. Indicates the recognized outline with a series of
points in green (OK) or red (NG).
Displays inside the tool window with the
corrected brightness and outside the tool
window with the brightness before correction.

zz
Process 2 Displaying the statistical
information
When the [View] button is tapped on the Menu ON
Outside the
search region
screen, the menus of [Tool View] and [Analysis] are
Inside the displayed.
search region If the [Statistics] button in the [Analysis] is selected,
the statistical information of judgment is displayed.
This is selectable for the Outline tool for which Displaying the statistical information
5 [Brightness Correction] has been set.
Compared to when the [Process 1] is selected,
the following are different. The rest are the same.
Operating/Adjusting
Selected tool
If the [View] button is not displayed, tap the [Menu]
Displays inside the search region with the button at the lower left corner of the monitor.
corrected brightness and outside the search
region with the brightness before correction.
The menus of [Tool View] and [Analysis] will be

displayed.
2 Tap the [Statistics] button.
The statistical information will be displayed.

Contents of the statistical information are as (7) OUT information

follows. Displays the latest status results of items which
(1) are assigned to an output line (Page 4-64).
(2)
(3)
yyThe upper limit of TrigNo is 999999. When
the number exceeds the upper limit, the
counter resets to 0 and starts counting
again.
yyThe upper limit of OK, NG, and TrigErrNo is
999999. The values display stops updating
when the upper limit is reached.
5
(4) (5) (6) (7)
yyThe statistical information is reset under the
(1) Title
following conditions.
Displays the name of the sensor (Page 6-37),
Operating/Adjusting
- When the [Reset] button is tapped
program number (Page 6-7), and program
- When the power of the sensor is turned OFF
name (Page 6-19).
- When the tool is added/deleted/copied
(2) Position adjustment status result - When the upper limit of the Color Area/
When the position adjustment is being set, the Area tool is enabled/disabled or when
position adjustment status result of the latest the setting scale is changed by the user
judgment process will be displayed. operation or Tool Auto Tuning
(3) Tool status result - When the Tool Auto Tuning is started if
Displays the status result of the latest judgment more than two tools other than the position
process for each tool set in the program. adjustment tool are being set
- When the program is switched
(4) [Reset] button - When each correction of the setup
Resets the statistical information and the histograms. adjustment is started
(5) Processing time information - When the sensor is initialized
Displays information related to the processing
time. 3 Tap the [OK] button.
yyTIME............ Displays the processing time of The system returns to the Menu ON screen.
the latest judgment process.
yyMAX............. Displays the maximum value of
the processing time.
yyMIN.............. Displays the minimum value of
yyAVE.............. Displays the average value of
(6) Trigger count information
Displays the information related to the number
of triggers.
yyTrigNo.......... Displays the total number of
triggers issued. This number
does not include the number of
trigger errors.
yyOK................ Displays the number of triggers
issued with the total status OK.
yyNG................ Displays the number of triggers
issued with the total status NG.
yyTrigErrNo...... Displays the number of triggers
issued as error triggers.

Hiding the statistical information Displaying the histogram

When the [View] button is tapped on the Menu ON
1 Tap the [View] button. screen, the menus of [Tool View] and [Analysis] are
displayed.
If the [View] button is not displayed, tap the If the [Histogram] button in the [Analysis] is
[Menu] button at the lower left corner of the selected, the matching rate of the selected tool is
monitor. displayed as a histogram.
displayed. Displaying the histogram
5 2 Tap the [OFF] button in the [Analysis]. 1 Tap the [View] button.
Operating/Adjusting
If the [View] button is not displayed, tap the

[Menu] button at the lower left corner of the
monitor.
The statistical information becomes hidden.

displayed.
2 Tap the [Histogram] button.

The system returns to the Menu ON screen.
The histogram appears.

Contents of the histogram are as follows. (7) Threshold

(1) Displays the threshold for the selected tool.
(6)
(2) (8) Histogram
(3) (7)
Displays the histogram (frequency distribution)
(8) for the selected tool.
(4) The range for OK is displayed in green and for
NG is displayed in red, having the threshold as
(5) the boundary.
yyAbscissa axis....Displays the distribution of the
(1) Title
matching rate. The display of
Displays the name of the sensor (Page 6-37),
program number (Page 6-7), and program the range is fixed and cannot 5
name (Page 6-19). be specified arbitrary.
Operating/Adjusting
yyVertical axis.......Adjusts automatically in
(2) Tool Name
accordance with the maximum
Displays the name of the tool whose histogram
is been shown. Tap the tool name to select the value of the frequency. It
tool whose histogram is you wish to display. cannot be specified arbitrary.
(3) Matching rate information yy .....................Displays the matching rate of
Displays the information related to the matching the latest judgment process.
rate.
yyMatch..........Displays the matching rate of the yyThe upper limit of the judgment processing
latest judgment process. count display for the judgment record is
yyMAX............Displays the maximum value of 999999. The values display stop updating
the matching rate. when the upper limit is reached.
yyMIN.............Displays the minimum value of yyThe upper limit of the histogram is 999999.
the matching rate. The values display stop updating when the
yyAVE.............Displays the average value of the upper limit is reached.
matching rate.
yyThe histogram and judgement records are
(4) Judgment Record reset under the following conditions.
Displays the judgment process counts for OK or NG. - When the [Reset] button is tapped
yyOK...............Displays the process count for "OK". - When the power of the sensor is turned OFF
yyNG...............Displays the process count for "NG". - When the tool is added/deleted/copied
- When the upper limit of the Color Area/
Area tool is enabled/disabled or when
If the judgment threshold is changed, the
the setting scale is changed by the user
histogram is updated according to the result
operation or Tool Auto Tuning
judged based on the changed threshold.
- When the Tool Auto Tuning is started if
However, the judgment record retains the
more than two tools other than the position
counts judged based on the previous threshold.
adjustment tool are being set
Therefore, the judgment conditions on the
- When the program is switched
histogram may be different from the displayed
- When each correction of the setup
judgment record counts.
adjustment is started
(5) [Reset] button - When the sensor is initialized
Resets the statistical information and the histograms.
(6) Tool status result
Displays the status results for the selected tool
as OK, NG, or -- (Pos.Adj. fails).

Hiding the histogram

If the [View] button is not displayed, tap the
[Menu] button at the lower left corner of the
monitor.
displayed.
5 2 Tap the [OFF] button in the [Analysis].

Operating/Adjusting
The histogram becomes hidden.


Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment
Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment
The method for manually adjusting the threshold 5 Adjust the threshold by checking the
while in the Test mode. matching rate.
<Setting example>
The threshold adjustment can be started by the If the matching rate of the high-quality-target is
[Limit Adjustment] button in the tool settings of the higher than 90 and if the matching rate of the low-
Settings Navigator. quality-target is lower than 40, set the threshold to
65 of the value intermediate between 40 and 90.
1 Display the Sensor Setup Menu screen.

(Page 6-7)
2 Tap the [Limit Adjustment] button. 5
Operating/Adjusting

rate is greater than the threshold, and
detected as NG if the matching rate is lower
than the threshold.
yyIn accordance with the status result of the
The [Limit Adjustment] button is available only when tool, the display color of the tool changes.
the program that the tool has been set is selected. Selecting a display method for tools (Page 5-7)
yyThe threshold can be changed by using the
3 If multiple tools are set in the program, select slider or inputting values.
the tool to adjust the threshold from the pull-
yyA target is judged by the new threshold from
down menu and tap the [OK] button. the judgment process of the trigger output
after the threshold is changed.
yyThe threshold can be adjusted by checking
Select the tool
the histogram result.
Displaying the histogram (Page 5-12)
The displayed contents are as follows.
- The histogram before threshold adjustment
is displayed.
- The status results during threshold
adjustment are not added to the frequency
distribution of the histogram.
The sensor turns to the Test mode. - The counts for OK and NG are not displayed.
- The reset button is not displayed.
4 Image a high or low-quality-target to be
the reference of judgment.
6 After the adjustment is completed, tap the
If [External] is selected for [Trigger Options] or [OK] button.
[Internal Trigger Control with IN1 Input] is set to The system returns to the Sensor Setup Menu screen.
If an external trigger cannot be input, tap the If a program is set with more than one tool, a
button (Page 4-7) to image the target confirmation dialog for whether or not to adjust
by inputting an internal trigger temporarily. threshold for other tools is displayed.
To adjust threshold for other tools, tap the [Yes]
Imaging by inputting an internal trigger finishes
button and repeat steps 3 to 6.
by the button.
Tool Auto Tuning (Automatically Adjusting the Judgment Condition)
Tool Auto Tuning

(Automatically Adjusting the Judgment Condition)
The Tool Auto Tuning is a function to automatically
Using the image history saved in the
adjust the judgment condition for the detection tool sensor
and the judgment threshold for each tool by using This is the method to register the image as an OK
multiple high-quality-targets (OK images) and low- or an NG image to perform tuning while checking
quality-targets (NG images). the images read from the Sensor Image History.
There are three methods to register the image to Sensor Image History (Confirming the Images
be used for Tool Auto Tuning. whose Status Result is NG) (Page 6-21)

Using the images taken in the Test
mode
5 This is the method to register the image as an
OK or an NG image to perform tuning while
preparing the multiple high and low-quality-
Operating/Adjusting
target and checking the results of the test

operation.
Perform tuning by reading the

images judged as OK or NG
from the Sensor Image History

Using the image files saved in the
USB memory
This is the method to register the image as
an OK or an NG image to perform tuning
while checking the images read from the USB
memory. Batch backup files (*.iva) and image
capture files (*.ivp) can be used.
Backing up in a batch (Page 6-26)
Capturing the screen (Page 6-30)
OK
NG
OK
USB
OK Perform tuning by memory
imaging targets which
NG
are judged as OK or NG Batch backup file (*.iva)
Image capture file (*.ivp)
Perform tuning by reading the images judged as OK

or NG from the USB memory

Operation flow for the Tool Auto Starting and finishing the Tool Auto
Tuning Tuning
Start Displays the main screen for Tool Auto Tuning from
the Sensor Setup Menu screen.
yyThe position adjustment tool is not a target for

Select Tool Auto Tuning.
the tool yyThe Color Area/Area tools with the [Fixed
Reference Area] set as [Enable] are excluded
from a Tool Auto Tuning target.
5
Select a starting
Operating/Adjusting
method
(Page 6-7)
2 Tap the [Tool Auto Tuning] button.

Image a target
Low-quality
Judgment of an
image?
High-quality
When the Tool Auto Tuning Guide screen
opens, tap the [Start] button.
AutoTune as AutoTune as
OK NG 3 If multiple tools are set in the program,
select the target tool for Tool Auto Tuning
from the pull-down menu, and tap the [OK]
button.
Automatically adjust the judgment

condition and threshold Select the tool
Yes
Add image?*
The Start Up Menu screen for Tool Auto Tuning

No
opens.
Finish
* There are three methods to prepare images.

* Up to 24 images can be used for tuning.

4 Select a starting method of Tool Auto Tuning. zz

Use the registered information file
Select this method in the following cases.
yyWhen performing Tool Auto Tuning after
additionally adding a new image to the
registration information (images and criteria
information) saved in the USB memory
yyWhen performing Tool Auto Tuning using the
registration information (images and criteria
information) saved in the USB memory after
zz
Register from the beginning readjusting the tool settings
5 Select this method in the following cases. Tool Auto Tuning by the registration
yyWhen performing Tool Auto Tuning for the first information file (Page 5-29)
time.
Operating/Adjusting
yyWhen redoing the image registration from the

beginning.
5 Select the registration source of the image
to be registered to the Tool Auto Tuning
If the [Register from the beginning] is tapped,
the registration menu screen of Tool Auto and register the image.
Tuning opens. Proceed to step 5.
If the previous registration information has been

saved in the monitor, a confirmation dialog
asking whether or not to discard the previous
registration information appears.
zz
For registration of an image taken during
the Test mode
Registering the images taken in the Test
mode (Page 5-19)
zz
For registration of an image history saved
yyTap the [OK] button if you wish to discard the in the sensor
previous registration information and perform Registering the images from the image
Tool Auto Tuning. history saved in the sensor (Page 5-21)
yyBy tapping the [Saving to the USB memory]
button, the result of Tool Auto Tuning can be
zz
For registration of an image file saved in
USB memory
saved in the USB memory as a registration
information and can be reused. Registering the images from the file saved
in the USB memory (Page 5-23)
zz
Use the previous registered image
Select this method in the following cases.
yyWhen performing Tool Auto Tuning after
additionally adding a new image to the OK/NG
image registered in the previous Tool Auto Tuning
yyWhen readjusting the tool settings after Tool
Auto Tuning and then repeating the Tool Auto
Tuning by the registered image.
Tool Auto Tuning by the previous registration
information (Page 5-27)

6 After the registration is completed, tap the Registering the OK/NG images to
[Save] button. be used for the Tool Auto Tuning
Registering the images taken in the

Test mode
Registers the image as an OK or an NG image to
perform tuning while preparing the multiple high and
low-quality-target and checking the images imaged.

1 Display the main screen for Tool Auto Tuning. 5
Starting and finishing the Tool Auto Tuning
(Page 5-17)
Operating/Adjusting
2 Tap the [Take a picture] button.
Adjusted results will be reflected and the

information dialog appears.
8 Tap the [OK] button. 3 Image a high-quality-target to be the

criteria for the OK status or a low-quality-
target to be the criteria for NG status.
inputting an internal trigger temporarily. Imaging
by inputting an internal trigger finishes by the
button.
By tapping the [Saving to the USB memory]
4 Check the displayed image and tap the
[AutoTune as OK] or [AutoTune as NG] button.
information file and can be reused. zz
For Outline tool
The system returns to the Sensor setup menu

screen.
The auto tuning will be performed and the OK

or NG image will be displayed.

zz
For Color Area tool (color type) zz
For Area tool (monochrome type)
If the [AutoTune as OK] is tapped, the If the [AutoTune as OK] is tapped, the
5 information screen opens.

By tapping the [OK] button, the setup screen for
information screen opens.
the color extraction area opens.
Operating/Adjusting
the brightness extraction area opens.

If the extraction area is inappropriate, tap the If the extraction area is inappropriate, tap the
color to be the reference of judgment, or tap the brightness to be the reference of judgment,
[+]/[-] button and expand/reduce the color area or operate the slider and expand/reduce the
to be extracted. brightness area to be extracted.
yyBy tapping the [Undo] button, the previous

operation can be cancelled.
yyTo change the color of extraction target, tap
yyTo change the brightness of extraction target,
the [Clear] button and tap the color to be the
tap the [Clear] button and tap the brightness
reference of judgment again.
to be the reference of judgment again.
After the setting is completed, tap the [Register] yyFor details of settings by using the slider,
button. refer to Editing the value with the slider
The auto tuning will be performed and the OK (Page 3-17).
or NG image will be displayed. After the setting is completed, tap the [Register]
button.

5 Check the changes in settings after the Registering the images from the image
auto tuning is performed, and tap the [OK]
history saved in the sensor
button.
perform tuning while checking the images loaded
from the Sensor Image History.
1 Display the main screen for Tool Auto

Changed Tuning.
settings Starting and finishing the Tool Auto Tuning
(Page 5-17)
If the auto tuning has failed, follow the message 2 Tap the [Sensor Image History] button. 5
to change the tool settings or the image to be
Operating/Adjusting
registered.
The type of an image to be registered will be

displayed on the upper right on the screen.
yy : Registers as an OK image.
yy : Registers as an NG image.
The confirmation dialog to continuously register The Sensor Image history screen opens.
another image appears.
3 Tap the image history to be the OK or NG
6 Tap the [Yes] button and repeat steps 3 to 5. image and tap the [Zoom] button.
Select the
image
yyRegistering one or more OK images and NG The selected image will be enlarged.
images is recommended.
yyUp to 24 images can be registered.
4 Check the displayed image and tap the
[AutoTune as OK] or [AutoTune as NG]
button.
7 After the registration is completed, tap the
[No] button on the confirmation dialog.
The system returns to the main screen for Tool yyBy tapping [<]/[>] button, you can check the
Auto Tuning. other images in enlarged display.
yyThe status result displayed on the screen is
the status result by the settings at the time
(Page 5-17)
of saving the image. If the tool settings are
changed after the image is saved, only the
frame of the tool window will be displayed
regardless of selection of the tool display
method (Page 5-7). The processing status
will not be displayed.

zz
For Outline tool zz
For Area tool (monochrome type)
The auto tuning will be performed and the OK If the [AutoTune as OK] is tapped, the
5 or NG image will be displayed. information screen opens.

zz
For Color Area tool (color type) the brightness extraction area opens.
Operating/Adjusting
If the extraction area is inappropriate, tap the

brightness to be the reference of judgment,
or operate the slider and expand/reduce the
brightness area to be extracted.
If the [AutoTune as OK] is tapped, the

If the extraction area is inappropriate, tap the
color to be the reference of judgment, or tap the yyBy tapping the [Undo] button, the previous
[+]/[-] button for extraction area and expand/
reduce the color area to be extracted.
yyTo change the brightness of extraction target,
tap the [Clear] button and tap the brightness
to be the reference of judgment again.
yyFor details of settings by using the slider,
refer to Editing the value with the slider
(Page 3-17).
After the setting is completed, tap the [Register]
button.
button.

5 Check the changes in settings after the Registering the images from the file
saved in the USB memory
button.
perform tuning while checking the images loaded
from the USB memory.
1 Connect the USB memory on which the

Changed batch backup files (*.iva) and image
settings
capture files (*.ivp) are saved, to the USB
connector of the monitor.
If the auto tuning has failed, follow the message Installing the USB memory (Page 6-25) 5
2 Display the main screen for Tool Auto
Operating/Adjusting
registered. Tuning.
The type of an image to be registered will be (Page 5-17)
displayed on the upper right on the screen.
yy : Registers as an OK image. 3 Tap the [USB Memory Image] button.
The confirmation dialog to continuously register

6 Tap the [Yes] button and repeat steps 3 to 5.

yyRegistering one or more OK images and NG
images is recommended.
yyUp to 24 images can be registered. The USB Memory Image screen opens.
7 After the registration is completed, tap the 4 Select a batch backup file (*.iva) or image
[No] button on the confirmation dialog. capture file (*.ivp) and tap the [OK] button.
The system returns to the main screen for Tool
Auto Tuning.
(Page 5-17)
Select a file to be
loaded
File formats other than *.iva or *.ivp cannot

be loaded.
For details of selecting files in the USB


5 When the batch backup file (*.iva) is zz

For Color Area tool (color type)
selected, tap the image history to be the
OK or NG image and tap the [Zoom] button.
Select the
image

5 The selected image will be enlarged.
Operating/Adjusting

6 Check the displayed image and tap the If the extraction area is inappropriate, tap the
[AutoTune as OK] or [AutoTune as NG]
color to be the reference of judgment, or tap the
button.
[+]/[-] button for extraction area and expand/
reduce the color area to be extracted.
yyWhen a batch backup file (*.iva) has been
selected, you can check the other images in
enlarged display by tapping the [<]/[>] button.
yyThe status result displayed on the screen
for the batch backup file (*.iva) is the status
result by the settings at the time of saving
the image.
yyFor the image capture file (*.ivp), only the
image will be displayed.
zz
For Outline tool
button.

zz
For Area tool (monochrome type) 7 Check the changes in settings after the
button.
Changed
settings
By tapping the [OK] button, the setup screen for If the auto tuning has failed, follow the message
5
Operating/Adjusting
the brightness extraction area opens.
If the extraction area is inappropriate, tap the registered.
brightness to be the reference of judgment,
or operate the slider and expand/reduce the The type of an image to be registered will be
brightness area to be extracted. displayed on the upper right on the screen.
yy : Registers as an OK image.
The confirmation dialog to continuously register

8 Tap the [Yes] button and register the

images repeatedly.
yyIf the batch backup file (*.iva) is selected,
repeat steps 5 to 7.
operation can be cancelled. yyIf the image capture file (*.ivp) is selected,
yyTo change the brightness of extraction target, repeat steps 4 to 7.
tap the [Clear] button and tap the brightness yyRegistering one or more OK images and NG
to be the reference of judgment again. images is recommended.
yyFor details of settings by using the slider, yyUp to 24 images can be registered.
refer to Editing the value with the slider
(Page 3-17). 9 After the registration is completed, tap the
After the setting is completed, tap the [Register] [No] button on the confirmation dialog.
button. The system returns to the main screen for Tool
The auto tuning will be performed and the OK Auto Tuning.
or NG image will be displayed. Starting and finishing the Tool Auto Tuning
(Page 5-17)

Confirming or deleting the images

registered for the Tool Auto Tuning
Confirm or delete the OK/NG images registered for
the Tool Auto Tuning.
1 Display the main screen for the Tool Auto

Tuning.
(Page 5-17)
5 2 Tap the [Confirmation of Registered Image]

button.
Operating/Adjusting
3 Confirm or delete the OK/NG image.
yy[First].................Displays the first image.

yy[<]......................Displays the previous image.
yy[>]......................Displays the next image.
yy[Last].................Displays the last image.
yy[Delete]..............Deletes the displayed image.
The setting is re-adjusts by
using the remaining images.

[Close] button.
Tool Auto Tuning.

Tool Auto Tuning by the previous 1 Display the Sensor Setup Menu screen.
registration information Displaying the Sensor Setup Menu Screen (Page 6-7)
When the information of Tool Auto Tuning 2 Tap the [Tool Auto Tuning] button.
performed before turning off power of the monitor
or before disconnecting with the sensor (previous
registration information) is used, the Tool Auto
Tuning can be performed skipping the OK/NG
image registration process.
yyYou can additionally add a new image to the OK/
NG image registered with the previous Tool Auto
Tuning, and then perform Tool Auto Tuning.
5
yyYou can readjust the tool settings after Tool Auto When the Tool Auto Tuning Guide screen
Operating/Adjusting
Tuning, and then repeat Tool Auto Tuning by the opens, tap the [Start] button.
registered image.
3 If multiple tools are set in the program,
select the target tool for the Tool Auto
Tuning from the pull-down menu and tap
the [OK] button.
Select the tool
Previous registration information
OK OK NG OK
The Start Up Menu screen for the Tool Auto

OK NG OK Tuning opens.
Tuning based on the OK/NG images registered

in the previous Tool Auto Tuning
The previous registration information is saved in

the memory (RAM) inside the monitor, and remains
available until the power of the monitor is turned off
or the monitor is disconnected with the sensor.
When you repeatedly perform Tool Auto Tuning using

the same previous registration information, settings
might be changed each time being performed.
This phenomenon occurs since Tool Auto Tuning
consistently performs adjustment based on the latest
settings (settings changed immediately before).

4 Tap the [Use the previous registered image] 7 After the registration is completed, tap the
button. [Save] button.
5 Re-adjustment is performed by using the

previous registration information.

Operating/Adjusting
The information dialog appears.

The adjustment result is reflected and the
5 Check the changes made by information dialog appears.
the re-adjustment and tap the [OK] button.
Changed
settings
The registration menu screen for the Tool Auto

Tuning opens.
6 To add images, register the OK/NG images. button, the result of Tool Auto Tuning can be
Registering the OK/NG images to be used saved in the USB memory as a registration
for the Tool Auto Tuning (Page 5-19) information file and can be reused.
screen.

Tool Auto Tuning by the registration 1 Prepare the registration information file
information file (*.ivt).
A registration information file is saved at the
When the registration information file (*.ivt), which Tool Auto Tuning finish screen.
contains the Tool Auto Tuning images and criteria For the saving method, refer to the step 8 of
information saved at the end of the previous Tool Starting and finishing the Tool Auto Tuning
Auto Tuning is used, the Tool Auto Tuning can be (Page 5-17).
performed skipping the OK/NG image registration
process. 2 Display the Sensor Setup Menu screen.
yyYou can additionally add a new image to the OK/ Displaying the Sensor Setup Menu Screen
NG images registered with the previous Tool
Auto Tuning, and then perform Tool Auto Tuning.
(Page 6-7)
5
yyYou can readjust the tool settings after Tool Auto 3 Tap the [Tool Auto Tuning] button.
Operating/Adjusting
Tuning, and then repeat Tool Auto Tuning by the
registered image.
USB
memory When the Tool Auto Tuning Guide screen opens,
tap the [Start] button.
Registered information file (*.ivt)
4 If multiple tools are set in the program,
OK OK NG OK
select the target tool for the Tool Auto
Tuning from the pull-down menu and tap
the [OK] button.
OK NG OK
Select the tool

Tuning based on the OK/NG images in the
registration information file
This is the function for the monitor operation software

version R1.10 or later. For the versions older than
R1.10, update the software to the latest version.
The Start Up Menu screen for the Tool Auto
Tuning opens.
When you repeatedly perform Tool Auto Tuning
using the same registration information file, settings
might be changed each time being performed.
This phenomenon occurs since Tool Auto Tuning
consistently performs adjustment based on the latest
settings (settings changed immediately before).

5 Tap the [Use the registered information file] 7 Tap the [Go] button.
button.
Re-adjustment is performed by using the
5 The import screen for registration information

file appears.
registered information file.
6 Select the registered information file (*.ivt)

Operating/Adjusting
and tap the [OK] button.
Select the file to

be imported
The information dialog appears.
8 Check the changes made by the re-

adjustment and tap the [OK] button.
yyFiles with the formats other than ivt format

cannot be used.
yyIf the confirmation dialog appears, change
the registration file to be imported according Changed
to the message. settings
yyFor the monitor operation software version
R1.10, this file cannot be use. Update the
software to the latest version.
The registration menu screen for the Tool Auto

For details of selecting the files in the USB Tuning opens.
memory, refer to Selecting the file in the USB
memory (Page 3-20).
9 To add images, register the OK/NG images.
The confirmation screen opens. Registering the OK/NG images to be used
for the Tool Auto Tuning (Page 5-19)

10 After the registration is completed, tap the

[Save] button.

5
Operating/Adjusting
Adjusted results will be reflected and the
information dialog appears.

information and can be reused.
screen.

Stabilizing the Judgment Process
This section explains how to adjust the device Stabilizing the judgment process by
when the judgment process is not stable.
taking a clear image of the target
To stabilize the judgment process, it is necessary
to take a clear image of the target and adjust the Adjust the imaging conditions so that the sensor can
detection tool such that it functions in a stable manner. take images with which the detection tools can clearly
recognize differences between high and low-quality-
yyStabilize the judgment process by clearly imaging
target.
the target (Page 5-32)
- Adjust the installation distance to image the
Imaging the target widely
target widely
- Correct the distorted image due to the installation The judgment process stabilizes by taking a large
5 - Make the image bright enough image of the target onto the screen.
- Focus well

Adjusting the installed distance (WD)
Operating/Adjusting
- Make the image blur less

Install the sensor close to the target.
- Make the glossy or metal surface shine less
Install the sensor at the appropriate distance
- Adjust the color tint (for color type only)
from the target upon checking the field of view
- Make the image less influenced by the lighting
and the installed distance of the sensor.
condition
Checking the view and installed distance
yyStabilize by adjusting the position gap of the
(IV-G series) (Page 2-2)
target (Page 5-36)
yyStabilize the position adjustment (Page 5-37)
(IV series) (Page 2-3)
yyStabilize the Outline tool (Page 5-38)
yyStabilize the Color Area/Area tool (Page 5-39) : Adequate : Inadequate
If the judgment process is adjusted to make it

stabilize, the process time may become longer
depending on the function used. Adjust the
judgment process while confirming the balance
within the process time.

Using the digital zooming function
The target can be imaged larger using the digital
zooming function.
Digital Zoom (Page 4-22)

Correcting the distorted images due to Achieving adequate image brightness

the installation If the image is too dark, the judgment process for
If the sensor is not installed just in front of the target high and low-quality-targets becomes unstable due
due to the sensor installation restrictions and/or to to poor contrast. Also, if the image is too bright,
prevent a shine on the targets surface, the target the judgment process may become unstable.
image may become trapezoidally distorted. Brightness can be adjusted in Auto Brightness
The tilt correction corrects these images and Adjustment.
displays them without distortion. Auto Brightness Adjustment (Page 4-12)
Tilt Correction (Page 6-47)
Indicator light
If the brightness cannot be adjusted 5
in the Auto Brightness Adjustment
Operating/Adjusting
Finer brightness adjustments can be made in
Advanced Brightness Adjustment.
Top view Advanced Brightness Adjustment
Target (Page 4-21)
Target
Lateral view
zz
Bright
Setting a higher brightness value gives a longer
exposure time, resulting in a brighter screen.
Before tilt After tilt correction zz
Imaging Mode
correction (vertical)
When "HighGain" is selected in the imaging
mode, the brightness amplification factor
increases and the screen becomes brighter.

If the brightness cannot be adjusted
due to uneven brightness
Refer to Reducing the shininess of the
glossy or metal surface (Page 5-35).

Achieving good focus Reducing the image blur

Adjusting the focus is required to clearly image of If the image is blurred by imaging a moving
the target. For the auto focus type, focus can be target, the image blurring can be corrected by
adjusted easily in the Auto Focus Adjustment. For shortening the exposure time (shutter time). Adjust
the manual focus type, the focus can be adjusted the exposure time with the advanced brightness
while confirming the image and focus indicator. adjustment.
Focus Adjustment (Page 4-13) Advanced Brightness Adjustment (Page 4-21)

If good focus cannot be achieved by
5 the Auto Focus Adjustment Exposure time
The focusing position may not be adjusted
Operating/Adjusting
correctly if the image is too dark or too bright.

Adjust to the applicable brightness with Auto
Brightness Adjustment (Page 4-12) and then
perform the auto focus adjustment.
If the focus still cannot be adjusted with the auto zz
Bright
focus adjustment for the auto focus type, adjust When the value of brightness is reduced, the
the focus manually. exposure time becomes shorter resulting in a
When the focusing position is to be less blurry image.
adjusted manually (Page 4-14)
zz
Imaging Mode
Select [HighGain] in the imaging mode so that
the brightness gain becomes higher. The screen
becomes brighter so that the exposure time can
be shortened and the image blurring can be
reduced. The image noise may increase.
Also, the exposure time may be shortened if the
[HDR] is selected in the imaging mode.
Adjust the focus position by tapping the [+] or [-]
button. By unmounting the dome attachment or polarizing
filter attachment, image blurring can be lessened
as the exposure time can be shortened.

Reducing the shininess of the glossy

or metal surface Use the polarizing filter attachment. The optical
characteristics of the polarizing filter attachment
Glossy and/or metal surface may reflect the built-in
cut off the mirror reflection and reduce the shine
light into the camera. Since mirror reflection has a
on the targets surface.
high-light intensity, the amount of light received will
Using the polarizing filter attachment (OP-
be saturated and the surface will shine. This section
87899/OP-87900/OP-87901) or spread lens
explains how to reduce the shininess.
Using the Auto Brightness Adjustment Using the polarizing filter attachment (OP-
If the target shines, the HDR function is enabled 87436/OP-87437) (Page 2-12)
automatically and it can be reduced by using

Installing the sensor at an angle
5
the auto brightness adjustment.
Operating/Adjusting
The HDR (High Dynamic Range) function is The built-in lighting will not reflected back into
a function that prevents light saturation in the the camera, so the shine on the targets surface
shining area by imaging the target with a wider can be reduced.
dynamic range. The HDR function can also be This is effective for flat-surface targets.
adjusted manually. When the sensor is When the sensor is
Auto Brightness Adjustment (Page 4-12) installed in front of installed at an angle
the target from the target
Using the dome attachment

Use the dome attachment.
The dome attachment emits even diffused light
from the entire circumference to the target, so
that the contrast becomes less and the shine on
the targets surface is reduced.
This is effective for targets of all shapes.
IV-GD10) (Page 2-6)
Using the dome attachment (IV-D10) (Page 2-11)
The mirror reflection The mirror reflection

of the built-in light of the built-in light
reflects into the does not reflect into
camera and causes the camera so no
the surface to shine. surface shine occurs.
Dome attachment
If the image is distorted by tilting the sensor,
the image can be corrected by the tilt
Diffusion correction function.
light Tilt Correction (Page 6-47)
Target

Adjusting the color tint (for color type only) Stabilizing by correcting the misaligned
Adjust the white balance if the color tint of the color target position
type image is different from that of the target. If there is a variation (misalignment) in the positioning
White Balance (for color type only) (Page 6-50) of the target, the position to be judged is also declined
from the tool window and cannot be judged correctly.
The detection can be stabilized by using the
Reducing the effect of illumination position adjusting function.
variation Position Adjustment tool (Page 4-55)
If the detection is not stable due to the ambient
5 light from the surroundings where the sensor is
installed, the effect of the illumination variation can

Tool settings
Master image
Operating/Adjusting
be reduced by the brightness correction function.

If the detection cannot be stabilized with the
brightness correction function, use a shielding
around the sensor to prevent from the ambient light.
Brightness correction (Page 4-30)
Tool window

Processing during an operation
Tool window
Search region of the tool window

Stabilizing the position adjustment

If the target tilts and the position
adjustment becomes unstable
This section explains how to adjust when the
Search region
position adjustment is not stable.
Rotation range
Basic adjustments
Set the position adjustment window as large as possible
by selecting a part that contains a unique shape.
If there are many variation of a target shapes
that a position adjustment window has been set,
set the threshold which has lower matching rate. 5
: Good example
zz
Rotation Range
Operating/Adjusting
yyBroaden the rotation range if the tilt of the target
exceeds the rotation range (default value: 20).
Rotation Range (Page 4-61)
yyTo stabilize the position adjustment, the tool
window will search with the range few
degrees wider than the setting value of rotation
range. (The tool window will search few
degrees even if the rotation range is set to 0.)
Set the Margin to [OFF] when you would like
Since the convex part assigned in the position
adjustment window does not exist in any other to detect the target in accordance with the set
part of the target, the position adjustment can rotation angle of the target.
be performed correctly without being recognition Margin (Page 4-61)
error.
zz
Search Region
: Bad example Broaden the search region if the variation in the
position determining of the target exceeds the
Example 1
region to be searched.
Example 2

If the position adjustment becomes
unstable due to the effect of the
unwanted outlines
Position adjustment window yyThe outline disabling function can disable
The position adjustment cannot function unwanted outlines.
correctly in the following examples. Settings for disabling outlines (Page 4-59)
Example 1: The straight line that the position yySet the extraction sensitivity to [Low].
adjustment window is set cannot be
Setting a sensitivity (Page 4-60)
identified uniquely because there
are many similar straight lines exist
in other parts of the target.
Example 2: The angle section that the position
adjustment window is set cannot be
identified uniquely because there
are many similar angle sections exist
in other parts of the target.


If the outline of the reference target Stabilizing the Outline tool
cannot be detected
This section explains how to adjust the outline tool
yyIf the contrast of the target is low, the outline when the judgment for high and low-quality-targets
may not be extracted. Set the extraction is not stable.
sensitivity to [High]. Outline tool (Page 4-36)
If the process remain unstable even after

Basic adjustments
yySet the tool window as large as possible by
setting the extraction sensitivity to [High], it is
selecting a part contains a unique shape.
necessary to adjust the exposure condition for
yyIf the same or similar shapes are misrecognized,
the target.
5 Stabilizing the judgment process by taking
set the search region so that no outlines are
searched beyond the target area.
a clear image of the target (Page 5-32) Setting a search region (Page 4-39)
Operating/Adjusting
yyFor the color type, the outline extraction may yyAdjust the threshold to the average of the
become stable by using the color filter. high and low-quality-target. The judgment
Color Filters (color type only) (Page 4-22) condition and threshold can also be optimized
automatically to the most appropriate condition
and value by using the Tool Auto Tuning.
the Judgment Condition) (Page 5-16)

If the outline cannot be detected when
the target becomes out of position
Adjust the search region. Broaden the search
region if the varies of the position determining of
the target exceeds the region to be searched.

If the detection becomes unstable due
to the effect of the unwanted outline
other than the target
yyThe outline disabling function can disable
unwanted outlines.
Settings for disabling outlines (Page 4-39)
yySet the extraction sensitivity to [Low].
yySet the search region so that non-target images
containing unwanted outlines are not searched.
yySet the search algorithm to [High Accuracy].
Search Algorithm (Page 4-42)
yyMake an image with no unwanted outlines by
making the target background plain, etc.
If Edge Emphasis (Filter) of digital zoom is

set to [ON], unnecessary outlines may be
detected.

If the target tilts and the outline Stabilizing the Color Area/Area tool
cannot be detected
This section explains how to adjust the Color Area/
yyAdjust the rotation range. Broaden the rotation
Area tool when the judgment for the high and low-
range if the tilt of the target exceeds the
quality-target is not stable.
rotation range (default value: 20).
yyTo stabilize the detection, the tool window will
search with the range few degrees wider
Basic adjustments
than the setting value of rotation range. (The Adjust the threshold to the average of the high
tool window will search few degrees even if and low-quality-target. The color extraction range,
the rotation range is set to 0.) brightness extraction range and threshold can also 5
Set the Margin to [OFF] when you would like be optimized automatically to the most appropriate
Operating/Adjusting
to detect the target in accordance with the set ranges and values by using the tool auto tuning.
rotation angle of the target. Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment (Page 5-15)
Margin (Page 4-41) Tool Auto Tuning (Automatically Adjusting
If the match rate difference between the

high and low-quality-targets is small
Adjust the search algorithm.

If the color you wish to judge cannot
be extracted
If there is no difference between the match rate
for high and low-quality-target, select the [High yyTap and extract the color or the brightness to
be the reference for judgment.
Accuracy]. This will result in better judgment
accuracy. However, the processing time becomes
y
y By repeatedly tapping the un-extracted color or
brightness, the extraction range can be added.
longer.
Search Algorithm (Page 4-42) yyAdjust the extraction range with the extraction
range zoom in/zoom out ([+]/[-] buttons).
If the outline of the target cannot be Tap the [+] button to expand the color or
detected brightness range currently being extracted.
Tap the [-] button to reduce the range.
yyIf the contrast of the target is low, the outline
may not be extracted. Set the extraction Setting the Color Area/Area tool (Page 4-46)
sensitivity to [High]. yySet the [Fixed Reference Area] to [Enable].
Extended functions of the Color Area/
If the process remain unstable even after setting Area tool (Page 4-52)
the extraction sensitivity to [High], it is necessary
If the area search becomes unstable
to adjust the exposure condition for the target. due to unwanted colors being extracted
Stabilizing the judgment process by taking
Adjust with the mask function. The region in
a clear image of the target (Page 5-32)
which unwanted colors are extracted can be
yyFor the color type, the outline extraction may
disabled.
become stable by using the color filter.
Mask settings (Page 4-49)
Color Filters (color type only) (Page 4-22)

Shortening the Processing Time
This section explains how to adjust the device to For the processing time
shorten the processing time.
To shorten the processing time, perform The processing time is the period of time from when
an external or internal trigger is received until the
adjustments to shorten the processing times of the
status result is finalized.
imaging process and the detection tools. The processing time is displayed at the upper right
yyShorten the imaging processing time (Page 5-41) of the run screen or the test screen.
yyShorten the processing time of the detection tools
(Page 5-41) Processing time
yyShorten the processing time of the Outline tool
(Page 5-41)
5 yyShorten the processing time of the Color Area/
Area tool (Page 5-42)
Operating/Adjusting
yyShorten the processing time of the position

adjustment (Page 5-42)

Flow of the internal process
If the processing time is shortened, the stability of
Trigger input
judgment may decrease. The processing time should
therefore be adjusted with a view of maintaining
balance with the stability of the judgment process. Imaging
(Tilt Correction)
(Brightness
Correction)
(Position
Processing time
Adjustment)
Tool 1 process
Tool 2 process
Tool n process
Status output
Methods to shorten the processing time are as

follows.
yyShortening the imaging processing time.
yyShortening the processing time of each tool.
yyDo not use correction functions (tilt correction,
brightness correction, and position adjustment).
yyDo not use the FTP client function.
yyDo not use a field network.

Shortening the imaging processing Shortening the processing time of

time each tool
zz
Imaging Area
The processing time can be shortened by
Shortening the processing time of the
adjusting the imaging area.
Outline tool
Entire imaging area (default value) The processing time can be shortened by adjusting
Reduce the imaging area the settings for the search region, rotation range,
and search algorithm.
Search region
Rotation range
5
Operating/Adjusting
Non-imaged area
Reduce the imaging area by setting the imaging
area from Entire (default value) to Partial. The
processing time for capturing the image in Non- zz
Search Region
imaged area can be shortened. The importing The searching time can be shortened by
time will be shortened by narrowing the vertical reducing the search region and setting the
direction (V). region from [Entire] (default value) to [Partial].
Make sure that the range of position determining
Imaging Area (Page 4-20)
of the target does not exceed the search region.
zz
Exposure Time zz
Rotation Range
The processing time can be shortened by The target search time while rotating the master
shortening the exposure time (Page 4-21). The image can be shortened by reducing the rotation
range (default value: 20).
longer exposure time makes the processing Make sure that the range of an installation angle
time longer than the displayed exposure time. of the target does not exceed the rotation range.
By unmounting the dome attachment or zz
Search Algorithm
polarizing filter attachment, the exposure time Select the [High Speed]. This will decrease the
can be shortened. judgment accuracy, but the processing time will be
shorter.
Search Algorithm (Page 4-42)
Selecting the tool zz
Producing an image with less unwanted
The processing time of the Color Area/Area tool outlines
The processing time becomes longer for images
will be shorter than the Outline tool. Therefore, you
with multiple unwanted outlines other than the
should select the Color Area/Area tool whenever target outlines.
possible. yyMake an image with no unwanted outlines by

Shortening the processing time of the Shortening the processing time of the
Color Area/Area tool position adjustment
The processing time can be shortened by adjusting When the position adjustment is performed, the
the window shape settings. processing time can be shortened by adjusting the
search region settings or rotation range settings.
Window shape Search region
Rotation range
5
Operating/Adjusting
zz
Window Shape
If the current window shape is [Entire], reduce zz
Search Region
the window shape by modifying the setting to The searching time can be shortened by
[ Rect] or [ Circle]. reducing the search region and setting the
The processing time can be shortened by reducing region from [Entire] (default value) to [Partial].
the time required for the area processing. Note that the range of the target position that
Setting the Color Area/Area tool (Page 4-46) the position adjustment function can correct
becomes narrower.
zz
Rotation Range
The target search time while rotating the master
image can be shortened by reducing the rotation
range (default value: 20).
Note that the range of the target angle that
the position adjustment function can correct
becomes narrower.
zz
Producing an image with less
unnecessary outlines
The processing time becomes longer for images
with multiple unwanted outlines other than the
target outlines.
yyMake an image with no unwanted outlines by

6
This chapter explains the useful features of the sensor
and the monitor. The Sensor Setup Menu screen, the
Useful Features/ Sensor Advanced screen, and the Monitor Settings
Various Functions screen are also explained.
List of the Useful Features................................6-2

Displaying the Sensor Setup Menu Screen.....6-7
Changing the sensor displayed on the
monitor (Change Connected Sensor
Function).............................................................6-8
Confirming the NG occurrence status of
6
the sensor connected (List of NG Sensor
Useful Features/Various Functions

Occurrences function).....................................6-10
Holding the Image of the Sensor on which
NG occurred (NG Hold Function)...................6-14
Changeover for a Target
(Program Functions)........................................6-15
(Confirming the Images whose
Status Result is NG).........................................6-21
a USB Memory..................................................6-25
Setting the Extended Functions of the
Sensor...............................................................6-32
Setting the Advanced Monitor Information....6-54

List of the Useful Features
Useful features while running
Reference
Items Things you want to do Useful functions Description
page
Up to 32 types (products) of
Change over the program Program function products can be registered 6-15
and loaded.
Assign a name to the settings
A name can be assigned to
of each product for easy Program function 6-19
the used program.
identification
Prevent misoperation by the yyPassword Lock Misoperation can be prevented by 6-38
operator yyTouch Screen Lock setting a password on the monitor. 6-60
Operation
Assign a name to each A device name and a study name
Device Name 6-37
6 sensor for easy identification can be assigned to the sensor.
Automatically register the External master Registers the master image
6-33
master image registration from external input.

The sensor displayed on
Change the sensor to be Change Connected the monitor can easily be
6-8
displayed easily Sensor function changed among the sensors
connected.
The latest 100 images (in color)
Automatically save and Sensor Image or 300 images (in monochrome)
6-21
confirm the NG images History can be saved into the memory of
the sensor and confirmed them.
Confirm the image history in The sensor image history can
Simulator functions
the sensor saved as a batch be confirmed by opening the 1-7
of IV-Navigator
backup file (*.iva) batch backup file.
Specify a screen and save it Tap the title on the desired
Screen Capture 6-30
to a USB memory screen to capture it.
The statistical data of the
Check the operation status Statistical process
processing times and results 5-10
statistically screen
can be confirmed.
The status result of each
Check the operation status
Analysis Histogram screen tool can be displayed in the 5-12
with a histogram
histogram screen.
Automatically save data Data of the images captured

of the images captured by by the sensor and the status
the sensor and the status FTP client function result information can be 6-40
result information outside the automatically transferred to
sensor an FTP server.
The image whose status
Hold and display the image result is NG is held. Tapping
NG Hold function 6-14
whose status result is NG the [HOLD CLR] button
releases the image held.
List of NG Sensor The OK/NG statuses of the
Check the OK/NG statuses of
Occurrences connected sensors can be 6-10
the connected sensors
function confirmed.

Reference
page
The menu and title can be
Confirm images hidden under
Zoom button hidden and the image will be 5-6
the menu or title
displayed in full-screen.
The zoom ratio can be
Zoom in/out the images Zoom button 5-6
changed to x 1/x 1.5/x 2/x 3.
Adjust the brightness of the The brightness of the backlight
Backlight 6-62
backlight can be adjusted between 7 levels.
The monitor can be set to dim
Dim the backlight when not in
Backlight automatically when not used 6-62
use
for a specific period of time.
The language can be changed
Display to Japanese, English,
Deutsch, Chinese (Simplified),
6
Change the display language Language 6-61
Chinese (Traditional), Italian,

French, Spanish, Portuguese
or Korean.
The [Trig] button displayed
Hide the trigger button Manual Trigger when the external trigger is 6-59
selected can be hidden.
If the image is not need to be
Update Image in displayed, the screen update
Make the screen update faster 6-59
RUN Mode can become faster by setting to
display the status result only.

Useful features during installation/adjustment
Reference
page
Adjusts the sensor installation
Stabilize the detection - 5-32
and the settings navigator.
Judgment Shorten the process time - Adjusts the settings navigator. 5-40
process Issue an internal trigger and
perform judgment process - Sets the trigger interval to 1ms. 7-3
within the shortest cycle
Adjust the threshold for the The threshold can be set
Threshold detection by using the saved Tool Auto Tuning automatically by selecting an 5-16
images image and specifying to OK or NG.
6 Prevent internal lighting from
The light can be set to stay lit at
Continuous lighting all times by synchronizing with 4-21
blinking
the trigger.
The distorted images due to
Correct the distorted images
the limitations for the sensor
due to being taken from an Tilt Correction 6-47
installation can be corrected
angle
and displayed correctly.
Adjust the color tint (white The color tint can be adjusted
White Balance 6-50
Imaging balance) and displayed correctly.
The image of a target can be
Correct the images of a
Rotate 180 rotated 180 without adjusting 6-49
target that are rotated 180
the sensor's position.
Judgment error due to
interference of lights of
Mutual interference
Prevent mutual interference the sensors connected to 6-34
prevention
the IV-G10/IV-G15 can be
prevented.

Reference
page
The settings can be confirmed
Confirm/edit the settings or
or edited by using a batch
confirm the operation results Simulator functions
backup files (*.iva). Also, 1-7
without connecting to the of IV-Navigator
the operation results can be
sensor
simulated.
The settings for the sensor
Back up the settings to the
Batch Backup can be read and saved into 6-26
USB memory
the USB memory.
The batch backup data stored
Copy the settings to multiple Transfer Program
into the USB memory can be 6-28
sensors Settings
transferred to another sensor.
Copy the settings and use

The settings of a set program
number which has been set
6
the settings to set another Program function 6-19
can be copied to another

Settings product
program number.
The list of settings can be
Confirm the settings of the Export functions of
confirmed with Microsoft Excel 1-7
sensor with the list. IV-Navigator
etc.
Initialize the settings of the The settings can be initialized
Initialize Sensor 6-53
sensor to the factory default.
Initialize the settings of the The settings can be initialized
Initialize Monitor 6-64
monitor to the factory default.
The version for the model or
Confirm the version of the
Sensor Information the operation software can be 6-52
sensor
confirmed.
The version for the model or
Confirm the version of the
Monitor Information the operation software can be 6-63
monitor
confirmed.

Reference
page
Confirm whether or not the
The operation test for the input
input and output lines are I/O Monitor 6-36
and output line can be performed.
correctly wired
The polarity can be changed
Switch to NPN output or PNP
Polarity to NPN or PNP according to 6-36
output
the controlling device used.
The settings for each OUT can
Switch the output to N.O. or N.C. Output Settings 6-35
be changed to N.O. or N.C.
The output can be changed
Output the status output with Common Output
from latching output to one- 6-35
one-shot Settings
shot output.
6 Output the status output with Common Output On-delay time can be set for
6-35
on-delay Settings the one-shot output.
Rising trigger or falling

Switch the external trigger to trigger can be selected as
Input Settings 6-33
rise or fall the operation of the external
trigger
When the total status result
Total status NG of each detection tool was
Output the NG status results 4-64
output NG, the total status NG output
function turns ON.
I/O lines When the sensor is running
Confirm whether or not the
RUN output with no system error occurring, 4-64
sensor is running properly
the output function turns ON.
Logical operation result of each

Form a logical operation of
Logic output detection tool can be assigned 4-67
status result
to the output function.
The total status conditions can

Change the total status Total status be selected from [All Tools OK]/
4-69
conditions conditions [Any Tool OK]/[Logic 1] to [Logic
4].
When an external trigger is
input to the IV-G10 (Main),
Synchronize the timing
Main/Expansion it can be copied to the
for imaging of the sensors
Simultaneous Input expansion unit. The timing for 6-34
connected to the IV-G10/
function imaging is synchronized if the
IV-G15
mutual interference prevention
is not used.
Main/Expansion The output of the IV-G10

Output the logic output of the
Logic Output (Main) can be the logic output 6-35
IV-G10/IV-G15
function with the IV-G15 (Expansion).

This section explains the Sensor Setup Menu (2) [Detail] button
screen, which is displayed by tapping the [Setup] By tapping the [Detail] button, the Program
button when the menu display of the monitor is ON. Details screen opens. The master image can be
confirmed and the program name can be edited.
1 Set the menu display of the monitor ON Editing a program name (Page 6-19)
Copying a program (Page 6-19)
and tap the [Sensor Setup] button.
Initializing a program (Page 6-20)
(3) Master image
Displays the master image registered to the
currently selected program. If no master image is
registered, the [No Master Image] will be displayed.
(4) [Sensor Setup] button
Start the Settings Navigator.
Judgment Condition) (Page 4-1) 6
(5) [Limit Adjustment] button

2 Tap the [OK] button. Adjusts the threshold of the tool registered in
the currently selected program.
(6) [Tool Auto Tuning] button
Performs the auto tuning of the tool registered
in the currently selected program.
(7) [Sensor Advanced] button
The Sensor Setup Menu screen opens. Performs the advanced settings for the sensor.
The displayed items are as follows. Setting the Extended Functions of the Sensor
(Page 6-32)
(1) (8) [Sensor Image History] button
(2) Displays the image history saved in the sensor.
(3)
(4)
(9) [USB Memory] button
(5) Operates the USB memory connected to the
(6) monitor.
Saving the Sensor Settings and Images to a
USB Memory (Page 6-25)
(7) (8) (9) (10) (10) [RUN] button
Starts running the sensor.
(1) Program Chapter 5 Operating/Adjusting (Page 5-1)
Displays the program number of the selected
program. The program can be switched from
the pull-down menu.
Changeover for a Target ( Program Functions)
(Page 6-15)

Changing the Sensor Displayed on the Monitor (Change Connected Sensor Function)
Changing the Sensor Displayed on the Monitor

(Change Connected Sensor Function)
When multiple sensors are connected to a monitor, the sensor displayed on the monitor can be changed.
When direct connection (2 units or more) or network connection is used, this function can be used.
Intelligent Monitor
IV-M30
6
Ethernet switch

Changing the Sensor Displayed on the Monitor (Change Connected Sensor Function)
Changing the sensor to be

displayed on a monitor yyIf the settings for the selected sensor have not
been made, the Sensor Setup Menu screen will
1 Set the menu display of the monitor ON be displayed. For details on sensor settings,
refer to 4 Settings Navigator (Setting the
and tap the [Chnge Connected Snsr]
button. Judgment Condition) (Page 4-1).
yyThe sensors displayed on the Change
Connected Sensor screen are those displayed
as the search results of the network search.
Sensors added to the network later can be
displayed on the list by tapping the [Search
Again] button.
yyWhen direct connection (1 unit) is used, this
function cannot be used. 6
Sensors connected to the monitor are listed.

2 Select a sensor to be displayed on the
monitor and tap the [Connect] button.
The screen for the selected sensor opens on

the monitor.

Confirming the NG Occurrence Status of the Sensor Connected (List of NG Sensor Occurrences Function)
Confirming the NG Occurrence Status of the Sensor

Connected (List of NG Sensor Occurrences Function)
Overview of the List of NG Sensor (1) Sensor list
Display the sensors registered on the List of NG
Occurrences function
Sensor Occurrences. The sensor displayed on
the monitor is shown with the selected status
yyIf the sensor is connected with direct connection (orange). The list for No.1 to 7 differs from the
(1 unit), this function cannot be used. list that includes No. 8 or later.
yyAny sensor whose version is older than
(2) Indicator light
R3.00.00 does not support this function.
Display the status of the sensors registered on
By using the list of NG sensor occurrences function,
the List of NG Sensor Occurrences.
the [NG] button (blinking in red) is displayed when
yyGreen (ON).......No NG occurred.
NG occurs on the sensor connected to the monitor
yyRed (ON)...........NG occurred once or more.
during running.
yyRed (Blink)........The number of NG
6 occurrences increases after

displaying the latest list of NG
sensor occurrences.
yyYellow (ON).......The sensor is not connected

[NG] button due to a connection error.
Check the connection with the
sensor.
Tapping the [NG] button displays the list of yyYellow (Blink).....The sensor is not connected
sensors connected to the monitor and their NG due to a connection error.
occurrence statuses can be confirmed. Check the connection with the
zz
If the sensors are registered as No. 1 to 7 sensor.
on the List of NG Sensor Occurrences yyGray..................The sensor has not been
(2) (3) (4) registered, or the information
of the sensor is being
acquired.
(1)
(5) (6) (7) (8)

zz
If the sensors are registered as No. 8 or
later on the List of NG Sensor Occurrences
(2) (3)
(1)
(5) (6) (7) (8)

(3) Status (7) [Connect] button

Display the status of the sensors registered on Connects the selected sensor and display the
the List of NG Sensor Occurrences. image on the monitor. If the sensor on which
The status of the sensor is displayed with NG occurred is selected, the sensor is changed
characters. to it.
yyNG: (counts)......The NG count is displayed as (8) [Close] button
a value from 0 to 99999. The
Closes the List of NG Sensor Occurrences
NG count is the accumulated
screen.
value after turning the power
on. If NG occurs 99999 times
or more, the display 99999
remains.
To reset the NG count, perform one of the 6

operations below.

yyTap the [Clear] button.
yyTurn the power off.
yyInitialize the sensor.
yyNOT SET...........The sensor has not
been registered for the
corresponding number.
yySYS ERR..........Error number 001 to 128 will
(No.) be displayed when important
or fatal error occurs with the
sensor. If multiple errors occur
multiple times, the lowest error
number will be displayed.
yy CONNECT ERR.....The sensor is not connected.
Or the version of the sensor is
older than R3.00.00.
yyUPDATING........The information on the sensor
is being acquired. Displayed
when the information on the
sensor has not been acquired
just after startup, for example.
(4) Device Name
Displays the device name assigned to the
sensor.
(5) [Clear All] button.
Clears the NG occurrence status of all the
sensors registered on the List of NG Sensor
Occurrences.
(6) [Clear] button.
Clears the NG occurrence status of the sensor
selected on the sensor list.
Setting the List of NG Sensor zz

When specifying the IP address of the
sensor for registering
Occurrences
Tap the [Edit] button.
1 Tap the [Monitor Settings] button with the
state that the menu display of the monitor
is set to ON.
2 Tap the [Monitor Device Settings] button,
and then the [Display Settings] button.
The screen to input the IP address of the sensor

to be registered opens. Enter the IP address of
6 the sensor and tap the [OK] button.
3 Tap the [Settings] button.
The sensor of the specified IP address will be

registered on the sensor list.
4 Register the sensors on the List of NG

Sensor Occurrences.
zz
When searching for a sensor and registering it
Tap the [Search Sensor] button.
The number displayed on the List of NG

Sensor Occurrences is automatically assigned.
Searching starts and the searched result will be

displayed.

5 Tap the number of the sensor (default 8 To display the List of NG Sensor
value: OFF) displayed on the List of Occurrences screen for startup of the
NG Sensor Occurrences and select an monitor, set [Display on Startup] to [ON].
arbitrary number.
If the sensor was registered by specifying

the IP address, the number is automatically
assigned. Change the number as needed.

button.
The system returns to the Monitor Settings 6
screen.

The selected number will be registered.
6 Repeat step 5 to register the number

of sensors for the List of NG Sensor
Occurrences.
yyUp to 16 sensors can be registered on the

List of NG Sensor Occurrences. Tap the [<<]/
[>>] button to select a sensor detected.
yyTo initialize the List of NG Sensor
Occurrences, tap the [Clear] button.

button.
The system returns to the Display Settings screen.

Holding the Image of the Sensor on which NG Occurred (NG Hold Function)
Holding the Image of the Sensor on which NG

Occurred (NG Hold Function)
Overview of the NG Hold function Setting the NG Hold function
If the NG Hold function is used, an image of the
sensor on which NG occurred during running is
held and is displayed on the monitor. The
image when NG occurred can be confirmed.
is set to ON.
2 Tap the [Monitor Device Settings] button,

6 NG occurs during running.

NG HOLD is
displayed as the
total status result 3 Set [NG Hold Function] to [ON].
and the screen is
held.
To release the image held, tap the [HOLD CLR]

button with the menu display of the monitor set to ON.

button.
The system returns to the Monitor Settings
screen.
yyIf another NG occurs during holding of an NG

image, the NG image will be updated.
yyThe NG hold status will be released with one of
the operations below.
- When the run screen changes to the Sensor
Setup Menu screen.
- When the external master image registration
is performed.
- When the status output is reset with an
external input for clearing an error.
- When the [HOLD CLR] button is tapped
yyThe statistics display and histogram will be
updated during NG hold.
yyAny sensor whose version is older than
R3.00.00 does not support this function.

Changeover for a Target (Program Functions)
Overview of the program functions Things can be performed with

The sensor can save the judgment condition set in the program functions
the settings navigator as a program up to 32 types yySaves 32 types (32 products) of judgment
(32 products). conditions (programs).
By reading the judgment condition which has been Chapter 4 Settings Navigator (Setting the
saved according to each product, changeover can Judgment Condition) (Page 4-1)
be done easily. yyReads and operates the saved program.
Using the program functions (changing over)
Sensor
(Page 6-17)
PROG31 : Product XX yySelects the reading method of the program.
Program Switch Method (Page 6-51)
PROG02 : Product C yyNames the judgment conditions (programs).
Editing a program name (Page 6-19)
6
PROG01 : Product B

PROG00 : Product A yyCopies and uses the judgment conditions (programs).
Settings Navigator
*1
yyImaging settings yyReturns the judgment conditions (programs) to
yyMaster image the status before setting.
*2
yyTool settings Initializing a program (Page 6-20)
yyOutput Assignment
Sensor Advanced
yyEnvironmental
yySetup Adjustment
yySwitching programs
*1 The auto focus type includes the focusing

position.
*2 Including the threshold of each tool.

Preparing the program functions Preparation procedures

Registers the judgment condition for each product
to the program before running. 1 Display the Sensor Setup Menu screen.
(Page 6-7)
Preparation flow
(1) Select a program number 2 Select a program number to register a
judgment condition of a product.
Select a program number to register a judgment
condition from PROG00 to PROG31.
(2) Set a judgment condition in the Settings
Navigator Select the
program
Set the judgment condition for a product in the
6 Settings Navigator.
(3) Select a program switch method
Select a switch method. There are methods

such as switching from the external input line or
switching by tapping the monitor. The program can also be selected from the
[Detail] button (Page 6-7).
The following functions can be used with the

preparations for the program function. 3 Set a judgment condition in the Settings
yyThe product name can be registered to the Navigator.
program.
Editing a program name (Page 6-19)
yyTo register a similar product, the program can
be copied, and then the settings can be edited.
yyInitializes and returns the judgment condition
registered in the program to the status before
setting.
Initializing a program (Page 6-20) Chapter 4 Settings Navigator (Setting the
Judgment Condition) (Page 4-1)
4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to register programs

for the number of products that are to be
changed over.

5 Select a program switch method. Using the program functions

(changing over)
When the [Monitor/PC] is selected in the

Program Switch Method

Program Switch Method (Page 6-51) (Page 6-7)
yyMonitor/PC........Switching by tapping the
monitor screen or operating 2 Select the program number that the
from the IV-Navigator (IV-H1) product to be judged is registered.
or the field network.
yyExternal IN........Switching by inputting signals
6
from PLC to the input line of

the sensor. Select the
program
6 If the [External IN] is selected in the
program switch method, set the input
terminal.
The bit to be set differs depending on the
The program number can also be selected
product numbers to be registered.
while confirming a master image with the
Product numbers to [Detail] button (Page 6-7).
bit to be assigned
be registered
to the input line
(Program numbers)
3 Tap the [RUN] button and the run mode
2 bit0 will start with the new program.
3 to 4 bit0/bit1
5 to 8 bit0/bit1/bit2
9 to 16 bit0/bit1/bit2/bit3
17 to 32 bit0/bit1/bit2/bit3/bit4
Setup example
When 7 types of products are to be registered,
bit0, bit1, and bit2 are assigned to arbitrary IN
terminals. bit3 and bit4 are not assigned.
For details of how to switch from the IV-Navigator
(IV-H1), refer to IV/IV-G series Series Users
Manual (PC Software).

When the [External IN] is selected in the Program Switch Method
1 Start the run mode.

Starting an Operation (Page 5-2)
2 Select the program number to which the product to be judged is registered with the status
of the input line.
Change the input lines IN2 to IN6 which were assigned to bit0 to bit4 in the input settings (Page 6-33)
to the following statuses and maintain the settings. Start the run mode with the new program number.
Program bit4 bit0 Program bit4 bit0
bit3 bit2 bit1 bit3 bit2 bit1
number (MSB) (LSB) number (MSB) (LSB)
PROG00 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF PROG16 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF
6 PROG01 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON PROG17 ON OFF OFF OFF ON

PROG02 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF PROG18 ON OFF OFF ON OFF
PROG03 OFF OFF OFF ON ON PROG19 ON OFF OFF ON ON

PROG04 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF PROG20 ON OFF ON OFF OFF
PROG05 OFF OFF ON OFF ON PROG21 ON OFF ON OFF ON
PROG06 OFF OFF ON ON OFF PROG22 ON OFF ON ON OFF
PROG07 OFF OFF ON ON ON PROG23 ON OFF ON ON ON
PROG08 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF PROG24 ON ON OFF OFF OFF
PROG09 OFF ON OFF OFF ON PROG25 ON ON OFF OFF ON
PROG10 OFF ON OFF ON OFF PROG26 ON ON OFF ON OFF
PROG11 OFF ON OFF ON ON PROG27 ON ON OFF ON ON
PROG12 OFF ON ON OFF OFF PROG28 ON ON ON OFF OFF
PROG13 OFF ON ON OFF ON PROG29 ON ON ON OFF ON
PROG14 OFF ON ON ON OFF PROG30 ON ON ON ON OFF
PROG15 OFF ON ON ON ON PROG31 ON ON ON ON ON
yyWhen the polarity (Page 6-36) is [NPN] ON : The state shorted with 0 V line
OFF : Open
yyWhen the polarity (Page 6-36) is [PNP] ON : The state that voltage is applied
OFF : Open
For details of the controlling method and the timing chart, refer to Changing Over (Page 7-8).

Editing a program name Copying a program

Tap the [Detail] button in the Sensor Setup Menu Copies a set program to another program number.
screen and edit the program name. Re-uses the set items and creates a new program.
1 Display the Sensor Setup Menu screen. 1 Display the Sensor Setup Menu screen.
Displaying the Sensor Setup Menu Screen Displaying the Sensor Setup Menu Screen
(Page 6-7) (Page 6-7)
2 Tap the [Detail] button. 2 Tap the [Detail] button.

The Program Details screen opens. The Program Details screen opens.
3 Select the program to change the name 3 Select the program number to be copied
and tap the [Edit] button. and tap the [Copy] button.
Select the Select the 6
program program

The selected program can be moved by tapping The selected program can be moved by tapping
the [<] or [>] button. the [<] or [>] button.
The screen to edit the program name opens.
4 Select the program number to be the copy
4 Enter the arbitrary name and tap the [OK] destination and tap the [Go] button.
button.
Select the
program
number
The system returns to the Program Details screen.
If the display language (Page 6-61) is changed,

the program name might be replaced and The copy source program is copied to the copy
displayed as hyphens (-). destination.
Copied program

Initializing a program
Initializes settings in the program and resets to the
default.

(Page 6-7)
2 Tap the [Detail] button.

The Program Details screen opens.
3 Select the program to be initialized and

tap the [Initialize] button.
6 Select the
program
The selected program can be moved by tapping

the [<] or [>] button.

The system returns to the Program Details screen.
The initialized program becomes [No Master Image].

Sensor Image History (Confirming the Images whose Status Result is NG)

(Confirming the Images whose Status Result is NG)
The sensor has a built-in memory for saving images used for judgment. According to the saving condition,
it automatically saves the latest images. The saving conditions are as follows.
yyNG images only (default value).... Saves the images whose total status result was NG.
yyAll images..................................... Saves all the images that were judged.
Loads the saved images into the monitor and the images can be used for confirming the causes and
tendency of the NG result.
The numbers of images can be saved are as follows.
yyColor type...................... 100 images
yyMonochrome type.......... 300 images
The number of images which can be saved when using the FTP client function are as follows.
yyColor type...................... 70 images
yyMonochrome type.......... 210 images
Since the memory of the sensor image history is volatile, all saved images are erased when the power 6
is turned OFF.

To save the images, batch back up the images into a USB memory.
Displaying the Sensor Image History screen

This section explains how to display the Sensor Image History screen.
There are two methods for displaying the Sensor Image History screen.
The [Logging Settings] can be set only when it is displayed from the Sensor Setup Menu screen.
Displaying from the run screen

Displaying from the Sensor Setup
Menu screen
1 Tap the [Sensor Image History] button
when the menu display of the monitor is 1 Tap the [Sensor Image History] button in
set to ON. the Sensor Setup Menu screen.
The Sensor Image History screen opens. The Sensor Image History screen opens.

Loading and confirming the saved The View screen opens.

(1)
images
Displays the image history in the sensor.
(2)
1 Display the Sensor Image History screen.
(3)
(Page 6-21)
(4)
(5) (6) (7)
(1) Page number
Indicates the page number of the image history.
(2) Thumbnail images
6 Displays the number of triggers, total status
result, and thumbnail image.
For details of the number of triggers,

When displaying from the run screen, the
refer to Displaying the statistical information
confirmation dialog appears. Select whether or
(Page 5-10).
not to pause.
(3) Detailed information
When the operation is not paused Displays the detailed information for the
yyThe added or overwritten history image will selected thumbnail image.
not be updated automatically. For updating, Displays the program number, program name,
close the history image display once and number of triggers, status results for the position
then display it again. adjustment, and the status results for each tool.
yyWhen the history image is erased by
(4) Operation buttons
overwriting and updating in the sensor
Selects a thumbnail image.
during displaying on the monitor, it may not
yy[First].................Moves to the first page of the
be displayed again on the monitor. image history.
yy[<<]....................Moves to the previous page.
yy[<]......................Moves to the previous history.
yy[>]......................Moves to the next history.
yy[>>]....................Moves to the next page.
yy[Last].................Moves to the last page of the
image history.
(5) [Batch Backup] button
Backs up the images in a batch.
Saving the sensor settings or the image
history (Page 6-26)
To back up the images in a batch from

the View screen, the saving target will be
[Prog.+Image Hist.].

(6) [View] button Clearing the saved images

Zooms in on the selected image history on the
monitor. Clears the image histories saved in the sensor.

(Page 6-21)
2 Tap the [Clear] button.
yy[<] button
Moves to the previous history.
yy[>] button 6
Moves to the next history.

yy[Save to USB Memory] button
Saves the displayed image to the USB memory. The confirmation dialog appears.
Saving the image history individually (Page 6-27)
yy[Auto Tuning] button
The image history will be cleared and the
Performs auto tuning based on the displayed system returns to the run screen or the Sensor
history. Setup Menu screen.
yyTitle
Displays the program number, program name
and number of triggers.
In the following cases, characters of the title

are displayed in yellow.
yyImages which the tool settings was changed
after image history saving
yyWhen Tool Auto Tuning has been performed
Moreover, if [Process 1] / [Process 2] / [Process]
is selected for Tool View (Page 5-8), only
the tool window is displayed and the process
contents are not displayed.
(7) [Back] button

The system returns to the run screen or the
Sensor Setup Menu screen.

Changing the logging conditions of

the image history
Sets the logging condition (storage condition) for
the image history.

Display the Sensor Image History screen from
the Sensor Setup Menu screen.
The [Logging Settings] can be set only when
it is selected from the Sensor Setup Menu
screen.
6 Displaying the Sensor Image History screen

(Page 6-21)
2 Tap the [Logging Settings] button.
3 Select a logging condition.
yyAll......................Saves all the images to the

image history regardless of
the status result.
yyNG only.............Only saves the images whose
status result is NG to the
image history.

The system returns to the Sensor Setup Menu
screen.

Saving the Sensor Settings and Images to a USB Memory

a USB Memory
Connect the USB memory to the monitor so that Displaying the USB Memory screen
the data backup, settings data transfer, and screen
capture can be performed. This section explains how to display the USB
Memory screen.
Installing/Removing the USB memory
There are two methods for displaying the USB
Memory screen.
Installing the USB memory The items can be set are the same for the two methods.
1 Open the cover of the USB connecting

Displaying from the run screen
connector on the monitor.
1 Tap the [USB Memory] button with the state that
the menu display of the monitor is set to ON.
2 Connect the USB memory to the USB
connector.
6

The USB Memory screen opens.
Supported formats : FAT (FAT16) / FAT32
Removing the USB memory
The USB memory can be removed at any time,

except while a progress bar or a dialog indicating that
The [Batch Backup] button and [Transfer
a saving process is in progress is being displayed. Program Settings] button are available only
when the USB memory is attached.
1 Remove the USB memory from the USB
connecting connector.
Displaying from the Sensor Setup
Menu screen
1 Tap the [USB Memory] button in the
The USB Memory screen opens.

Saving the sensor settings or zz

Folder
the image history Displays the name of the folder to be created on
the USB memory. "Device name_Last 24bit of
the MAC address" will be automatically set.
Backing up in a batch
Backs up the data saved in the sensor into the USB
zz
File Name
Displays the name of the backup file. Tap the
memory in a batch.
[Edit] button and the name can be edited to the
When multiple sensors are to be used, the settings
arbitrary name.
can be copied based on the batch backup data.
The image history of the batch backup data can be
confirmed by the simulation function of IV-Navigator.
yyIt is recommended to perform a batch backup zz

Save
6 of the data saved in the sensor in case of Selects the backup target.
malfunction of the product. yyProgram Only....Backs up the sensor settings
yyThe saving time increases when this is

(the Sensor Setup (Settings
performed in [During operation]. Execution while
Navigator) and Sensor
in the [During setting] status is recommended.
Advanced settings of all
1 Connect the USB memory to the USB yyProg.+

programs).
.......Backs up all the images in the
Image Hist. image history as well as the
(Page 6-25) sensor settings.
2 Display the USB Memory screen. When the image history has been saved
Displaying the USB Memory screen (Page 6-25) [During operation], the image being the saving
object may be updated and deleted during the
3 Tap the [Batch Backup] button. batch backup. A deleted image is not saved.
Because of this, saving [During setting] is
recommended.
zz
File Size
Displays the size of the backup file (expectancy)
and the free space of the USB memory.
5 After the setting is completed, tap the [Go]

button.
The Batch Backup screen opens.
After the batch backup completes, the backup
4 Perform the Batch Backup settings. result appears on the monitor.
6 Confirm the backup result and tap the [OK]

button.

Saving the image history individually

(Page 6-25)
2 Display the zoom-in screen of the image

history screen.
Loading and confirming the saved images
(Page 6-22)
3 Tap the [Save to USB Memory] button.

6

4 Edit the file name as needed and tap the
[Go] button.
The image history will be saved to the USB

memory and the storage result appears.

The system returns to the zoom-in screen of the
image history screen.

Transferring the settings backed up 1 Connect the USB memory to the USB
in the USB memory to the sensor connector of the monitor.
Transfers the setting data (batch backup file) saved (Page 6-25)
in the USB memory to the sensor.
2 Display the USB Memory screen.
Displaying the USB Memory screen
yyOperations cannot be cancelled during
(Page 6-25)
transmission of the settings data.
yyIt is recommended to back up the data saved in
the sensor in a batch beforehand.
3 Tap the [Transfer Program Settings] button.
Saving the sensor settings or the image
history (Page 6-26)
yyThe image data in the image history will not be
transferred.
6 yyThe settings file of a different model of the
sensor cannot be transferred.
yyThe settings data of auto focus type and

manual focus type can be transferred mutually.
However, when the settings data of a manual The confirmation dialog appears.
focus type are transferred to an auto focus type,
the focusing position will be converted to the 4 Tap the [OK] button.
default value. The screen to select the setting data opens.
yyWhen directly connecting the sensor to the
monitor, the setting file of the sensor with the 5 Select the batch backup file to be
FTP client function or a field network enabled transferred (*.iva), and tap the [OK] button.
cannot be transferred.
yyWhen the FTP client function or field network
function is enabled, the setting data cannot be
transferred to the sensor during running.

The Transfer Program Settings screen opens.

6 If you would also like to transfer the I/O 7 Confirm the information of the settings file
polarity (NPN/PNP) and the network settings, to be transferred and tap the [Go] button.
tap the [Option] button. After the transmission of the settings data
is completed, the transmission result will be
displayed on the monitor.
When the protocol setting has been changed,

the connection is terminated and the sensor
restarts.
The Option screen opens.

8 Confirm the transmission result and tap
the [OK] button.
Select [Enable] in [Transfer All Settings] and tap The system returns to the run screen or the
the [OK] button. Sensor Setup Menu screen. 6

When [Transfer All Settings] has been set to
[Enable], the system returns to the Monitor
Settings screen.
yyWhen the FTP client function is set to [ON],

the image history will be cleared.
yyThe number of images which can be saved
to the image history when using the FTP
client function are as follows.
- Color type.................. 70 images
- Monochrome type...... 210 images
yyThe setting of [Transfer All Settings] is reset
to [Disable] after the setting data were
transferred or when the setting is canceled.
yyWhen the PROFINET communication is
being used, the sensor restarts.

Capturing the monitor screen and Capturing the screen

saving to the USB memory
Saves the run screen or settings screen of the 1 Enable the screen capture function.
monitor into the USB memory as an image file (BMP). Enabling the screen capturing function
The saved image files can be imported into the PC (Page 6-30)
and used as an image for creating reports.
2 Display the screen to be captured and
tap the title area at the upper part of the
Enabling the screen capturing function screen for about one second.

6 (Page 6-25)
2 Display the USB Memory screen.

Displaying the USB Memory screen

(Page 6-25)
The capture will be executed and the completion
3 Tap the [Screen Capture Settings] button. message appears for a few seconds.
yyEach setup screen can be captured by tapping

the title area.
yyFor the full-screen mode, tap the area where the
zooming rate is displayed.
yyWhen the screen which displays the taken
image is captured, the three types of file (screen
capture (bmp), raw image (bmp), image capture
4 Select the [ON] and tap the [OK] button. file (ivp)) are saved at the same time.
yyFor details of the saved folder or file name, refer
to Folder composition and file naming rules
(Page 6-31).
yyIn some cases, such as when choice items of a
pulldown menu are being displayed or during file
processing, screens cannot be captured.


Folder composition and file naming rules
Reference
Data type Storage Rule Description
page
Storage \(Device name of the sensor)_ Batch saves all the
folder (Last 24bit of the MAC address) settings in the sensor.
Batch backup File name YYYYMMDD_hhmmss *1 [Program Only] or 6-26
[Prog.+Image Hist.] can be
Extension iva selected.
\(Device name of the sensor)_ Simultaneously saves the
Storage
yyScreen capture (Last 24bit of the MAC address)\ bmp format file for the
folder
(with taken IMAGE taken image and the ivp
6-27
images) File name YYYYMMDD_hhmmss *1 format file which can be
yyIndividual image
bmp
used for master image
6-30
6
history storage Extension registration or Tool Auto

ivp Tuning.
yyWhen the sensor is connected
\(Device name of the sensor)_
(Last 24bit of the MAC
Storage Saves an image that the
address)\SCREEN
yyScreen capture folder displayed screen has been
yyIndividual image yyWhen the sensor is not captured as it is including 6-30
history storage connected the title area and the
\IV-M30 buttons.
File name YYYYMMDD_hhmmss * 1
Extension bmp
Storage \(Device name of the sensor)_
folder (Last 24bit of the MAC address) Saves images and criteria
Tool Auto Tuning information of Tool Auto 5-29
File name Paa_Tbb_(Tool name) *2
Tuning.
Extension ivt
*1 YYYY: Year; MM: Month; DD: Day; hh: Hour; mm: Minute; ss: Second
For individually saving the batch backup and image history, the file name can be changed to arbitrary
name and saved.
*2 aa: Program number (00 to 31), bb: Tool number (01 to 16), Tool name: The tool name which has been
set will be applied as a tool name if the tool name has been set. The tool type will be applied as a tool
name if the tool name if the tool name has not been set.
yyThe numbers of files to be saved in each folder must be 100 files or less.
Files may not be saved correctly.
For the folder with the number of files over 100 files, delete the files and change the folder name.
yyThe total numbers of sub folders and files in each folder (iva files or ivp files) that can be displayed on
the screen to select a file (Page 3-20) is 128.
yyIf characters which cannot be displayed correctly with the current display language (Page 6-61) are
included in the folder or file names, the folders or files will be save with those characters replaced by
hyphens (-).

Setting the Extended Functions of the Sensor
Sensor advanced settings Setup Adjustment

The section explains the Sensor Advanced screen
zz
Tilt Correction
displayed by tapping [Sensor Advanced] in the
Performs tilt correction of the images displayed on
the monitor.
Tilt Correction (Page 6-47)
zz
Rotate 180
Rotates the display of the monitor 180.
Rotate 180 (Page 6-49)
zz
Adjusts the white balance for the image displayed
6 on the monitor.
(Page 6-50)
Program
zz
Program Switch Method
Sets the switching method for programs.
Program Switch Method (Page 6-51)
Environmental zz
Auto Focus Adj Pos
Sets whether or not to share the adjusting
zz
I/O Settings
position for auto focus to all programs.
Sets the input/output settings, specifies the
Auto Focus Adjustment Position (auto focus
polarity, and sets the I/O monitor.
type only) (Page 6-51)
I/O Settings (Page 6-33)
zz
Device Name/Pass
Sets the sensor name and password lock. System
Device settings (Page 6-37)
zz
Sensor Information
zz
Network Settings
Displays the information set in the sensor.
Sets the network settings for the sensor.
Sensor Information (Page 6-52)
Network Settings (Page 6-39)
zz
Adv. Network Settings zz
Initialize Sensor
Sets the FTP client function and the field Initializes the information set in the sensor.
network settings for the sensor. Initializing the sensor (Page 6-53)
Advanced Network Settings (Page 6-40) zz
Update Sensor
Upgrades the sensor software.
Updating the sensor (Page 6-53)

I/O Settings Input Settings

Sets the input/output settings for the sensor.
1 Tap the [Settings] button of the input settings.
1 Tap the [Sensor Advanced] button in the
2 Tap the [Environmental] button and then

the [I/O Settings] button.
2 Set the input settings for the sensor.

6

3 Set the input/output settings for the
sensor.
zz
IN1
Sets the detection timing of the trigger input for
IN1 input line.
yyExt. Trigger
Sets the trigger input to the rising edge of the
external trigger.
Output Settings (Page 6-35) yyExt. Trigger
Sets the trigger input to the falling edge of the
Polarity (Page 6-36)
external trigger.
I/O Monitor (Page 6-36)
zz
IN2 to IN6
4 After the setting is completed, tap the [OK] Sets the roles for input line IN2 to IN6.
button. yyOFF
The system returns to the Sensor Advanced screen. Ignores the input.
yyProgram bit0 to bit4
Specifies the number for switching the programs.
(Page 6-15)
yyClear Error
Sets the error output clearance.
yyExt. Master Save
Sets the master image registration from the
external input.

zz
Main/Expansion Simultaneous Input zz
Option
(IV-G15 (Expansion) only) The input option screen opens by tapping the
[Option] button.
This setting is available only when the sensor
amplifier connected is the IV-G15 (Expansion).
To prevent mutual interference, set it on the
IV-G10 (Main).
This setting should be made when the input to
the IV-G10 (Main) is used as the input to the
IV-G15 (Expansion).
[Write ROM when using Ext. Master Save?]

Selecting the [Yes] button writes the data to
6 the ROM of the sensor when the master image
registration is performed with the external input
or field network.
Registering the Master Image (Page 7-9)
Internal Trigger Control with IN1 Input
If the [Yes] button is selected, imaging and
judgment will be performed at the intervals of
yy(Setting example) When the [Trigger Options]
the internal trigger while the input to IN1 is ON.
is set to [External Trigger] and [IN1] on the
[Main/Expansion Simul Input] is set to [Yes], Setting the Trigger Options (Page 4-8)
an external trigger input to the IV-G10 (Main)
can be copied to the IV-G15 (Expansion). yy[Internal Trigger Control with IN1 Input] is the
yyInput to the line which is set to [Yes] on the common setting for programs. It cannot be
IV-G15 (Expansion) cannot be accepted. set for each program.
yyIf [Trigger Options] is set to [External
zz
Mutual Interference Prevention (IV-G10
Trigger], the IN1 input will be accepted as an
(Main) only)
external trigger.
yyThe trigger cannot be input via the field
This setting can be made only when the network.
sensor amplifier connected is the IV-G10 Reset Status Output on Clear Error
(Main).
Execution
Set to prevent judgment error due to If the [Yes] button is selected, output or error
interference of lights of sensors connected to for judgment is set to OFF from when resetting
the IV-G10/IV-G15. with clearing errors with the external input starts
If set to [Yes], the IV-G15 (Expansion) emits to when the status results output with the next
light after lighting on the IV-G10 (Main) finishes. trigger are input.

[Close] button.
The system returns to the I/O Settings screen of
the sensor.

Output Settings zz
Common Output Settings
The screen to select the output type opens by
1 Tap the [Settings] button of the Output Settings. tapping the [Common Output Settings] button.
Changing the timing of the status output (Page 7-7)
[Latching]
Outputs the result along with the judgment
condition of the sensor.
2 Set the Output Settings of the sensor.

6

[One-Shot]
Sets the one-shot time and ON-delay time in
which output the status output with one-shot.
zz
OUT1 to OUT8 (IV-G series)/
OUT1 to OUT4 (IV series)
Specifies the output format of the output line
with [N.O] or [N.C].
zz
Main/Expansion Logic Out
This setting can be made only when the yyOne-Shot ON Time

sensor amplifier connected is the IV-G10 Specifies the flash width of the one-shot within
(Main). 1 to 1000 msec.
Set the logic output of the IV-G10 (Main) and yyON-Delay Time
IV-G15 (Expansion). Specifies the ON-delay time of the one-shot
flash within 0 to 5000 msec.
For details of settings by the slider or inputting

value, refer to Editing the value with the
slider (Page 3-17).

yy AND : Output when output on both the [Close] button.
IV-G10 (Main) and IV-G15 The system returns to the I/O Settings screen of
(Expansion) is set to ON. the sensor.
yy OR : Output when output on either the
IV-G10 (Main) or IV-G15
(Expansion) is set to ON.
yy OFF : No logic output.
Polarity I/O Monitor

Whether or not the I/O line for control is correctly
1 Select the [NPN] or [PNP] under Polarity. wired can be confirmed.
1 Tap the [Go] button in the I/O Monitor.
yyNPN
Output circuit.....NPN open collector
6 Input circuit........No-voltage input
yyPNP
2 Set the I/O Monitor settings.
Output circuit.....PNP open collector

Input circuit........Voltage input
Cables (Page 2-17)

3 Tap the [OK] button. zz

Input
The system returns to the Sensor Advanced screen.
Displays the input status of external input in
real time. Whether or not the ON/OFF output
from the PLC is being correctly input can be
confirmed.
zz
Output
Tap the [ON] button to turn ON the each OUT
output. Tap the [OFF] button to turn them OFF.
Confirm that the PLC or the display lamp is
correctly output.
OUT1 to OUT8 are set on the IV-G series, and

OUT1 to OUT4 are set on the IV series.

[Close] button.
The system returns to the I/O Settings screen of
the sensor.

Device settings Device Name

Sets the sensor name and password lock. The sensor can be arbitrary named and controlled.
When the [Edit] button is tapped, the dialog to enter
1 Tap the [Sensor Advanced] button in the a device name opens.
Sensor Setup Menu screen. Enter the arbitrary name and tap the [OK] button.
2 Tap the [Environmental] button, and then

the [Device Name/Pass] button. yyIf the display language (Page 6-61) is changed,
the device name might be replaced and
displayed as hyphens (-).
yyTo use the PROFINET function, use only a-z,
0-9, -, and .. For the setting details, refer
to IV/IV-G Series Users Manual (Field
Network). 6
yyWhen you changed the device name while the

PROFINET communication is being used, the
sensor restarts.
3 Set the device settings of the sensor.
Device Name (Page 6-37)


button.

Password Lock
Sets the password to the sensor to prevent the
incorrect operation.
Correctly use the password lock of the sensor and

the touch screen lock of the monitor (Page 6-60).
yyTo enable the password lock, open the run screen.
yyTo disable, input the password when the input
dialog for the password to disable appears.
yyDuring the password lock, editing the Sensor
Setup is locked ([Sensor Setup] button/[Trig]
button on the run screen, threshold adjustment,
image history view (if unable to log in), clearing
6 the image history, Transfer Program Settings).
yyIf the password lock is temporarily cancelled in
the menu ON screen (Page 5-4), the lock is

cancelled until the system turns to the menu OFF
screen (Page 5-4).
1 Tap the [Settings] button under Security.

2 Select [ON] and tap the [Edit] button.
3 Set a desired password in the password

settings screen.
yyDefault: None (blank)

yyFor details of how to enter characters, refer
to Inputting characters (Page 3-19).

The password confirmation dialog appears.
5 Enter the password set in step 3 and tap

the [OK] button.
The system returns to the Security screen.
6 Tap the [Close] button.

The password will be changed and the system
returns to the Device Name/Pass screen.

Network Settings 3 Sets the network address of the sensor.

Sets the network of the sensor.
yyFor details of the monitor's network settings,

refer to Network Settings (Page 6-59).
yyThe settings are not required for direct connection.
yyHow to use the network setting
yyThe IP address of the sensor connected to the
network can be changed.
yyThe network settings of the sensor can be zz
MAC Address
initialized.
Displays the MAC address of the sensor. The
The settings can also be initialized using the
MAC address cannot be changed.
IP reset switch (Page A-43) of the sensor.
yyTo set the IP address before connecting to zz
IP Address/Subnet Mask/Default Gateway 6
the network, it can be set by connecting the
Displays the address for each network.

monitor and sensor directly.
Tapping the [Edit] button opens the screen to
yyWhen you changed the device name while the
PROFINET communication is being used, the edit the address.
sensor restarts. Set the desired address and tap the [OK] button.
1 Tap the [Sensor Advanced] button in the For the port number setting, perform it on the
Sensor Setup Menu screen. editing screen for the IP address.
2 Tap the [Environmental] button, and then zz

[Reset] button
the [Network Settings] button. Tapping the [Reset] button resets the IP Address /
Subnet Mask / Default Gateway.
Empty will be displayed after the reset.

button.
yyIf connected directly, the system returns to the
Sensor Advanced screen.
yyIf connected to the network, terminate the
connection to the sensor and reconnect it. If
the reconnection is successful, the Sensor
Setup Menu screen will be displayed. If the
reconnection fails, the Monitor Settings screen
will be displayed.

Advanced Network Settings FTP

Sets the FTP client function and the field network Automatically transfers the image data and status
settings for the sensor. result information saved in the sensor memory to
an FTP server.
1 Tap the [Sensor Advanced] button in the LAN
Sensor Setup Menu screen. Data transfer via FTP
2 Tap the [Environmental] button, and then

the [Adv. Network Settings] button.
FTP client FTP server

6
yyTo use the FTP client function, select [Network
Connection] for the connection setting of the

sensor. During the direct connection, the setting
The Adv. Network Settings screen opens. item is shaded and cannot be selected.
yyIf data are not transferred properly with the FTP
3 Sets the Advanced Network Settings of client function, refer to Remedy when data
the sensor. transfer via FTP is unavailable (Page A-41).
1 Tap the [Settings] button in the FTP.
FTP (Page 6-40)

Field Network (Page 6-46)

[Close] button.
The system returns to the Sensor Advanced
screen.

2 Tap the [ON] button in FTP Client. 2 Set the network address of the FTP server.
zz
IP Address
yyWhen the FTP client function is set to [ON], Displays the IP address of the FTP server.
the image history will be cleared. When the [Edit] button is tapped, the IP Address
yyThe number of images which can be saved
screen opens.
to the image history when using the FTP
client function are as follows.
Set an arbitrary address and tap the [OK] button. 6
yyColor type................. 70 images

yyMonochrome type..... 210 images yyThe port number setting can be done on the
edit screen of IP Address.
3 Sets the FTP setting of the sensor. yyDefault port number : 21
FTP Destination Settings (Page 6-41) zz
User Name
Transfer Condition Settings (Page 6-42)
Input the user name for logging in to the FTP
Transfer Destination Folder Settings (Page 6-44)
server.
4 After the setting is completed, tap the [OK] When the [Edit] button is tapped, the User Name
screen opens.
button.
Set an arbitrary address and tap the [OK] button.
The system returns to the Adv. Network Settings
screen.
FTP Destination Settings yyFor details of how to enter characters, refer

1 Tap the [Settings] button in the FTP
Destination. zz
Password
Input the password for logging in to the FTP
server.
When the [Edit] button is tapped, the Password
screen opens.
Set an arbitrary password and tap the [OK]
button.

The FTP Destination screen opens.
zz
Passive Mode
To use the passive mode, tap the [Enable] button.

3 Tap the [Connection Test] button to

Transfer Condition Settings
test the connection with the connection
destination. 1 Tap the [Settings] button in the Transfer
Condition.
The connection test is performed and the result

window opens. The Transfer Condition screen opens.
6 2 Set the file transfer conditions.
If [Successfully connected.] is displayed, the

setting is completed.
zz
Transfer Condition
When the test is executed, the connection with Selects the transfer condition of image data.
the FTP server, folder creating at the transfer yyAll......................Transfers all the images that
destination, and data file creating are tested. are judged.
yyNG Only............Transfers all the images whose
When the connection cannot be done properly, total status results are NG.
deal with the problem in accordance with the
cause of connect failure displayed on the yyWhen the transfer condition is set to [All],
result window. adjust the processing time so that all the
Remedy when data transfer via FTP is images can be transferred.
unavailable (Page A-41) yyWhen the transfer could not be done on
time, the data are saved in the internal
4 Tap the [OK] button. buffer. The internal buffer can save images
up to 30 images.
The system returns to the FTP Destination
yyImage data are transferred in the sequence that
screen.
they have been saved to the internal buffer.
5 After the setting is completed, tap the [OK] yyWhen the remaining capacity of the internal
buffer is insufficient, an FTP error occurs and
button.
the image data transfer fails.
The system returns to the main screen of the
yyWhen the transfer condition is set to [All],
FTP Settings. confirm that there is sufficient storage area
on the FTP server.

zz
File Format zz
OK/NG Criteria Info Addition
Selects the file saving format for image data. Tap the [ON] button to add the tool window
yyIVP (frame) and total status results (OK/NG) to the
Transfers the image data as the format which
image data to be transferred to the FTP server.
can be opened by IV-Navigator. Operation
results can be confirmed in the simulator The setting can be made only when the file
function by using the transferred image data. format is set to [BMP].
Moreover, the image data can be converted to Example of the image to be transferred
the BMP format by using the IVP-Converter.
yyBMP
Transfers the image data as the format which
can be opened by other applications.
zz
Transfer Judgment Results
To transfer judgement results simultaneously
with the image data, select [ON].
Judgement results are transferred as a tab Total Status OK Total Status NG 6
delimited text.

If the imaging area is set to Width: 32 pixel
The example for displaying the saved results or less or Height: 24 pixel or less, OK/
file with Microsoft Excel is as follows. NG will not be displayed on the image to be
transferred. While if the imaging area is set
to Width: 160 pixel or less or Height: 120
pixel or less, the OK/NG display will become
smaller.

button.
zz
FTP Error
To turn ON the error output function for when a
file transfer failed, select [ON]. FTP Settings.
When this item is set to [ON], the followings

occur if a file transfer fails.
yyThe following error messages are displayed
in response to the causes of failure.
- FTP Connection Error
- FTP Transfer Error (Transfer Failed)
- FTP Transfer Error (Insufficient Data Buffer)
Remedy when data transfer via FTP is
unavailable (Page A-41)
yyThe error output function turns ON.
yyThe indicator light of the sensor blinks in red.
yyIf FTP Transfer Error has occurred while
the sensor is running, the error condition will
continue until the error is cleared.


Transfer Destination Folder Settings zz
File Name
Sets the file name of the transfer files.
1 Tap the [Settings] button in the Transfer When the [Edit] button is tapped, the File Name
Destination Folder. screen opens.
Set an arbitrary file name and tap the [OK] button.
yyDefault: None (black). Up to 16 characters

can be set.
yyThe transfer file naming rule is as follows.
xxxxxx_AAAAA_BB_CC.DDD
The Transfer Destination Folder screen opens. yyxxxxxx.......The file name which has been
6 2 Specify the transfer destination folder of
set (up to 16 characters)
yyAAAAA......A sequence number for each
FTP server. FTP transfer (5 digits which
zero suppression is not used).

Promptly after startup, 00000
is displayed.
yyBB.............The program number (2 digits
which zero suppression is not
used)
yyCC.............The total status result
(OK or NG)
yyDDD..........The extension (ivp or bmp)
zz
Folder
Specifies the transfer destination folder of FTP server. yyIf there is a file with the same name at
Set an arbitrary folder name. the transfer destination, that file will be
yyInput is not necessary if the image data is to overwritten. When you transfer image data
be transferred to the root folder. from multiple IV/IV-G series, specify different
yyTo specify a subfolder, break it with / (one- transfer destinations so that the image data
byte slash). are not overwritten accidentally.
yyIf the specified folder does not exist, a new yyIf the transfer destination folder is read only
folder will be created. or is opened, an FTP error will occur and the
When the [Edit] button is tapped, the Folder image data transfer will fail.
screen opens.
Set an arbitrary folder name and tap the [OK] button.
yyDefault: None (blank). Up to 16 characters

can be set.
yy/ (one-byte slash), . (one-byte point) and

(one-byte space) cannot be used as the
first nor last letter of the folder name.
yy/ (one-byte slash) cannot be used multiple
times in a row.

zz
Fixed File Name zz
Create Subfolder
The file name of the image data to be To create subfolders under the transfer
transferred to the FTP can be fixed. destination folder, select [ON].
If [OFF] is selected, the file name will be the
name set in [ File Name]. yyThe subfolder naming rule is as follows.
If [ON] is selected, the name with the program IVxxxxx
number and total status results removed from (xxxxx is a sequence number created
every time the sensor is restarted or the
the name set in [ File Name] will be the file
FTP settings are changed.)
name.
yyWhen subfolders were created, the folder
structure is as follows.
yyThe transfer file naming rule is as follows:
Root folder
xxxxxx_AAAAA.DDD
yyxxxxxx...............The file name which
6
Transfer destination folder
has been set (up to 16
Subfolder
characters)

yyAAAAA..............A sequence number for 0000
each FTP transfer (5 digits 0001
which zero suppression is
0002
not used).
Promptly after startup, When the file index quantity reaches the index
00000 is displayed. upper limit, the folder of the next sequence
number is created.
yyDDD..................The extension (ivp or
bmp) is displayed.
yyIf the file name is to be fixed to the same yyThe default of subfolders is IV00001.
name, set [Index Upper Limit] to 0. If 0 is yyThe upper limit is IV99999. When the upper
set, the file name will be as described below. limit has been reached, the count continues
yyIf the file name is set by returning to IV00000.
xxxxxx yyThe subfolder name cannot be initialized.
yyIf the file name is not set yyThe upper limit of the count number of folders
AAAAA in the subfolder is 9999. When the number
is over the upper limit, the transfer stops.
zz
Index Upper Limit
Sets the upper limit of the number of image
data which can be transferred to the transfer
button.
destination folder.
FTP Settings.
When the file index quantity has reached the
index upper limit, as follows.
yyWhen the [Create Subfolder] is set to [ON],
the folder of the next sequence number is
created.
yyWhen the [Create Subfolder] is set to [OFF],
the file index quantity returns to 0.

Field Network
Communicates with a PLC via a field network and the status result, etc., can be input to the PLC as
communication data.
For the communication protocol, EtherNet/IP and PROFINET can be selected.
Host device such as PLC

(EtherNet/IP, PROFINET master unit)
6
Sensor EtherNet/IP, PROFINET adapter
yyTo use the field network function, select [Network Connection] for the connection setting of the sensor.
During the direct connection, the setting item is shaded and cannot be selected.
yyWhen the protocol setting has been changed, the connection is terminated and the sensor restarts.
yyFor the details of the field network function, refer to IV/IV-G Series Users Manual (Field Network).
1 Tap the [Settings] button in the Field 3 To enable the handshake control, select
Network. [Enable].
2 Select the protocol. When the protocol is set as [Disable], this

setting item is shaded and cannot be selected.

button.
The system returns to the Adv. Network Settings
screen.

Tilt Correction
If the sensor cannot be installed in the front of the target due to the installation restrictions of the sensor
and target and/or to prevent a shine on the targets surface, the image of the target may be trapezoidally
distorted.
The tilt correction corrects these images and displays them without distortion.
Vertical correction Horizontal correction
Indicator light
Top view
Top view 6
Target

Target
Indicator light
Target Target
Lateral view Lateral view
Before tilt correction After tilt correction Before tilt correction After tilt correction
(vertical) (horizontal)

1 Tap the [Sensor Advanced] button in the zz

Vertical
Sensor Setup Menu screen. Performs a tilt correction in the vertical direction.
Slide the slider to [+] or [-] to correct the display
2 Tap the [Setup Adjustment] button and of the vertical direction of the taken image.
then the [Tilt Correction] button.
Before correction After correction Before correction

<Image of vertical correction>
zz
Horizontal
Performs a tilt correction in the horizontal direction.
Slide the slider to [+] or [-] to correct the display
6 The information screen opens. of the horizontal direction of the taken image.

4 Image a target to be a reference such as a

piece of paper printed with square grids. Before correction After correction Before correction
<Image of horizontal correction>
yyIf the quality of the taken image displayed on

the monitor is poor, tap the [Image Settings]
button to adjust the taken image.
The following adjustments can be made.
5 Perform the tilt correction. Lighting (Page 4-21)
yyMake sure the target fits within the imaging
area after tilt correction. The imaging area
after the tilt correction may have become
narrower than before the correction by the tilt
correction.

button.
zz
OFF
Tilt correction is not performed. After performing a tilt correction, a message
prompting you to re-register the master image
appears.
Re-register the master image after the [OK]
button is tapped.
The system returns to the sensor advanced screen.

Rotate 180 3 Image a desired target.

The image of a target may be rotated 180 and
displayed due to the installation restrictions of the
sensor and target. The rotate 180 function rotates
the image displayed on the monitor 180.
Indicator light
If the quality of the taken image displayed on
the monitor is poor, tap the [Image Settings]
button to adjust the taken image.
The following adjustments can be performed.
yy Auto Brightness Adjustment (Page 4-12)
6
yy Focus Adjustment (Page 4-13)

yy Advanced Brightness Adjustment (Page 4-21)
yy Lighting (Page 4-21)
4 Tap the [ON] button.

The display of the monitor will be displayed with
the image rotated 180.
Target
Before rotate 180

correction
After rotate 180
correction 5 Tap the [OK] button.
1 Tap the [Sensor Advanced] button in the yyAfter performing a rotate 180 correction, a
message prompting you to re-register the
master image appears.
2 Tap the [Setup Adjustment] button, and Re-register the master image after the [OK]
button is tapped.
then the [Rotate 180] button.
2. Master Registration (Registering an
Image as a Reference for Judgment)
(Page 4-24)
yyIf a tilt correction (Page 6-47) has also been
performed, confirm the tilt correction settings
after a rotate 180 correction.

White Balance (for color type only) 4 Image a white-colored target and tap the
[Go] button.
Adjusts the white balance (color tint) of the built-in
camera of the sensor.
The white balance is adjusted by default.
1 Tap the [Sensor Advanced] button in the

2 Tap the [Setup Adjustment] button, and After the white balance adjustment is completed,
then the [White Balance] button. the message "White balance complete." appears.

The system returns to the White Balance screen.

After performing a white balance adjustment,
a message prompting you to re-register the
The White Balance screen opens. master image appears.
3 Tap the [Execute] button. button is tapped.
2. Master Registration ( Registering an Image
To initialize the white balance which has been

set, tap the [Initialize] button and tap the [OK]
button on the confirmation dialog.
If the taken image displayed on the monitor is

not suitable for adjusting the white balance,
tap the [Image Settings] button to adjust
the taken image. Also, if the white balance
has been set to [Enable], the image will be
displayed with the white balance adjustment
applied.
The following adjustments can be performed.
yy Auto Brightness Adjustment (Page 4-12)
yy Focus Adjustment (Page 4-13)
yy Advanced Brightness Adjustment (Page 4-21)
yy Lighting (Page 4-21)

Program Switch Method Auto Focus Adjustment Position

Sets the method for switching the program number. (auto focus type only)
Changeover for a Target (Program Functions) Sets whether or not to make the adjusting position
(Page 6-15) for the auto focus common to all programs.
1 Tap the [Sensor Advanced] button in the 1 Tap the [Sensor Advanced] button in the
Sensor Setup Menu screen. Sensor Setup Menu screen.
2 Tap the [Program] button and tap the 2 Tap the [Program] button and tap the [Auto
[Program Switch Method] button. Focus Adj Pos] button.

3 Set a program switch method. 3 Set an auto focus adjustment position.
yyMonitor/PC.........The program number is

switched by the monitor or IV-
zz
Common
Sets the focus adjustment position common to
Navigator (IV-H1) operation.
all programs. Select this when the focus position
yyExternal IN........The program number is
of the target registered in each program is
switched by the external input.
common. The program can be quickly switched
because re-adjustment of the focusing position
To use the [External IN], any of the program
will not be performed when the program number
bit0 to bit4 must be assigned to any of the IN2
is switched.
to IN6 in the input settings.
Input Settings (Page 6-33) zz
Individual
Sets the focus adjustment position in each
4 After the setting is completed, tap the [OK] program. Select this when the focus position
button. is different for each target registered in each
program. Re-adjusts the focusing position when
the program number is switched. Switching
programs takes longer in this option due to the
time needed to adjust the focusing position.

Sensor Information
The duration for the operation count of the
focusing function (program switch count) Displays the information set in the sensor.
is 100,000 times. If the focusing position The model, version, serial number, MAC address,
does not need to be changed for each IP address, and device name can be confirmed.
program, set the Auto Focus Adj Pos to
Common to extend its duration. 1 Tap the [Sensor Advanced] button in the
4 After the setting is completed, tap the [OK] 2 Tap the [System] button and then the
button.
[Sensor Information] button.
When the auto focus adjustment position is set

to [Common], a message recommending re-
6 registration of the master image appears.
button is tapped.

The information set in the sensor will be displayed.
zz
IV series
zz
IV-G series
The monitor information (Page 6-63) can be

confirmed by tapping the [Monitor Information]
button at the lower left of the screen.
3 After the information is confirmed, tap the

[OK] button.

Initializing the sensor

Initializes the information set in the sensor and sets
to the factory default.
For details of procedures, refer to Initializing the
sensor (Page 3-15).
yyThe following settings will not be initialized.

yyPolarity (Switching NPN/PNP) (Page 6-36)
yyNetwork Settings (Page 6-39)
yyUse the "Initialize monitor" function to initialize
the information set in the monitor.
Initializing the monitor (Page 3-16)
6
Updating the sensor

Updates the operation software of the sensor.
For details, refer to KEYENCE homepage.

Monitor Settings Monitor Environment

The section explains the monitor settings displayed
zz
Language
by tapping the [Monitor Settings] button with the
Selects the language to be displayed on the
state that the menu display of the monitor is set to
monitor.
ON.
Language (Page 6-61)
zz
Time
Confirms or changes the time set in the monitor.
Time (Page 6-62)
zz
Backlight
Sets the backlight of the monitor.
6 Backlight (Page 6-62)
zz
Touch Panel Calibration
Adjusts the position to be touched of the

monitor.
Touch Panel Calibration (Page 6-63)
System
zz
Monitor Information
Displays the information set in the monitor.
Monitor Information (Page 6-63)
Sensor Connect
Performs the settings for connecting with the
zz
Initialize Monitor
Initializes the information set in the monitor.
sensor.
Initialize Monitor (Page 6-64)
Sensor Connect (Page 6-55)
zz
Update Monitor
Updates the software version of the monitor.
Monitor Device Settings Update Monitor (Page 6-64)
zz
Network Settings
Performs the network settings of the monitor.
zz
Display Settings
Performs the settings for the screens and
buttons to be displayed on the monitor.
Display Settings (Page 6-59)
zz
Touch Screen Lock
Sets to prevent the incorrect operation of the
monitor.
Touch Screen Lock (Page 6-60)

Sensor Connect
yyIf the sensor cannot be connected, refer to
Performs the settings for connecting with the sensor. Remedy when direct connection (1unit) is
unavailable (Page A-29).
When directly connecting with a yyFor the direct connection, the IP address is
sensor (1 unit) automatically set.
yyIf the monitor is directly connected with the
1 Tap the [Monitor Settings] button with the sensor when the PROFINET function is being
used, the PROFINET function will stop. To
state that the menu display of the monitor use the PROFINET function again, restart the
is set to ON. sensor.
2 Tap the [Direct/Network] button.

6

yyIf the monitor and a sensor has been
connected directly (1 unit), the [Direct
Connection (1 unit)] will be displayed.
yyPerform the procedure from step 3 only if an
IP address is displayed (network connected).
3 Tap the [1 unit] button and tap the [OK]

button.

After the restart, the run screen or the Sensor
Setup Menu screen opens.

Searching the sensor begins.

When directly connecting with multiple
sensors (2 units or more)

is set to ON.
2 Tap the [Direct/Network] button.

result will be displayed.
6 Select a sensor to be connected and tap
the [Connect] button.
6
If the monitor and a sensor have been

connected directly, the [Direct Connection
(2 units or more)] will be displayed.
3 Tap the [2 units or more] button and tap

the [OK] button. yyBy tapping the [LED Blinking] button, the
indicator light of the selected device operates
as described below. Use this function for
checking the sensor.
For the IV-G series
yyThe indicator light on the sensor head
blinks alternately (green and red).
yyThe indicator light on the sensor amplifier
blinks (orange).
For the IV series
yyThe light on the sensor blinks (orange).
The confirmation dialog appears. yyBy tapping the [Device Name Setting] button,
the screen for entering the device name will
4 Tap the [OK] button. open. For details, refer to
(Page 6-37).
Device Name
The monitor restarts. yyBy tapping the [Search Again] button, the
search for a sensor will restart.
5 Tap the [Search Sensor] button. The run screen or the Sensor Setup Menu
screen opens.
yyIf the sensor cannot be connected, refer to

Remedy when direct connection (2 units or
more) is unavailable (Page A-30).
yyFor direct connection (2 units or more), the
IP address is automatically set.
yyThe sensor on which PROFINET has been
set will not be detected.

When connecting with the sensor via a 4 Tap the [OK] button.
network After the restart, the sensor connection setup
1 Tap the [Monitor Settings] button with the zz

screen opens.
Searching for and connecting to sensors on
is set to ON. the network
2 Tap the [Direct/Network] button. Tap the [Search Sensor] button.

The searched result will be displayed.
Select the sensor to be connected using the [<]
When the monitor and the sensor are connected or the [>] button and tap the [Connect] button.
via network, the [Network Connection] will be
displayed and the IP address of the connected
sensor will be displayed.
3 Tap the [Network Connection] button and

After connecting, the run screen or the Sensor

When a sensor without a set IP address is

selected and the [Connect] button is tapped,
The confirmation dialog appears. the confirmation dialog appears.
The information dialog appears when the [OK]
button is tapped. The screen to set the sensor
yyIf the FTP client function is to be set to [ON], network settings opens when the [OK] button
select [Network Connection]. is tapped.
yyIf the field network is to be set to [EtherNet/IP] Tap the [Edit] button, set the IP address, the
or [PROFINET], select [Network Connection]. subnet mask, and the default gateway, and
then tap the [Connect] button.

zz
Specifying the IP address of and
yyBOOTP is used for assigning the IP address connecting to the sensor
to the sensor. Tap the [Specify Sensor] button.
Settings after initialization (Page A-43)
yyThe search time is about 10 seconds.
yySearching range and retrievable number of
units are as follows.
yySensor with no IP address (default) :
A maximum of 8 units can be retrieved
within a range that the BOOTP packet from
the sensor reaches (Page A-43).
yySensor with IP address :
A maximum of 16 units can be retrieved on The screen to input the IP address of the sensor
the local network to which the monitor is to be connected opens.
6 connected. Input the IP address of the sensor to be
connected and tap the [Connect] button.
yyWhen the [Ping Test] is tapped after the IP

address is input, you can confirm whether or
not a sensor with the specified IP address
exists on the network.
yyTo set a port number, set it using the [PORT]
button.
After connecting, the run screen or the Sensor
If the connection cannot be established, refer

to Remedy when connection via a network
is unavailable (Page A-31).

Network Settings Display Settings

Performs the settings of the network address of the Sets the display method of the screens or messages
monitor. to be displayed on the monitor.
1 Tap the [Monitor Settings] button with the 1 Tap the [Monitor Settings] button with the
state that the menu display of the monitor state that the menu display of the monitor
is set to ON. is set to ON.
2 Tap the [Monitor Device Settings] button, 2 Tap the [Monitor Device Settings] button,
and then the [Network Settings] button.

3 Set the individual display item.
3 Set the network address for the monitor.
zz
Manual Trigger
Sets to enable/disable the [Trig] button in the
zz
MAC Address
run screen when the Trigger Options are set to
Displays the MAC address for the monitor. The
[External] or when the [Internal Trigger Control
MAC address cannot be changed.
with IN1 Input] is set to [Yes].
zz
IP Address/Subnet Mask/Default Gateway Names and Functions of the Operation
Tapping the [Edit] button displays the screen to Screen (Page 5-4)
edit the address.
Set the arbitrary address and tap the [OK] button. The [Trig] button displayed in the settings
screen cannot be set to hidden.
4 After the setting is completed, tap the [OK] zz
Update Image in RUN Mode
button.
Sets the display to ON/OFF for the taken image
The message "Monitor will be restarted." appears.
to be displayed on the monitor. Usually the setting
is set to ON.
5 Tap the [OK] button. zz
Tool Auto Tuning Guide
Sets the Tool Auto Tuning Guide to show/hide.
After the restart, the run screen opens.
The display automatically turns OFF by tapping the
[Hide Next] button in the Tool Auto Tuning Guide.

zz
NG hold function Touch Screen Lock
Make settings for the NG hold function.
Sets the password on the monitor to prevent
Holding the Image of the Sensor on
misoperation of the touch panel.
which NG Occurred(NG Hold Function)
(Page 6-14) yyTo enable the touch screen lock, turn the screen to
the menu OFF screen on the run screen (Page 5-4).
zz
List of NG Sensor Occurrences function
yyTo disable it, tap the [Menu] button and input the
Make settings for the List of NG Sensor
password.
Occurrences.
yyDuring the touch screen lock, operations other
Confirming the NG Occurrence Status of
than the tool selection and image capture are
the Sensor Connected(List of NG Sensor
locked.
Occurrences Function) (Page 6-10)
zz
Display on Startup
Make settings for the display of List of NG
6 Sensor Occurrences ON/OFF for startup of the
is set to ON.
monitor.
Setting the List of NG Sensor Occurrences 2 Tap the [Monitor Device Settings] button
(Page 6-12) and then the [Touch Screen Lock] button.

button.
The system returns to the Monitor Settings screen.
3 Select [Enable] and tap the [Edit] button.
4 Set the arbitrary password in the

password settings screen.

yyFor details of how to enter characters, refer to

The password confirmation dialog appears.

6 Enter the password set in step 4 and tap Language

the [OK] button.
Selects the language to be displayed on the monitor.
The system returns to the Touch Screen Lock
screen.
7 Tap the [OK] button. is set to ON.
The system returns to the Monitor Settings
screen. 2 Tap the [Monitor Environment] button and
then the [Language] button.
For efficiently using the touch screen lock and

password lock (Page 6-38),
yyThe touch screen lock function locks the touch
screen operation of the monitor to prevent
misoperations of the monitor and the sensor
6
connected to the monitor.

yyThe password lock function locks the sensor
settings. It does not lock the operations and
settings of the monitor. 3 Select the button of the language to be
yyTo lock editing the sensor settings with multiple displayed on the monitor and tap the [OK]
monitors or the IV-Navigator (IV-H1), use the button.
password lock function. It cannot protect from
the misoperations by the monitor or IV-Navigator
(IV-H1) that the touch screen lock is not applied.
The information screen opens.

After the restart, the display language will be
switched to the selected language and the run
screen opens.
Regarding the display of the characters in device

names (Page 6-37) and program names (Page 6-19)
yyCharacters which cannot be display with
the language after change are replaced and
displayed as hyphens (-).
yyIf the device or program name has not been changed
after you changed a language, those name can be
displayed as they were in the previous language once
you change back a language into the previous one.
yyIf the device or program name has been changed
after the language change, it will remain replaced
by hyphens (-) and the former information will be
erased when the language is changed back.

Time Backlight
Sets the date and time of the monitor. Sets the backlight of the monitor.
yyThis setting is adjusted by default. The monitor recovers from dim mode when the
yyThe date and time information are used for touch panel is operated or when an error occurs
saving files into the USB memory.
1 Tap the [Monitor Settings] button with the state that the menu display of the monitor
state that the menu display of the monitor is set to ON.
is set to ON.
2 Tap the [Monitor Environment] button and
2 Tap the [Monitor Environment] button and then the [Backlight] button.
then the [Time] button.
6
3 Set the backlight of the monitor.

3 Set the date and time of the monitor.
zz
Backlight Brightness
yyMove the input cursor to the item to set by the Adjusts the brightness of the backlight.
[] or [] button and enter the numbers. The brightness can be adjusted between level 1 to 7
yyTap the [Delete] button to reset the display of (default : 5).
the selected item. zz
Auto Off
Selects the [Enable]/[Disable] for the Auto Off
4 After the setting is completed, tap the [OK] function.
button. zz
Auto Off Time Delay
The system returns to the Monitor Settings screen. This is available when the [Enable] is selected for
the Auto Off function. Sets the time delay of the
monitor to be dimmed. Also, after 30 minutes since
the monitor being dimmed, the monitor turns off.
Options: 30 sec/1 min/5 min/10 min/30 min
button.

Touch Panel Calibration Monitor Information

Adjusts the position to be touched of the touch panel. Displays the information set in the monitor.
Displays the model, version, serial number, MAC
This setting is adjusted by default. address, and IP address.
1 Tap the [Monitor Settings] button with the 1 Tap the [Monitor Settings] button with the
is set to ON.
is set to ON.
2 Tap the [Monitor Environment] button and 2 Tap the [System] button and then the
[Monitor Information] button.
tap the [Touch Panel Calibration] button.

The information set in the monitor will be
displayed.
The screen switches to the screen to adjust the
position to be tapped.
4 Follow the message displayed on the

monitor and tap the center of the cross
mark ( ) in order.
The sensor information (Page 6-52) can be

confirmed by tapping the [Sensor Information]
button at the lower left of the screen.
3 After the information is confirmed, tap the

[OK] button.
After the adjustment for the positions to be tapped The system returns to the Monitor Settings
is completed, the message "Touch panel calibration screen.
completed. Touch the screen to exit." appears.
5 Tap the monitor.


Initialize Monitor
Initializes the information set in the monitor and set
to the factory default.
For details of procedures, refer to Initializing the
monitor (Page 3-16).
yyThe following settings will not be initialized.

yyLanguage (Page 6-61)
yyTime (Page 6-62)
yyUse the "Initialize Sensor" function to initialize
the information set in the sensor.
Initializing the sensor (Page 3-15)
6
Update Monitor
Updates the operation software of the monitor.

For details, refer to KEYENCE homepage.

7
This chapter explains how the input / output
terminal controls each operation.
Controlling with
Input/Output Line
Controlling Timing of Judgment with

Triggers...............................................................7-2
Importing the Status Output..............................7-5
Changing Over....................................................7-8
Registering the Master Image...........................7-9
Clearing Errors.................................................7-11
Operations when Power of the Sensor is
Turned on..........................................................7-12 7
Input Response Time.......................................7-13
Controlling with the Input/Output Line

Controlling Timing of Judgment with Triggers
For details of the trigger, refer to Setting the Trigger Options (Page 4-8).
External trigger
When the [Trigger Options] is set to [External], imaging and judgment are performed at the timing of
inputting the external trigger input.
Trigger 1 Trigger 2 Trigger 3 Trigger 4

Min
100 s Min 1.2 ms
ON
External trigger input (1) (5)
OFF
Processing time
ON
BUSY output (2)
OFF
Max 2 ms
Judgment process (3)

(internal)
Trigger delay
7 Total status output Min 0.2 ms

Status output of each tool ON
Previous result Result from Trigger 1 Result from Trigger 2 Result from Trigger 4
Position adjustment output OFF
(4)
Output of each logic Max 2 ms

ON
Trigger error output
OFF
(1) Positions the target and inputs external trigger. The shortest input time is 100 s for ON, and 1.2 ms for
OFF.
(2) BUSY output function turns ON. Processing time differs depending on the settings.
(3) After the trigger delay time (Page 4-8) elapses, the target is imaged and the judgment process is
performed.
(4) After the judgment process is completed, it updates status output and the BUSY output function is
turned OFF. Confirms that the BUSY output is turned OFF, then imports the status output.
(5) If the external trigger is input while the BUSY is being output, the input is ignored and a trigger error
occurs. Trigger 3 is not judged. To output the trigger error, set the trigger error within the Output
Assignment (Page 4-64) under Settings Navigator to [ON].
yyThe ON status of each output is as follows.

When Output Settings (Page 6-35) are [N.O.] : Status with NPN or PNP open collector ON.
When Output Settings (Page 6-35) are [N.C.] : Status with NPN or PNP open collector OFF.
yyThe ON status of each input indicates 0 V line is shorted when the Polarity (Page 6-36) is NPN, and
indicates that voltage is applied within the 0 V line when the Polarity is PNP.
yyThe edge trigger for activating timing or in deactivating timing can be set for the external trigger input.
yyThe trigger error output function turns OFF when the next trigger is activated, when the error is cleared,
when the program is switched, or when the system moves to the settings screen.
yyWhen the output mode (Page 6-35) of status output is set to [Latching]. When the output mode is set to
[One-Shot], refer to Changing the timing of the status output (Page 7-7).

Internal trigger
When the [Trigger Options] is set to [Internal], imaging and judgment are performed at the timing of set
trigger interval.
Internal trigger Trigger 1 Trigger 2 Trigger 3 Trigger 4 Trigger 5
Trigger interval Trigger interval Trigger interval Trigger interval

(1)
Processing time
(5)
ON
BUSY output (2)
OFF
Judgment process (3)

(internal)
Min 0.2 ms
Total status output
Previous result Result from Trigger 1 Result from Trigger 2 Result from Trigger 4
Position adjustment output OFF (4)
Output of each logic

ON
OFF
7

(1) Inputs internal trigger in the trigger interval being set.
(2) BUSY output function turns ON at the timing that internal trigger occurred. Processing time differs
depending on the settings.
(3) The target is imaged and judged. No trigger delay settings.
(4) After the judgment process is completed, it updates status output and the BUSY output function is
turned OFF. Confirms that the BUSY output is turned OFF, then imports the status output.
(5) If the internal trigger is input while the BUSY is being output, the input is ignored and a trigger error
occurs. Trigger 3 is not judged. To output the trigger error, set the trigger error within the Output
Assignment (Page 4-64) under Settings Navigator to [ON].

yyWhen the output mode (Page 6-35) of status output is set to [Latching]. When the output mode is set to
[One-Shot], refer to Changing the timing of the status output (Page 7-7).
yyWhen [Internal Trigger Control with IN1 Input] is set to [Yes], the minimum input ON time is 1 ms and the
minimum input OFF time is 1.2 ms.
The actual interval from IN1 input to an internal trigger output is within set trigger interval + 1 ms.
Set the trigger interval longer than the processing time. If the trigger interval is shorter than the processing
time, the internal trigger will be input during the processing time, so the trigger error will occur.

Operating in the shortest cycle

To input the internal trigger in the shortest cycle and perform the judgment process, set the trigger input to
1 ms. Also, set the trigger error in the Output Assignment of Settings Navigator (Page 4-64) to [OFF] and
ignore the trigger error.
7

Importing the Status Output
Imports the status output assigned to output line of power I/O cable. For details on assigning to output line,
refer to 4. Output Assignment ( Setting Details of Outputting to Output Line) (Page 4-64).
Importing the total status / total status NG output

Total status results of multiple detection tools and position adjustments for the examined target can be
checked.
External trigger/Internal
Trigger 1
trigger
Processing time
White line: OUT 2 ON

Assign the BUSY output OFF
Min 0.2 ms
Black line: OUT 1 ON
Assign the total status/ Previous total status result Total status result of Trigger 1
total status NG output OFF
yyThe operation example when the output mode (Page 6-35) of status output is set to [Latching]. When the 7
output mode is set to [One-Shot], refer to Changing the timing of the status output (Page 7-7).

yyThe total status output turns ON when the total status results were OK.
The total status NG output turns ON when the total status results were NG.
The total status conditions can be selected from [All Tools OK], [Any Tool OK] and [Logic 1] to [Logic 4].
yy[All Tools OK]
When all of the status results of the detection tools and the adjustment result of the position
adjustment result were OK, the total status result is OK.
yy[Any Tool OK]
When any of the status results of the detection tools except that of the position adjustment was OK,
the total status result is OK.
yy[Logic 1] to [Logic 4]
When the logical operation result of the set detection tools was OK, the total status result is OK.
yyThe status result will be kept until the next status result output. However, the output function turns OFF
when the program number is switched or external master image is registered.

Importing the individual status output of each detection tool / logic

The individual status result of the detection tool and position adjustment for the examined target can be checked.
Trigger input Trigger 1
Processing time
Black line: OUT 1 ON

Assign the BUSY output OFF
Min 0.2 ms
White line: OUT 2 ON

Previous result Status result of Tool 1
Assign "Tool 1" OFF
Gray line: OUT 3 ON
Previous result Status result of Tool 2
Assign "Tool 2" OFF
Orange line: OUT 4 ON
Previous result Status result of Logic 1
Assign "Logic 1" OFF
7 yyThe operation example when the output mode (Page 6-35) of status output is set to [Latching]. When the
output mode is set to [One-Shot], refer to Changing the timing of the status output (Page 7-7).
yyThis is an example when the status results of Tool 1, Tool 2, and Logic 1 are to be checked individually.
yyThe status output turns ON when the status result of each tool/logic was OK. Turns OFF when the result
was NG or --.
yyThe status result will be kept until the next status result output. However, the output function turns OFF
when the program number is switched or external master image is registered.

Changing the timing of the status output

The timing of status output can be selected from the [Latching] which links to judgment and [One-Shot]
which outputs for a certain time. For details on settings, refer to Output Settings (Page 6-35).
Trigger 1 Trigger 2
trigger
ON
BUSY output
OFF
Min 0.2 ms
Status output ON
Previous status result Status result of Trigger 1 Status result of Trigger 2
(Latching output) OFF
Status output ON
Status result of Trigger 1 Status result of Trigger 2
(One-Shot output) OFF
Delay time One-Shot ON Time Delay time One-Shot ON Time
yyIn case of [Latching], updates the output by linking with judgment.

yyIn case of [One-Shot], outputs in a set amount of time after the set delay time is passed.
yyWhen the program number is switched or the external master image is registered, the status output turns
OFF before each process is completed. 7

Cancelling One-Shot output
To use the One-Shot output function, the following condition needs to be met.
Trigger input interval (Trigger interval) > One-Shot ON Time
If the above is not met, the following One-Shot output that occurs during the One-Shot outputting is
cancelled and is not output.
Trigger 1 Trigger 2
trigger Trigger input interval
(1)
ON
BUSY output
OFF
Internal process of Trigger ON
(2) Status result of Trigger 1 (internal)
1 OFF
Delay time One-Shot ON Time
Internal process of Trigger ON

(3) Status result of Trigger 2 (internal)
2 OFF
ON
Judgment process Status result of Trigger 1
OFF
(1) This is an example of what happens when the trigger input interval is shorter than the One-Shot ON Time.
(2) To perform the One-Shot output and output the status result of Trigger 1, the previous One-Shot output
is completed, so that outputting can be performed normally.
(3) To perform One-Shot output and output the status result of Trigger 2, the One-Shot output of Trigger 1
is output. Therefore, the output status of Trigger 2 will be cancelled and it will not be output.
yyIf the BUSY time is not constant, meet the following condition to use it. The system might be affected by
a fluctuating BUSY time.
BUSY time + Trigger input interval (Trigger interval) > BUSY time + One-Shot ON Time

Changing Over
Changing Over
Program functions can easily change over by reading out the judgment condition previously saved with the
input line. For details of program functions, refer to Changeover for a Target ( Program Functions) (Page
6-15).
Trigger 1 Trigger 2 Trigger 3
trigger
Min 10 ms
(1) (5)
Program bit0 to bit4 ON
PROG00 PROG01 PROG02
Input OFF
Switching time (T1) Switching time
BUSY output (2)

T2 (4)
ON
Program number PROG00 PROG01 PROG02
OFF
Min 0 ms
Total status output
Previous result Result from Trigger 1
7 Output of each logic (3)
ON
OFF
(1) Keeps the Program bit0 to bit4 input by switching to the state of the program number to be switched.
Minimum input time is 10 ms.
When the [External IN] is selected in the Program Switch Method (Page 6-18)
(2) The BUSY output turns ON while switching the programs. Switching time differs depending on the settings.
(3) The output status (Latching output and One-Shot output) turns OFF before the switching program is completed.
(4) If the program number is switched during the judgment process by the trigger input, the system cancels
the judgment process (result of Trigger 2 is not output). The switching process is delayed by the
canceling process. Delay is time differs depending on the settings.
(5) If the trigger occurs while switching the programs (during the BUSY output), the trigger is ignored and a
trigger error occurs. To output the trigger error, set the trigger error in the Output Assignment (Page 4-64)
under the Settings Navigator to [ON]. In the case of a manual trigger, the trigger is processed after the
switching program is completed.
yyFor details on T1 and T2, refer to Input Response Time (Page 7-13).
yyUse this function during an operation. Programs cannot be switched with the external input during setup.
yyIf the switched program is set to [Internal], the first timing for inputting the trigger after switching the
program fluctuates. A delay of one trigger interval may occur.
yyDo not use with the external master registration input at the same time. The sequence for switching
programs and external master registration process will vary.
yyThe response of an image displayed on the monitor might be delayed until after switching programs (BUSY
output OFF).

Registering the Master Image
The external master registration function can register the master image with using the input line. For details
on master image registration, refer to 2. Master Registration (Registering an Image as a Reference for
Judgment) (Page 4-24).
(1) Trigger 1 (7) Trigger 2
trigger
Min 2 ms
(Min 2 ms)
External master registration ON
(2)
input OFF
Master image registration time (T3)
ON
BUSY output (3)
OFF
T4
Judgment process ON
Image of Trigger 1
(internal) OFF
(5)
ON
Master image (internal) Previous master image Image of Trigger 1
OFF
Total status output
7
ON (4)
Status output of each tool
Previous result Result from Trigger 1 Result from Trigger 2

ON
Error output (6) In case of failure
OFF
(1) Takes an image to be registered as a master image by the external trigger or internal trigger.
(2) If the BUSY output turns OFF, the external master registration input will be input. Minimum ON/OFF
input time is 2 ms.
(3) The BUSY output turns ON and the master registration starts. The master registration time differs
depends on the settings.
(4) The status output (Latching output and One-Shot output) turns OFF before the master image
registration is completed.
(5) The image imaged in Trigger 1 will be registered as a master image.
(6) If the external image registration is failed, the error output turns ON. Check that the external master
image registration is succeeded with the error output. In case of failure, the image will not be updated
from the previous master image. The error output turns OFF when the external master image
registration is succeeded or by the clear error input.
(7) After the master image registration is completed, the judgment process is performed with the new
master image. Trigger 2 judges the target with using an image of Trigger 1 as a master image.

yyFor details of T3 and T4, refer to Input Response Time (Page 7-13).
yyUse this function during an operation. The external master image registration cannot be performed during
setup.
yyIf the trigger occurs while registering the master image (during BUSY output), the trigger is ignored and a
trigger error occurs. The trigger error output function turns OFF when the next trigger is activated, when
the program is switched, or when the error is cleared. To output the trigger error, set the trigger error in
the Output Assignment (Page 4-64) under Settings Navigator to [ON].
y If the external master registration input is input during the imaging process (BUSY) by the trigger, the
y
system cancels the judgment process (taken image will not be registered). After the process is canceled,
the image taken before cancellation is registered as a master image. The master image registration
process is delayed by the cancelling process. Delaying time differs depending on the settings.
yyDo not change over the programs at the same time as external master registration input is being performed.
The sequence of the external master registration and switching programs process will vary.
7 yyIf the external master image registration is to be performed frequently, set [Write ROM when
using Ext. Master Save?] of the input option to [No] to protect the nonvolatile memory of the
internal sensor. For details of settings, refer to Input Settings (Page 6-33).
Number of times that external

ROM writing Master image is registered externally
master image registration can
settings when power is turned OFF
perform (duration)
The master image is not deleted.
Yes The image can be used as a master image after 100,000 times
starting up the device next time.
The master image is deleted.
No External master image registration needs to be No limit
performed after starting up the device.
yyIf the setting for writing to ROM is set to [No], the image is written to ROM when the system is
in the settings mode. The master image is not deleted once the system is in the settings mode
before the power is turned OFF.
yyIf the setting is set to [Yes], do not turn OFF the power during the master registration time (T3).
Otherwise, all or part of the setting data may be lost.

Clearing Errors
Clearing Errors
If an error targeted for clearing has occurred, outputting an error can be turned OFF by the clear error input.
Error occurred
Min 2 ms
(Min 2 ms)
ON (2)
Clear Error input
OFF
T5
(1) (3)
ON
Error output
OFF
(1) If an error occurred, the error output turns ON.

Error types which can be output are as follows.
yySystem error
yyStartup memory readout error
yyExternal master registration error
yyTrigger error
To output the trigger error, set the trigger error in the Output Assignment (Page 4-64) under Settings 7
Navigator to [ON].

yyFTP error
To output the FTP error, set the FTP error within the FTP settings (Page 6-40) to [Enable].
(2) The error output can be turned OFF by the clear error input. Minimum ON/OFF input time is 2 ms.
Errors which can be cleared are as follows.
yyExternal master registration error
yyTrigger error
yyFTP error
The system error/startup memory readout error cannot be cleared.
(3) When [Reset Status Output on Clear Error Execution] is set to [Yes], the status output is reset.
yyFor details on T5, refer to Input Response Time (Page 7-13).

Operations when Power of the Sensor is Turned on
Operations when Power of the Sensor is Turned on
Operations when the power is turned ON are as follows. Check activation of the BUSY output when
starting operation.
Initializing BUSY
2 seconds or longer 20 ms or longer
RUN Setting RUN System error
ON
Power (DC24V)
OFF (1)
Determine the
I/O settings
(2)
Program number
Trigger Trigger
(3)
ON (4)
BUSY output
OFF
(5)
ON
7
Error output
OFF
(6)
ON
RUN output
OFF Min Min
Min 0 ms 0.2 ms 0.2 ms
Total status output
Position adjustment output
OFF
(1) After the power is turned ON, the I/O Settings (NPN or PNP and N.O. or N.C.) will be determined.
Operation for initial startup of the sensor (Page 3-13)
Polarity (Page 6-36)
(2) The program number will be determined. If the program switching condition (Page 6-51) is set to
[External IN], the program number is determined according to the inputting condition of the input line.
(3) BUSY output function turns ON.
yyIn case of N.O. output, the transistor turns from OFF to ON.
yyIn case of N.C. output, the transistor turns from OFF to OFF, so no changes occur.
(4) The BUSY output turns OFF and the system starts to operate.
yyIn case of N.O. output, the transistor turns from ON to OFF.
yyIn case of N.C. output, the transistor turns from OFF to ON.
By checking the activation of the BUSY output, operation in N.O./N.C. can be checked.
(5) If the startup error is occurred, the error output turns ON during the BUSY status.
(6) The RUN output turns ON when the sensor is running with no system error occurring.

yyThe RUN output, BUSY output and error output will be output from the output line assigned in output
assignment for program numbers (Page 4-64) determined after the power is turned ON. If the outputs
are not being assigned, it will not be output.

Input Response Time
Input Response Time
The following response times are the typical examples (typ.). The response times may differ depending
on the settings or the image processing condition. Control by confirming the BUSY output for securing
from the affect of different response times.
Response time for the switch program input

T1 (Switch program time) = A + B + C + E + 50 [ms] (typ.)
T2 = 10 [ms] (typ.)
Response time for the external master registration input

T3 (Master registration time) = A + B + D + E + 50 [ms] (typ.)
T4 = 5 [ms] (typ.)
Response time for the error clear input 7

T5 = 5 [ms] (typ.)
Description for symbols
Symbols Description Time

Judgment process 400 (800) [ms] (typ.)
A
cancelling time * Added when it is input during the judgment process.
Total of the "Registration time x Number of set tools" for following
each tool
Position adjustment : 100 (500) [ms] (typ.)
B Tool registration time *
Outline : 100 (500) [ms] (typ.)
Color area : 100 [ms] (typ.)
Area : 100 [ms] (typ.)
860 [ms] (typ.)
Auto focus position
C Added only when auto focus-type sensor is used and the [Auto
adjustment time
Focus Adj Pos] (Page 6-51) is set to [Individual].
3,500 [ms] (typ.)
Nonvolatile memory
D Added only when the [Write ROM when using Ext. Master Save?]
saving time
(Page 6-34) is set to [Yes].
Trigger delay setting time (0 to 1,000) [ms]
E Trigger delay time Added only when the [External] (Page 4-11) is selected for trigger
type.
* These are the times in case the version of the sensor operation software is R1.10 or later.
The times for the version R1.00 are those inside ().

Input Response Time
MEMO
7

8
This chapter explains the specifications and
dimensions of the sensor and monitor.
Specifications
Specifications.....................................................8-2
Dimensions.........................................................8-8
Specifications

Specifications
Specifications
IV-G Series
Sensor Head
Model IV-G500CA IV-G500MA IV-G150MA IV-G300CA IV-G600MA
Type Standard type Narrow view type Wide view type
Installed distance 20 to 500mm 40 to 150mm 40 to 300mm 40 to 600mm
Installed distance Installed distance Installed distance Installed distance
20mm : 40mm : 40mm : 40mm :
10 (H) x 7.5 (V) mm 8 (H) x 6 (V) mm 42 (H) x 31 (V) mm 42 (H) x 31 (V) mm
View to to to to
Installed distance Installed distance Installed distance Installed distance
500mm : 150mm : 300mm : 600mm :
200 (H) x 150 (V) mm 32 (H) x 24 (V) mm 275 (H) x 206 (V) mm 550 (H) x 412 (V) mm
1/3 inch 1/3 inch 1/3 inch 1/3 inch
1/3 inch color
Image sensor color monochrome monochrome monochrome
CMOS
CMOS CMOS CMOS CMOS
Pixel 752 (H) x 480 (V)
Focus adjustment Auto*1
Exposure time 1/10 to 1/50,000 1/20 to 1/50,000 1/25 to 1/50,000 1/50 to 1/50,000
Amplifier type White LED Infrared LED
8 Light Lighting
method
Pulse lighting/DC lighting is switchable. Pulse lighting
Indicators 2 (indicate the same status)

Specifications
Ambient
0 to +50C (No freezing)
temperature
Relative
35 to 85 % RH (No condensation)
humidity
Environmental
Vibration *2
10 to 55 Hz, 1.5 mm double amplitude, 2 hours each for X, Y, and Z axes
resistance
Shock
500 m/s2 6 different directions in 3 times
resistance*2
Enclosure
IP67
rating*3
Material Main unit case : Zinc diecast, Front cover : Acrylic (hard coating), Indicator cover : TPU
Weight Approx. 75 g
Sensor Amplifier
Model IV-G10 (Main) IV-G15 (Expansion)
Type Outline, Color area*4, Area*5, Position adjustment
Tool
Number *6
Detection tools : 16 tools, Position adjustment tool : 1 tool
Switch settings
32 programs
(programs)
Number of
Image Color-type head: 100*8, monochrome-type head: 300*9
cases
history *7
Condition NG only/All is selectable
OFF/Statistics/Histograms is switchable.
Statistics : Processing time (latest value, MAX, MIN, AVE), numbers of OKs,
Analysis information*10 numbers of NGs, trigger numbers, trigger errors, judge results list by tools
Histograms : Histogram, matching degree (latest value, MAX, MIN, AVE),
numbers of OKs, numbers of NGs

Specifications
Model IV-G10 (Main) IV-G15 (Expansion)

*4,
HDR, High Gain, Color filters Digital zoom (x2, x4)*11, Brightness correction,
Tilt correction, White balance*4, Mask outline, Mask area, Test run, ToolAutoTune,
Other functions Input monitor, Output test, Security settings, Simulator, Prevention function for
mutual interference among heads, Total status output, Direct connection (2 units or
more), List of NG Sensor Occurrences, NG Hold Function
Indicators PWR/ERR, OUT, TRIG, STATUS, LINK/ACT
No-voltage input/voltage input is switchable.
For no-voltage input : ON voltage 2V or lower, OFF current 0.1mA or lower,
Input ON current 2mA (short circuit)
For voltage input : Maximum input rating 26.4 V, ON voltage 18 V or higher,
OFF current 0.2mA or lower, ON current 2mA (for 24V)
Inputs 6 inputs (IN1 to IN6)
IN1 : External trigger, IN2 to IN6 : Enable by assigning the optional functions
Assignable functions :
Function Program switching, Clear error, External master image registration,
Main/Expansion simultaneous input
Open collector output NPN/PNP is switchable, N.O./N.C. is switchable
For open collector NPN output : Maximum rating 26.4V 50mA (20mA when an
Expansion unit (IV-G15) is connected), remaining
Output voltage 1.5V or lower
For open collector NPN output : Maximum rating 26.4V 50mA (20mA when an
Expansion unit (IV-G15) is connected), remaining
Outputs
voltage 2V or lower
8 outputs (OUT1 to OUT8) 8
Enable by assigning the optional functions
Specifications
Function Total judge result, RUN, BUSY, Error, Position adjustment result, Judge result
of each tool, Logical operation result of each tool, Main/Expansion logic output
Standard 100BASE-TX/10BASE-T
Ethernet*12
Connector RJ-45 8pin connector
Network function FTP client, EtherNet/IP, PROFINET
Power DC 24V 10% Supplied from the Main unit
voltage (including ripple)
Rating
Consumption 0.8A or less. 1.5A or less when an Expansion unit (IV-G15) is connected
current (excluding output load)
Ambient 0 to +50C (No freezing)*13
Environmental temperature
resistance Relative 35 to 85%RH (No condensation)
humidity
Material Main unit case : Polycarbonate
Weight Approx. 150 g
*1 The focusing position can be automatically adjusted at the time of installation. Disabled during the operation.
The focusing position can be registered by programs.
*2 Except when the dome attachment for IV-G series (IV-GD05/IV-GD10) mounted.
*3 Except when the polarizing filter attachment (OP-87899/OP-87900/OP-87901/OP-87902) is mounted.
*4 Color type only.
*5 Monochrome type only.
*6 Tools can be installed by programs.
*7 Saves to the memory in the sensor.
The images saved in the sensor can be backed up to the USB memory installed to the intelligent monitor
(IV-M30) or to the PC by the PC Software for IV/IV-G series (IV-H1).
*8 70 images when using the FTP client function
*10 This can be displayed on the intelligent monitor (IV-M30) or by the PC Software for IV/IV-G series (IV-H1).
*11 Color type and monochrome type.
*12 This is for connection with the intelligent monitor (IV-M30) or the PC Software for IV/IV-G Series (IV-H1).
*13 Attach the sensor amplifier to the DIN rail then set it on the sheet metal.

Specifications
IV Series
Model IV-500C IV-500CA IV-500M IV-500MA IV-150M IV-150MA IV-2000M IV-2000MA

Type Standard range Short range Long range
Installed distance 50 to 500mm 50 to 150mm 300 to 2000mm
Installed distance Installed distance
Installed distance 50mm : 50mm : 300mm :
25 (H) x 18 (V) mm 12 (H) x 9 (V) mm 45 (H) x 33 (V) mm
View to to to
Installed distance 500mm : Installed distance Installed distance
210 (H) x 157 (V) mm 150mm : 2000mm :
36 (H) x 27 (V) mm 300 (H) x 225 (V) mm
1/3 inch 1/3 inch
Image sensor
color CMOS monochrome CMOS
Pixel 752 (H) x 480 (V)
*1
Focus adjustment Manual Auto Manual Auto*1 Manual Auto*1 Manual Auto*1
Exposure time 1/10 to 1/50,000 1/10 to 1/25,000 1/20 to 1/25,000 1/10 to 1/25,000
Amplifier type White LED Red LED Infrared LED
8 Light Lighting
method
Pulse lighting/DC lighting is switchable.
Type Outline search, Color area*7, Area*8, Position adjustment

Specifications
Tool *2
Number Detection tools : 16 tools, Position adjustment tool : 1 tool
Switch settings
32 programs
(programs)
Image Numbers 100 images*4 300 images*5
history*3 Condition NG only/All is selectable
OFF/Statistics/Histograms is switchable
Statistics : Processing time (latest value, MAX, MIN, AVE), numbers of OKs,
numbers of NGs, trigger numbers, trigger errors, judge results
Analysis information*6
list by tools
Histograms : Histogram, matching degree (latest value, MAX, MIN, AVE),
numbers of OKs, numbers of NGs
HDR, High Gain, Color filters*7, Digital zoom, Brightness correction,
Tilt correction, White balance*7, Mask outline, Mask area, Test run,
Other functions
ToolAutoTune, Input monitor, Output test, Security settings, Simulator*8,
List of NG Sensor Occurrences, NG Hold Function
Indicators PWR/ERR, OUT, TRIG, STATUS, LINK/ACT
No-voltage input/voltage input is switchable
For no-voltage input : ON voltage 2V or lower, OFF current 0.1mA or lower, ON
Input current 2mA (short circuit)
For voltage input : Maximum input rating 26.4V, ON voltage 18V or higher,
OFF current 0.2mA or lower, ON current 2mA (for 24V)
Inputs 6 inputs (IN1 to IN6)
IN1 : External trigger, IN2 to IN6 : Enable by assigning the optional functions
Function Assignable functions :
Program switching, Clear error, External master image registration

Specifications
Model IV-500C IV-500CA IV-500M IV-500MA IV-150M IV-150MA IV-2000M IV-2000MA

Open collector output NPN/PNP is switchable, N.O./N.C. is switchable
For open collector NPN output : Maximum rating 26.4V 50mA,
Output remaining voltage 1.5V or lower
For open collector PNP output : Maximum rating 26.4V 50mA,
remaining voltage 2V or lower
Outputs 4 outputs (OUT1 to OUT4)
Enable by assigning the optional functions
Function
Total judge result, RUN, BUSY, Error, Position adjustment result, Judge
result of each tool, Logical operation result of each tool
Ethernet*9
Connector M12 4pin connector
Network function FTP client, EtherNet/IP, PROFINET
Power
DC 24V 10% (including ripple)
voltage
Rating
Consumption
0.6A or less (excluding output load)
current
Ambient
8
temperature
Specifications
Relative
35 to 85%RH (No condensation)
humidity
Environmental
Vibration*10 10 to 55 Hz, 1.5 mm double amplitude, 2 hours each for X, Y, and Z axes
resistance
Shock
500m/s2 6 different directions in 3 times
resistance*10
Enclosure
IP67
rating*11
Main unit case : Aluminum die-casting, Packing : NBR, Front Cover : Acrylic,
Material
Mounting adapter : POM
Weight Approx. 270 g
*1 The focusing position can be automatically adjusted at the time of installation. Disabled during the
operation.
The focusing position can be registered by programs.
*2 Tools can be installed by programs.
*3 Saves to the memory in the sensor.
The images saved in the sensor can be backed up to the USB memory installed to the intelligent
monitor (IV-M30) or to the PC by the PC Software for IV/IV-G series (IV-H1).
*6 This can be displayed on the intelligent monitor (IV-M30) or by the PC Software for IV/IV-G series (IV-H1).
*7 Color type only.
*8 This function can be used with the PC software for IV/IV-G series (IV-H1).
*9 This is for connection with the intelligent monitor (IV-M30) or the PC Software for IV/IV-G Series (IV-H1).
*10 Except when the dome attachment (IV-D10) mounted.
*11 Except when the polarizing filter attachment (OP-87436/OP-87437) is mounted.

Specifications
Intelligent Monitor
Model IV-M30
Display 3.5" TFT color LCD 320 x 240 dot (QVGA)
Method White LED
Backlight
Duration Approx. 50,000 hours (25 C)
Method Analog resistive
Touch panel
Actuating force 0.8N or lower
Indicators PWR, SENSOR
Ethernet*1
Connector M12 4pin connector
Japanese / English / Deutsch / Chinese (Simplified) /
Languages Chinese (Traditional)/ Italian / French / Spanish / Portuguese /
Korean
Expanded memory USB memory*2
8 Rating
Power voltage DC 24V 10% (including ripple)
Consumption
0.2A or lower
Specifications
current
Ambient
temperature
Relative humidity*3 35 to 80%RH (No condensation)
Environmental 10 to 55 Hz, 0.7mm double amplitude, 2 hours each for X, Y,
Vibration
resistance and Z axes
Drop impact
1.3m over the concrete (2 times each in the arbitrary direction)
resistance
Enclosure rating IP40
Material Polycarbonate
Weight Approx. 180g
*1 This is dedicated for connection with IV Series sensor.
*2 Use the KEYENCE recommended product.
*3 If the ambient temperature is over 40C, use it in the absolute humidity of 40C 80% RH or lower.

Specifications
MEMO
Specifications

Dimensions
Dimensions
Ultra Compact Vision Sensor Sensor head

yyIV-G500CA yyIV-G500MA yyIV-G150MA yyIV-G300CA yyIV-G600MA
2xM4 Depth 3.5 2xM4 Depth 3.5 2x3.2 Plate through

Indicator mounting hole
31 24
3.1
2.9 Indicator
12
17.4
(44.3)
38.1
44.3
46.3
51.8
(104.7)
Center of light reception
38.41.2
(31)
12
17.9
8 24
29.6
35.6
(31)
4.8
44.3
Specifications
Minimum
20
Minimum
34.7 20
38.41.2 Sensor head/amplifier cable
(93.1) for IV-G series
2m/5m/10m
yyWith Vertical mounting bracket for IV-G series yyWith Transverse mounting bracket for IV-G
(OP-87908) series (OP-87909)
37.9
40
24.5
8.5
(95.2)
5.2
(30.9)
75.2
.2
R2
45
Center of 9
light reception 24
2
2.
20
R
32.5
5
14.2
16.3
14.3
38.1
48.1
R
30
2.
2.1
45
Center of light reception
86.6
(30.9)
R2
(106.6)
.2
8
Minimum 20
Minimum 7.9
19.9
51.1
53
33.7
21.5
9.5
6.8

Dimensions
yyWith Adjustable bracket for IV-G series yyWith Polarizing filter attachment for
(OP-87910) IV-G500CA/500MA/150MA (OP-87899)
Polarizing filter attachment for IV-G300CA (OP-87900)
2
1 Polarizing filter attachment for IV-G600MA (OP-87901)
16
14.9
17
29.8
41.8
* Strut 12 is not supplied (32.8)
61.3 with the OP-87910 (4.8)
1.9
24
18.4
4.1
46.3
(49.3)
22.2
24.1
4.8
Center of
light reception
Center of
24.1
light reception
yyWith Spread lens attachment for IV-G150MA

(OP-87902)
82.6
Minimum 20
Specifications
35.2
24 7.2
5.3 4.3
19.6
4.3
46.5
Center of
light reception
4.5
yyWith Dome attachment for IV-G series (IV-GD05)

WD reference surface
Distance from
40.1
57
27.3
84.3
71
43
4.3
8
28
84.5
56.5
Center of
light reception

Dimensions
yyDome attachment for IV-G series (IV-GD05) yyDome attachment for IV-G series (IV-GD05)
with Vertical mounting bracket for IV-G series with Adjustable bracket for IV-G series
(OP-87908) (OP-87910)
19.5
30
Distance from
(78.9)
Distance from
12
32.5
20
40.1
(5.2)
40.1
(133.2)
16
(71)
55
54.3
32.7
27.4 9.4
74.8
14.7
69.5 (84.3)
(84.3)
(94.3) * Strut 12 is not supplied
with the OP-87910
Minimum 20
(84.5)
76
53
47.1
47.1
4.8
33.7
4.8
(84.5)
(129.6)
37.5
Center of
Minimum 20
10.1
8.5
light reception
(82.6)
8 yyDome attachment for IV-G series (IV-GD05)
(82.6)
Center of
light reception
with Transverse mounting bracket for
Specifications
IV-Gseries (OP-87909)
yyWith Dome attachment for IV-G series (IV-GD10)
(8)
(101.6)
Distance from
(129.6)
61.6
14.3
43.1
38.1
28
26.9
69 15.2
Distance from
(84.3)
40.1
82.1 53
135.1
92.5
64.5
78
34
1
53.3
135.1
81.9
Minimum 20
Center of
light reception Center of
light reception

Dimensions
yyDome attachment for IV-G series (IV-GD10) with yyDome attachment for IV-G series (IV-GD10) with
Vertical mounting bracket for IV-G series (OP-87908) Adjustable bracket for IV-G series (OP-87910)
Distance from WD reference surface
Distance from
2
1
61.6
30
61.6
(78.9)
32.5
20
16
5.2
(154.7)
92.5
76.5
75.8
32.4
35.2
99.9 * Strut 12 is not supplied
27.1 with the OP-87910
40.5 135.1
94.6
135.1
72.3
4.8
Minimum 20
(135.1)
101.3
(154.9)
(135.1)
Minimum 20
53
62.8
33.7
(82.6)
8
33.9
Center of
Specifications
Center of
light reception light reception
yyDome attachment for IV-G series (IV-GD10) with

Transverse mounting bracket for IV-G series (OP-87909)
(8)
(101.6)
(154.9)
43.1
38.1
5
53.3
14.3
26.6
41
94.1
Distance from
(135.1)
61.6
99.5
Minimum 20
Center of
light reception

Dimensions
Ultra Compact Vision Sensor Sensor amplifier

yyIV-G10 yyI/O cable for IV-G series
61.1
30.3 57.2
Minimum 137.8
(104.7)
90
When using an Ethernet cable

Minimum 118.6
72.6 When using a LAN cable
60.6 DIN rail 36.8
61.8
49.8
Minimum 137.8
When using an Ethernet cable
90
(104.7)
Minimum 118.6
When using a LAN cable
54.9
36.8
61.8
30.3 DIN rail
8 Sensor head/
amplifier cable
for IV-G series
LAN cable
or
I/O cable for IV-G series
49.8
Ethernet cable
Sensor head/amplifier cable
for IV-G series
Specifications
LAN cable
or
Ethernet cable
54.9
I/O cable for

IV-G series
yyIV-G15
(32.6)
61.1
30.3 57.2
90
93.8

Dimensions
Optional parts for the Ultra Compact Vision Sensor
Dome attachment for IV-G series Polarizing filter attachment for

yyIV-GD05 IV-G500CA/500MA/150MA (OP-87899)
)
4.3
(8 IV-G300CA (OP-87900)
IV-G600MA (OP-87901)
.3
3
Distance from
40.1
13.7
48.1
23.8
43
7.9
84.3 84.5
18.4
yyIV-GD10
4
8
46.3
3
1 Center of
light reception
Specifications
16.9
Spread lens attachment for IV-G150MA

Distance from
yyOP-87902
61.6
10.4
23.8 4.3
69.6
64.7
19.6
135.1 135.1
44.4
Center of
light reception
Sensor head/amplifier cable for

IV-G series
yyOP-87903 yyOP-87904 yyOP-87905
(2m) (5m) (10m)
2000 (OP-87903)
5000 (OP-87904)
(12)
38.4 1.2 10000 (OP-87905) (38.4)

12
4.8

Dimensions
I/O cable for IV-G series Adjustable bracket for IV-G series
yyOP-87910
yyOP-87906 48.1
19.1 36.9 38.1 4.5
4
.4
19.5
27.8
5
(25)
12
27
32
3000
3.3
.4
1
8.1
35
4
4.4
7
Material : A5052
t = 3.0
Vertical mounting bracket for

IV-G series
yyOP-87908
Bracket
21
Material : Zinc die-casting
* Strut 12 is not supplied
8
53 Material : A5052 with the OP-87910
t = 3.0
12.5
48
Specifications
30
R
2.
38.1
2
.2
R2
20
5
10
32.5
R2
.2
5.2
12.5

IV-G series
yyOP-87909
38.1
2
2.
R
Material : A5052
t = 3.0
12
38.1 2
2.
R
10
40
35
10
R2
9
.2
48.1 21

Dimensions
Vision Sensor
yyIV-500C yyIV-150M yyIV-500M yyIV-2000M

yyIV-500CA yyIV-150MA yyIV-500MA yyIV-2000MA
(102)
R
50
52
0
R5
Focusing position
(108) adjustment screw
50 0.4 81.5
10.5
41
6
(MF type only)
3-M3 8
(Depth 6mm)
10.5
Specifications
20.5
50
57.4
32.4
10.5
56 Mounting
adapter
58
1/4-20UNC
(Depth 6mm)
20
45.5 25 4-M4
(Depth 6mm)

Dimensions
yyWith dome attachment

Installed distance: 0 to 50 mm from the front of the dome attachment
Compatible sensor: Standard range type/Short range type
134
34.6
62
yyWith polarizing filter attachment

32
8
56
Specifications
5
Optional parts for the Vision Sensor
Dome attachment for IV series

yyIV-D10
90.4
134

Dimensions
Polarizing filter attachment Power I/O cable

yyOP-87436 yyOP-87437 yyOP-87440 yyOP-87441 yyOP-87442
32
(2m) (5m) (10m)
2000
5000
45 10000
56
15
120 5
6.7
150 5
180 5
Mounting adapter
yyOP-87460
4-3.2
8
6.8 Counterbore depth 3mm
Specifications
57
1/4-20UNC
(Depth 6mm)
56
20
4-M4
(Depth 6mm)
17 25
Front cover
yyOP-87461
27.1 0.4
50

Dimensions
Bracket
yyOP-87685
0.4 112.5 56
50
48.4
93
31.6
19.6
99
(99) 58
8
41
82.5
Specifications

Dimensions
Intelligent Monitor
yyIV-M30
102.3
70.56 (2.2)
(Display area)
(13)
1.4
52.12
84
(Display area)
USB port
(52)
R20 26.4
(Excluding the
(109) convexed surface)
8
R50
Specifications
yyUsing the wall mounting adapter
6
2.74
98.7
40
20.2
2-3.5
30.3
Mounting hole dimension
2-M3
40

Dimensions
yyUsing the panel mounting adapter

119
4 22.8
110 110 4-3.5
109 100 91.5 110.5 92 +1 100

0
111 +1
0
Panel thickness
Panel cutting dimensions
(40) 1 to 4mm
4-M3
Screw depth 4.2
(97)
8 yyUsing the DIN mounting adapter

107
Specifications
35.9
57.1
33.8

Dimensions
Optional parts for the monitor
Monitor power cable Wall mounting adapter

yyOP-87443 yyOP-87444 yyOP-87445 yyOP-87464
(2m) (5m) (10m)
4.5
3.7
9.5
26.7
96.9
2000
5000
10000
Protection sheet
48 8.5
yyOP-87463
73.9 Panel mounting adapter
69.9
yyOP-87465
8
Specifications
50.4
109
t = 0.16
5
Stylus 119
18.5
yyOP-87462
7.6 94.7 5.6
DIN mounting adapter

yyOP-87466
81.3
9.9
107 30.7

Dimensions
Communication cables
Monitor cable for a sensor with a LAN cable

built-in amplifier yyOP-87950 (1m) yyOP-87951 (3m)
yyOP-87450 (2m) yyOP-87451 (5m) yyOP-87952 (5m) yyOP-87953 (10m)
yyOP-87452 (10m) yyOP-87453 (20m) 1000 (OP-87950)
3000 (OP-87951)
5000 (OP-87952)
15.5
10000 (OP-87953)
15.5
6.4
14.8
13.6 44.2 44.2 13.6
6.2
2000
5000
10000
47.3 20000 47.3
Ethernet cable
yyOP-87907 (1m) yyOP-87457 (2m)
yyOP-87458 (5m) yyOP-87459 (10m)
8
6.4
Specifications
17.1
14.8
1000
2000
5000
47.3 10000 44.7

Appendices
Status Table.......................................................A-2
Position Adjustment Tool................................. A-5
Settings List.......................................................A-6
Troubleshooting..............................................A-20
Error Messages...............................................A-23
Connected with the Sensor............................ A-29
(IP Reset Switch)............................................. A-43
Maintenance.....................................................A-45
Index.................................................................A-46
Copyright notice..............................................A-53
A
-IV/IV-G Series User's Manual (Monitor) - A-1

Status Table
Status Table
Status table
Indicator light of the sensor (IV-500/IV-150/IV-2000)

Monitor Indicator light of the sensor amplifier (IV-G10/IV-G15)
Status screen
type PWR/ERR OUT TRIG
Waiting for a trigger OFF

*3
Judgment processing Lighting *5
Running *2 RUN
Switching programs (green)
*9 OFF
Registering the external master image
Limit Adjustment TEST Blink
OFF *5
Trigger Options, Master Registration, etc. (green)
Focus adjustment (MF) OFF *14 OFF
LIVE
Automatically adjusting the brightness
Setting *13
Automatically adjusting the focus (AF)
Setup Adjustment Blink *15
OFF
(green)
I/O Monitor -
OFF
Others
A Trigger error
Running RUN
Setting LIVE Blink (red) Same as normal
Error External master registration error
System error - Lighting
OFF OFF
Startup memory readout error (red)
/ indicates enable/disable of the input.

ON/OFF indicates the following status. The operation differs according to the output setting (N.O./N.C).
yyFor N.O. ON : Indicates ON for an NPN or PNP open collector output.
OFF : Indicates OFF for an NPN or PNP open collector output.
yyFor N.C. ON : Indicates OFF for an NPN or PNP open collector output.
OFF : Indicates ON for an NPN or PNP open collector output.
*1 Turns ON if the judgment is OK. Turns OFF if it is NG.
When the total status result is OK, the total status output turns ON.
When the total status result is NG, the total status NG output turns ON.
The total status conditions can be selected from [All Tools OK], [Any Tool OK] and [Logic 1] to [Logic 4].
Total Status Conditions (Page 4-69)
When the position adjustment is NG, the status of each tool becomes NG.
*2 The sensor continues running even during the operation of the [Monitor Settings/Sensor Image
History/USB Memory] screen in the run screen.
*3 Indicates the overall status result of the previous judgment process.
OK: Lighting (green), NG: Lighting (red)
*4 Outputs the status result of the previous judgment process.
*5 Lights (one-shot) by linking to the trigger issuance (external/internal).
When a trigger delay has been set, it lights before the delay.
A-2 - IV/IV-G Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Status Table
Input Output
External Total Status / Total status NG /

External Switch Clear
master image BUSY Each tool / Each logic / RUN Error
trigger programs Error
registration Pos.Adj. *1
OFF
*4
*7 *8
ON OFF
*6 *10 *11 ON
*12
*11 *10
Same
as while
running
OFF OFF
*13 OFF

OFF
*16
OFF OFF OFF
A
Same as normal Same as normal
ON
OFF OFF
OFF
*17 *17 *17
*6 Disregards the input. A trigger error occurs.

*7 Stops the judgment process and switches over.
*8 Stops the judgment process and registers the previously taken image as a master image.
*9 Turns off the light before the process is completed. Until the light turns off, the previous status result
will be displayed.
*10 After the current process is completed, generates the new input.
*11 Do not use. The processing order becomes indeterminate.
*12 Turns OFF before the process is completed. Outputs the previous status result until this turns OFF.
*13 The internal trigger is issued automatically and the image will be updated. The Busy output operates.
*14 The flashing cycle of the orange light changes by linking to the focus indicator. The STATUS indicator
light operates in the same way.
*15 The internal trigger is issued automatically and the image is updated.
*16 While the I/O monitor function is used, only the operation of the I/O lines is confirmed. The assigned
functions will not operate.
*17 The NPN open collector output turns OFF regardless of the output settings (N.O./N.C.) and the
polarity (NPN/PNP) settings.
Additionally, refer to Chapter 7 Controlling with Input/Output Line (Page 7-1).

Status Table
Displaying and outputting the status result

Total Status
Judgment of each tool Total Status *2
NG
Status
Display
Output Display Output Output
Judgment Matching rate *1
Waiting for a trigger
-- --- OFF -- OFF OFF
(Not judged) *3
Judge is OK OK 0 to 100 ON
*4 *5
Judge is NG NG 0 to 100 OFF
Unable to judge *6 -- --- OFF *6 OFF ON
*1 When the setting scale is changed by the Color Area/Area tool, 0 to 200/0 to 999 can be selected.
The cut-off process (Page A-5) may be performed for the outline tool and the position adjustment tool.
*2 The total status conditions can be selected from [All Tools OK], [Any Tool OK] and [Logic 1] to [Logic 4].
*3 In this status, there is no trigger input after the power turned ON, after the program number has
changed, after the master image registered, after the status output reset, or after a shift from the setting
mode to the run mode.
*4 When the total status result is OK, the total status output turns ON.
*5 When the total status result is NG, the total status NG output turns ON.
*6 The judgment of position adjustment tool cannot be determined if the judgment of each tool cannot be
determined at the time of using the position adjustment tool. For details, refer to Displaying and
A outputting the status result at the time of position adjustment (Page A-4).
Displaying and outputting the status result at the time of position adjustment
Position Judgment of each tool
Window Total Total Status
adjustment Display/output Color Area/ Status *2
protrusion *1 Pos. Adj. Outline NG
result Area
View judgment OK OK/NG OK/NG
*3
No Status output ON ON/OFF ON/OFF *4
*5
View matching rate 0 to 100 0 to 100 0 to 100
Succeeded
View judgment OK OK/NG -- *6
*3
Yes Status output ON ON/OFF OFF *4
*7 *6
View matching rate 0 to 100 0 to 100 ---
View judgment NG -- -- NG
Failed Status output OFF OFF OFF OFF ON
View matching rate 0 to 100 --- ---
*1 This is an operation for if the adjusted position of the tool window is protruded from the imaging area
(Page 4-20) at the time of position adjustment succeeded.
*2 The total status conditions can be selected from [All Tools OK], [Any Tool OK] and [Logic 1] to [Logic 4].
*3 When the total status result is OK, the total status output turns ON.
*4 When the total status result is NG, the total status NG output turns ON.
*5 0 to 200/0 to 999 can be selected when the setting scale has been changed.
*6 For details of the targets outline which is protruded from the search region, refer to Matching rate
at the time of protrusion (Page A-5)
*7 The judgment cannot be determined if the adjusted position of the tool window is protruded from the
imaging area.
Matching Rate of the Outline Tool and Position Adjustment Tool

Position Adjustment Tool
Matching rate at the time of protrusion Cut-off process of the matching rate
The cut-off process means the process where the
zz
When the search region is Entire
outline detection process is ended when no outline
When the target outline protrudes from the
exceeding a certain matching rate (cut-off value)
imaging area, the protruding outline is excluded
below the threshold value is found.
from the target for calculating the matching rate.
A matching rate which has been cut off becomes
The matching rate decreases in proportion to
0. Because the cut-off value is linked to the
the protrusion amount.
threshold, the cut-off value is also changed when
Tool window the threshold is changed.
Protruding outline
(excluded from the target for (Cut-off value)
calculating the matching rate) Threshold
Matching
rate
Current
Outline to be targeted
matching rate
for calculating the Cut-off processing range
matching rate (Range where the matching rate
becomes 0)
Imaging area
zz
When the search region is Partial
The sensor searches the outline of the target that A
is in the search region. The matching rate of the
target being out of search region will be 0.
If the target is being protruded from the imaging
area, the matching rate will decrease depends
on how much the target is protruded from the
imaging area.
The above behavior is the case that the version

of the sensor operation software is R1.10 or later.
For the version R1.00, the matching rate
decreases in proportion to the protrusion amount.
When the tool window after position adjustment

protrudes from the imaging area, the judgment
display of the Color Area/Area tool becomes --
(Unable to judge) and the status output turns OFF.

Settings List
Settings List
RUN screen (menu display OFF)
Reference
Menu Description Setting range
page
A tool to be selected on the Number of tools set in the
(Tool name) 5-4
monitor can be switched. program
Menu Displays the menu. - 5-4
RUN screen (menu display ON)
Reference
page
A tool to be selected
Number of tools set in the
(Tool name) on the monitor can be 5-4
program
switched.
OFF Hides menus. - 5-4
Selects the sensor to be
Change Connected Sensor - 6-8
connected.
The Monitor Settings
Monitor Settings - 6-54
screen opens.
Displays the Sensor
Sensor Image History - 6-21
Image History screen.
A View
Displays the image
- 6-21
history in the sensor.
Backs up the image
Batch Backup - 6-26
Displays the selected image
View - 5-6
in full-screen in the monitor.
Saves the displayed image
Save to USB Memory - 6-27
to the USB memory.
Performs the Tool Auto
yyAutoTune as OK
Auto Tuning Tuning based on the 5-21
yyAutoTune as NG
displayed image.
Deletes the image history
Clear - 6-23
in the sensor.
Settings cannot be
Logging Settings - 6-24
changed during running.
Displays the USB
USB Memory - 6-25
Memory screen.
Backs up the sensor
yyProgram Only
settings and image
Batch Backup yyProg.+Image Hist. 6-26
history into the USB
(default value)
memory.
Transfers the settings
Transfer Program Settings backed up into the USB - 6-28
memory to the sensor.
Saves the image displayed
on the monitor into the yyON (default value)
Screen Capture Settings 6-30
USB memory as an image yyOFF
data (bmp).

Settings List
Reference
page
Displays the Sensor
Sensor Setup - 6-7
Setup Menu screen.
Displays when the
Trig - 4-7
external trigger is set.
yy1.0x (default value)
Sets the monitor to full-
yy1.5x
Zoom screen mode. Zooming 5-6
yy2.0x
in/out can be performed.
yy3.0x
yyOFF
yyWindow
Changes the display
Tool View yyProcess 1 (default 5-7
method of the tool.
value)
View yyProcess 2
Displays the analysis yyOFF (default value) 5-10
Analysis information (statistics/ yyStatistics
histogram). yyHistogram 5-12
Display the List of NG

NG - 6-10
Sensor Occurrences.
HOLD CLR Releases the screen held. - 6-14
Sensor Setup Menu screen

A
Reference
page
Switches the programs to
Program PROG_00 to PROG_31 6-15
be set.
Displays the sensor 6-19
Detail -
program detail screen 6-20
Displays the master
(Master image) image of the currently PROG_00 to PROG_31 6-7
selected program.
Displays an information 6-19
(Program information) -
of selected program. 6-20
Up to 16 characters
Edit Edits a program name. (English and Japanese 6-19
single byte characters)
Copies the selected
Copy program to unregistered - 6-19
program.
Initializes the program
Initialize - 6-20
settings.
Displays the Settings
Sensor Setup - 4-1
Navigator screen.
Adjusts the threshold of
Limit Adjustment 0 to 100 5-15
selected tool.
Displays the screen for
Tool Auto Tuning - 5-16
the Tool Auto Tuning.

Settings List
Reference
page
Displays the sensor
Sensor Advanced - 6-32
advanced screen.
Displays the Sensor
Sensor Image History - 6-21
Image History screen.
Displays the image
View - 6-21
Backs up the image
Batch Backup - 6-26
Displays the selected image
View - 5-6
in full-screen in the monitor.
Saves the displayed image
Save to USB Memory - 6-27
to the USB memory.
Performs the Tool Auto
yyAutoTune as OK
Auto Tuning Tuning based on the 5-21
yyAutoTune as NG
displayed image.
Deletes the image history
Clear - 6-23
in the sensor.
Sets the condition of an image yyAll
Image History Settings 6-24
to log as an image history. yyNG only (default value)
Displays the USB
A USB Memory
Memory screen.
- 6-25
Backs up the sensor yyProgram Only

Batch Backup settings and image history yyProg.+Image Hist. 6-26
into the USB memory. (default value)
Transfers the settings
Transfer Program Settings backed up into the USB - 6-28
memory to the sensor.
Transfers the I/O polarity, yyEnable
network settings and device (disabled after the transfer)
Option (Transfer All Settings) 6-28
name simultaneously with yyDisabled
the settings data transfer. (default value)
Saves the image
displayed on the monitor yyON (default value)
Screen Capture Settings 6-30
into the USB memory as yyOFF
an image data (bmp).
Displays the run screen
RUN - 5-2
(menu display OFF).

Settings List
Monitor Settings screen
Reference
page
Selects a connection
Sensor Connect method of the sensor and - 6-55
monitor.
yyDirect Connection
Switches the connection (1 unit)
Direct/Network method of the sensor and yyDirect Connection 6-55
monitor. (2 units or more)
yyNetwork Connection
Searches for sensors on
Search Sensor the network and perform - 6-55
their connection.
Specifies the IP address
Specify Sensor - 6-55
of the sensor to connect.
Monitor Device Settings 6-54
Displays the MAC
MAC Address - 6-59
address for the monitor.
Displays the IP address 192.168.10.1
IP Address 6-59
Network of the monitor. (default value)
Settings
Subnet Mask
Displays the subnet mask 255.255.255.0
of the monitor. (default value)
6-59 A
Displays the default 0.0.0.0
Default Gateway 6-59
gateway of the monitor. (default value)
Sets the Manual Trigger yyEnable (default value)
Manual Trigger 6-59
to enable/disable. yyDisable
Sets whether or not
Update Image in RUN to update an image yyON (default value)
6-59
Mode displayed on the monitor yyOFF
during running.
Sets the Tool Auto Tuning yyShow (default value)
Tool Auto Tuning Guide 6-59
Guide to Show/Hide. yyHide
Display
Settings Sets whether or not to yyON
NG Hold function 6-60
use the NG Hold function. yyOFF (default value)
Register the sensors
List of NG Sensor
displayed on List of NG - 6-60
Occurrences function
Sensor Occurrences.
Make settings for the display
of the List of NG Sensor yyON
Display on Startup 6-60
Occurrences ON/OFF for yyOFF (default value)
startup of the monitor.
Sets Touch Screen Lock yyEnable
Touch Screen Lock 6-60
Touch function to enable/disable. yyDisable (default value)
Screen Sets a password when Up to 8 characters
Lock Password the Touch Screen Lock (English and Japanese 6-60
function is enabled. single byte characters)

Settings List
Reference
page
Monitor Environment 6-54
yyEnglish
yyJapanese
yyDeutsch
yyChinese (Simplified)
Selects the language
yyChinese (Traditional)
Language to be displayed on the 6-61
yyItalian
monitor.
yyFrench
yySpanish
yyPortuguese
yyKorean
Time Sets date and time. - 6-62
Adjusts the brightness of
Backlight Brightness 1 to 7 (default value: 5) 6-62
backlight on the monitor.
Sets the Auto off function
yyEnable
Auto Off of backlight on the monitor 6-62
yyDisable (default value)
to Enable/Disable.
Backlight
yy30 sec
Sets a time until the
yy1 min (default value)
back light turns off when
Auto Off Time Delay yy5 min 6-62
the Auto off function is
yy10 min
enabled.
yy30 min
A Touch Panel Calibration
Adjusts the position to be
- 6-63
tapped of the monitor.
System 6-54
Displays the model,
version, serial number,
Monitor Information - 6-63
MAC address, and IP
address of the monitor.
Displays a sensor
Sensor Information - 6-52
information.
Initializes the settings of
Initialize Monitor - 6-64
the monitor.
Updates the operation software
Update Monitor - 6-64
version of the monitor.

Settings List
Sensor Advanced screen
Reference
page
Environmental 6-32
Sets a detection timing of
yyExt. Trigger
IN1 the trigger input for IN1 6-33
yyExt. Trigger
input line.
yyOFF
Sets a function to the yyProgram bit0 to bit4
IN2 to IN6 6-33
input line IN2 to IN6. yyClear Error
yyExt. Master Save
Main/Expansion
Simultaneous Input
(IVG15 (Expansion) only) y
y Yes
Sets whether or not to 6-34
copy the input to the IV- yyNo (default value)
Main/ G10 (Main) to the input to
Expansion the IV-G15 (Expansion).
Simultaneous
Input Input Mutual Interference
Settings (IV-G Series Prevention (IV-G10
only) (Main) only)
Sets whether or not yyYes
6-34
to prevent mutual yyNo (default value)
interference between the
IV-G10 (Main) and the A
IVG15 (Expansion).
Sets whether or not to
use the functions below.
yyWriting to ROM during
I/O Settings external master
yyYes
Option registration 6-34
yyNo (default value)
yyInternal Trigger Control
with IN1 Input
yyReset Status Output on
Clear Error Execution
OUT1 to
OUT8
(IV-G series) Sets the output line yyN.O.
6-35
OUT1 to setting. yyN.C.
OUT4
(IV series)
Output Main/
Settings Expansion Set the logic output of yyAND
Logic Output the IV-G10 (Main) and yyOR 6-35
(IV-G series IVG15 (Expansion). yyOFF (default value)
only)
Common yyLatching (default
Output Selects an output mode. value) 6-35
Settings yyOne-Shot
Selects the polarity (I/O yyNPN
Polarity 6-36
format) of the sensor. yyPNP
Checks whether an input
yyON
I/O Monitor line for control is correctly 6-36
wired or not. yyOFF

Settings List
Reference
page
Up to 16 characters
Device Name Sets a name of the sensor. (English and Japanese 6-37
Device Sets the Password
Password yyON
Name/ Lock function to enable/ 6-38
Lock yyOFF (default value)
Pass disable.
Security
Sets a password when the Up to 8 characters
Password Password Lock function of (English and Japanese 6-38
the sensor is enabled. single byte characters)
Displays the MAC
MAC Address - 6-39
address for the sensor.
Displays the IP address
IP Address - 6-39
Network of the sensor.
Settings Displays the subnet mask
Subnet Mask - 6-39
of the sensor.
Displays the default
Default Gateway - 6-39
gateway of the sensor.

Settings List
Reference
page
Adv. Network Settings 6-40
Transfers the image
data and status result yyOFF
FTP Client 6-40
information of the sensor yyON
memory to an FTP server.
Displays the IP address
IP Address - 6-41
of the FTP server.
Input the user name for Up to 16 characters
User Name 6-41
logging in to the FTP server. can be set.
FTP
Input the password for Up to 16 characters
Destination Password 6-41
logging in to the FTP server. can be set.
Settings
Passive Enables/disables the yyEnable
6-41
Mode passive mode. yyDisable
Connection Tests the connection with
- 6-42
Test the FTP server.
Transfer Selects the transfer yyAll
6-42
Condition condition of image data. yyNG Only
Selects the file saving yyIVP
File Format 6-43
format for image data. yyBMP
Transfer Transfers judgement
yyON
Judgment results simultaneously 6-43
FTP Transfer
Condition
Results with the image data.
yyOFF (default value)
A
Turns ON the Error
yyON
FTP Error output function for when 6-43
a file transfer failed.
The total status result
OK/NG
(OK/NG) is added upon yyON
Criteria Info 6-43
transfer of data to the yyOFF (default value)
Addition
FTP server.
Displays the transfer Up to 16 characters
Folder 6-44
destination folder. can be set.
Sets the file name of
Up to 16 characters
File Name the image data to be 6-44
can be set.
transferred.
Transfer Sets the file name of
Fixed File yyON
Destination the image data to be 6-45
Name yyOFF (default value)
Folder transferred.
Settings Input the upper limit
Index Upper 0-65535
of the numbers to be 6-45
Limit (default value: 999)
appended to file names.
Creates subfolders under
Create yyON
the transfer destination 6-45
Subfolder yyOFF (default value)
folder.
yyDisable
Selects the communication
Protocol yyEtherNet/IP 6-46
Field protocol for the sensor.
yyPROFINET
Network
Enables/disables the yyEnable
Handshake Control 6-46
handshake control of data. yyDisable

Settings List
Reference
page
Setup Adjustment 6-32
Shapes can be adjusted
to the correct shape if an
Tilt Correction yyVertical 6-47
image displayed on the
yyHorizontal
monitor is distorted.
Same as Image
Optimization
Adjusts imaging for the However, if digital zoom
Image Settings 6-47
Tilt Correction. is used, [Zoom Area] and
[Filter (Edge Emphasis)]
cannot be set.
Displays the image
yyON
Rotate 180 displayed on the monitor 6-49
by rotating 180.
Adjusts imaging for the Same as Image
Image Settings 6-49
Rotate 180. Optimization
Adjusts a white balance
White Balance
for the built-in camera of - 6-50
(Color type only)
the sensor.
Adjusts imaging for the Same as Image
Image Settings 6-50
A White balance. Optimization
Program 6-32
yyMonitor/PC (default
Select a changing
Program Switch Method value) 6-51
method for programs.
yyExternal IN
Sets whether or not
yyCommon
to share the adjusting
Auto Focus Adj Pos yyIndividual (default 6-51
position for auto focus to
value)
all programs.
System 6-32
Displays the model,
version, serial number,
Sensor Information MAC address, IP address, - 6-52
and device name of the
sensor.
Initializes the sensor
Initialize Sensor - 6-53
settings.
Updates the operation
Update Sensor - 6-53
software of the sensor.

Settings List
Sensor Setup screen
Reference
page
Internal
Trigger interval:
1 to 10000 ms
Sets an imaging timing of (default value: 50 ms)
Trigger Options 4-8
a target. External
Trigger delay:
0 to 1000 ms
(default value: 0 ms)
Automatically adjusts a
Auto Brightness Adjustment - 4-12
image brightness.
Manual focusing type
-
Adjusts focus of the
Focus Adjustment Auto focusing type 4-13
sensor.
yyAutomatic
yyManual
yyEntire (default value)
Imaging Area Sets an imaging area. 4-20
yyPartial
IV-500C(A) 1 to 100
IV-500M(A)
IV-150M(A)
1 to 120
1 to 120
A
IV-2000M(A) 1 to 100
Adjusts brightness of an
Bright IV-G500CA 1 to 105 4-21
Advanced image manually.
IV-G500MA 1 to 130
Brightness IV-G150MA 1 to 115
Adjustment IV-G300CA 1 to 115
IV-G600MA 1 to 125
yyNormal (default value)
Imaging Select an imaging mode
yyHDR 4-21
Mode of the sensor.
yyHighGain
yyOFF
Select a lighting mode for
Lighting yyFlash (default value) 4-21
Extended the built-in light.
yyContinuous
functions
menu Applies the color filters if
an outline of a certain color
OFF (default value),
Color Filters cannot be displayed when
Red, Green, Blue, Cyan, 4-22
(color type only) an image is displayed in
Magenta, Yellow
monochrome display with
the color type sensor.
yyZoom magnification: x2
Digital Zoom Sets the digital zoom. 4-22
yyZoom magnification: x4
(IV-G series only)
Specify an arbitrary area.
Specify an area in the To move the zoom area
Zoom Area sensors field of view as to the center of the 4-23
the zooming area. screen, touch the [Screen
Center] button.
Emphasize the outline of yyON
Filter 4-23
the image. yyOFF (default value)

Settings List
Reference
page
Registers the image
Register Live Image as Master imaged by sensor as a - 4-25
master image.
Registers the image of
Select Img From Image the image history in the
- 4-26
History memory of the sensor as
a master image.
Extended
functions Select Img From USB Registers the image in USB
- 4-28
menu Memory memory as a master image.
Sets a reference of
Brightness Correction brightness to the master - 4-30
image.
3. Tool Settings
Reference
page
Add Tool Newly sets a tool. - 4-35
Select a window shape
Window yy Rect (default value)
to specify an area of the 4-37
A Edit
Shape
target to be detected.
yy Circle
Window yyEntire (Without position

Specifies an area to
Search adjustment)
search an outline of the 4-39
Region yyPartial (With position
target.
adjustment)
Disables an unnecessary
Remove outline which interrupts yyUndo
4-39
Outline the stabilized detection, yyClear
and then judges.
Fine Tune Selects the eraser width of yyNarrow (default value)
Eraser
Outline the pen when specifying yyMiddle 4-39
Width
an unnecessary outline. yyWide
yyHigh*
Outline Select an extraction
Sensitivity yyNormal (default value) 4-40
sensitivity of an outline.
yyLow
Adjusts a threshold used 0 to 100
Limit Adjustment 4-37
in anomaly detection. (default value: 70)
Sets an angle limit for
Rotation 0 to 180
detecting outlines to the 4-42
Range (default value: 20)
rotating direction.
Select whether or not to
yyON (default value)
Extended Margin allow the margin for the 4-42
yyOFF
functions limited angle.
menu Search Select a detection mode yyHigh Accuracy
4-42
Algorithm for outline search. yyHigh Speed (default value)
Up to 8 characters
Sets an arbitrary name to
Tool Name (English and Japanese 4-43
the tool.
* If digital zoom is set to [Zoom Mag: x4] on the IV-G300CA/IV-G600MA, the default value is [High].

Settings List
Reference
page
Select a window shape yy Rect (default value)
Window
to specify the area of a yy Circle 4-46
Shape target to be extracted. yyEntire
Edit Adds a rectangular/
Window circular mask region in
the tool window frame. yyAdd Mask
Mask 4-49
Adds a rectangular/ yyCut Mask
circular cutting region in
the mask region.
Tap a color to be yyExtract Area [+]
Color Extraction extracted on the master yyExtract Area [-]
4-46
(For color type) image and sets an yyUndo
extraction range. yyClear
A color range to be
extracted can be set on
to Live Image - 4-46
the Live image of the
target.
Tap brightness to be yyExtraction Range
Brightness Extraction extracted on the master (0 to 255)
4-46
(For monochrome type) image and sets an yyUndo
extraction range. yyClear
A brightness range to
be extracted can be set
Color
to Live Image
on the Live image of the
target.
- 4-46
A
Area/
Area Adjusts a threshold used
Limit Adjustment 0 to 100 (default value: 50) 4-46
in anomaly detection.
Sets the upper limit of a yyEnable
Upper Limit 4-50
threshold. yyDisable (default value)
Upper When an upper limit
Limit is Enable, select a
yy0-200 (default value)
Scale threshold scale matching 4-50
the coincidence range yy0-999
required for judgment.
Advanced Specifies a color to be yyH : 0 to 359
Color extracted as HSB
yyS : 0 to 255 4-53
Extraction (H: Hue, S: Saturation,
B: Brightness). yyB : 0 to 255
(Color type)
Advanced
Brightness
Specifies a brightness
Extended Extraction value to be extracted.
0 to 255 4-53
functions (Monochrome
menu type)
Up to 8 characters
Sets an arbitrary name to
Tool Name (English and Japanese 4-53
the tool.
Fixed Select a condition which yyDisable
Reference the matching rate of the yyEnable: Large 4-54
Area Color Area/Area is 100%. yyEnable: Small

Settings List
Reference
page
Select a window shape
Window Rect (default value)
yy
to specify an area of the 4-57
Shape Circle
yy
Edit target to be detected.
Window Specifies an area to
Search yyEntire
search an outline of the 4-59
Region yyPartial
target.
Disables an unnecessary
Remove outline which interrupts yyUndo
4-59
Outline the stabilized detection, yyClear
and then judges.
Fine Tune Selects the eraser width of yyNarrow (default value)
Eraser
Pos. Outline the pen when specifying yyMiddle 4-59
Width
Adj. an unnecessary outline. yyWide
yyHigh*
Select an extraction
Sensitivity yyNormal (default value) 4-59
sensitivity of an outline.
yyLow
Adjusts a threshold used
Limit Adjustment 0 to 100 (default value: 70) 4-57
in anomaly detection.
Sets an angle limit for
Rotation 0 to 180
adjusting position to the 4-61
Extended Range rotating direction. (default value: 20)
functions
menu Select whether or not to
yyON (default value)
A Margin allow the margin for the
limited angle. yyOFF
4-61
Edits the settings of the

Edit Tool tool which has already - 4-35
been set.
Deletes an unnecessary
Delete Tool - 4-35
tool.
Copies the tool which has
been set and pastes it to
Extended
the same position.
functions Copy Tool - 4-62
This is for the Outline tool
menu
and the Color Area/Area
tool.
* If digital zoom is set to [Zoom Mag: x4] on the IV-G300CA/IV-G600MA, the default value is [High].

Settings List
Reference
page
yyTotal Status
yyTot. StatusNG
yyRUN
yyBUSY
yyError
Sets the output items
OUT1 to OUT8 (IV-G series) yyPos. Adj.
to be assigned to the 4-64
OUT1 to OUT4 (IV series) yyJudge result of each
output line.
tool (Tool 1 to Tool 16)
yyLogical operation result
of each tool
(Logic 1 to Logic 4)
yyOFF (not used)
Selects whether to
ON/OFF the output yyON
Trigger Error 4-64
when the trigger error yyOFF (default value)
occurred.
Selects the logical yyAND
Logic operation method of 4-67
yyOR
Logic Settings
(Logic 1 to 4)
logics.
yyUnused
A
Extended Select tools to be
functions (Tool selection) yyUsed 4-67
assigned to the logic.
menu yyUsed (Inverse)
yyAll Tools OK
Selects a condition for
Total Status Conditions yyAny Tools OK 4-69
the total status result.
yyLogic 1 to 4

Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Reference
Symptom Check point Remedy
page
The PWR/ERR indicator light An error occurred. Check the Refer to "Error Message".
of the sensor or the PWR
errors from lighting or blinking A-23
indicator light of the monitor
is lighting or blinking in red. in red.
An error message is Check the details of the error Refer to "Error Message".
A-23
displayed on the monitor. message.
Is the power cable correctly Connect the power cable
2-17
The power is not supplied to connected? correctly.
the sensor or monitor does Is the voltage or capacity of Use a power source of the
not turn on. the power source meet the 8-2
correct rating.
specification?
Place a target at the correct
Is the installed distance of the installed distance. The
2-3
target correct? installed distance depends on
the sensor type.
Place the sensor in such a way
Is the sensor view correct? that the sensor view matches 2-3
the target size.
Adjust the focusing position
Is the focus adjustment correct? 4-13
(focus) of the sensor.
Is the brightness adjustment Adjust the brightness of the
An image is not displayed on 4-12
A the monitor, or the image is
correct? sensor.
abnormal. Is the target or the sensor Devise anti-vibration measures
etc. -
vibrating?
Use brightness correction. 4-30
Does the ambient light affect
the image? Place the douser to prevent
-
the incident of ambient light.
Is the front cover dirty or Clean the front cover. Replace
it with the spare front cover A-45
damaged? (OP-87461).
Is the function of Update Image Set the function of Update
6-59
in the RUN mode set to [OFF]? Image in the RUN mode to [ON].
yyStart the run mode
Is the system in the setting
yyTurn on the power of the 5-2
mode?
sensor again.
If a target is to be imaged
using an external trigger, input
the external trigger. When the
NPN is selected in the Polarity,
The image or the status Is the trigger correctly input? the circuit becomes a non- 2-17
result is not updated. voltage input circuit. When
PNP is selected in the Polarity,
the circuit becomes a voltage
input circuit. Check the cables.
All or part of the settings Complete the settings in
necessary for running have not Settings Navigator. 4-1
been completed.
The NG Hold function is used. Set [NG Hold Function] to [OFF]. 6-14

Troubleshooting
Reference
page
The status result is displayed Is the function of Update Image Set the function of Update
6-59
but the image is not. in the RUN mode set to [OFF]? Image in the RUN mode to [ON].
The network may be affected
by the traffic in the in-plant
LAN. Configure a local network
-
Image update is slow. Is the network connected to the and confirm the network
(during operation/setting) in-plant LAN? connection only for the IV/IV-G
Series.
Set the function of Update
6-59
Image in the RUN mode to OFF.
The touch screen lock of the
Is the input screen for the monitor or the password lock 6-38
unlock password displayed? of the sensor is enabled. Input 6-60
The monitor cannot be the unlock password.
operated using the touch
The password is lost and cannot Contact your nearest
panel.
unlock. KEYENCE office.
-
Are not there any damage or
crack on the touch screen?
Is the output line correctly Correctly connect to the
2-17
connected? external devices.
Set the output line and output A
Is the output setting correctly
settings correctly in the 4-64
set?
Settings Navigator.
Is the system in the setting Start the run mode
5-2
mode?
Is the threshold correctly set? Set the threshold correctly. 5-15
The status result is not yySet the detection tool correctly.
output. Is the tool correctly set? yySet the position adjustment 4-32
tool correctly.
Set the NPN or PNP according
Is the Polarity correctly set? to the circuits of the external 6-36
devices.
Set the N.O. (normally open)
Are the N.O. and N.C. correctly or N.C. (normally closed)
6-35
set? according to the circuits of the
external devices.

Troubleshooting
Reference
page
Is the trigger condition set to Select [External] in Trigger
4-8
[External]? Options.
Is the input line correctly Correctly connect to the
2-17
connected? external devices.
Make the input line and input
Has the input setting been
settings correctly in [Input 6-33
An external trigger cannot made correctly?
Settings].
be input. When the NPN is selected
in the Polarity, the circuit
becomes a non-voltage input
Has the Polarity been correctly
circuit. When the PNP is 6-36
set?
selected in the Polarity, the
circuit becomes a voltage input
circuit. Check the cables.
The program number cannot Has the switching method for Set the switching method for
be changed with the input the programs been correctly the programs to [External IN]. 6-51
line. set?
Has the input line been Correctly connect to the
2-17
correctly connected? external devices.
A Has the input setting been
Set the input line and input
settings correctly in [Input 6-33
correctly set?
Settings].
When the NPN is selected
in the Polarity, the circuit
becomes a non-voltage input
Has the Polarity been correctly
circuit. When the PNP is 6-36
set?
selected in the Polarity, the
circuit becomes a voltage input
circuit. Check the cables.
The monitor and sensor Refer to Remedy when the
cannot be connected to. Check the cables and settings. Monitor cannot be Connected A-29
with the Sensor (Page A-29).
Image data cannot be Refer to Remedy when data
Check the cables and settings. A-41
transferred via FTP. transfer via FTP is unavailable

Error Messages
Error Messages
Checking errors by observing the PWR/ERR indicator light

The causes of and remedies for an error can be checked by observing the indicator light.
zz
IV-G10/IV-G15 zz
IV-500/IV-150/IV-2000
PWR/ERR PWR/ERR
indicator light indicator light
On the IV-G series, the indicator light on the sensor head blinks (red) when the light on the sensor amplifier
is ON (red) or blinking (red).
PWR/ERR
Cause Remedy
indicator status
ON In operation. -
Green Setting in progress.
Blink -
A
Operation stopped.
yyTurn on the power of this device.
A system error occurred. yyIf the same error occurs, contact your nearest
KEYENCE office.
A startup memory read error
ON occurred.
yyInitialize the settings.
yyA data abnormality occurred
yyIf the same error occurs, contact your nearest
due to noise or because the
KEYENCE office.
power switched OFF while
writing was in progress.
A trigger error occurred. yyThe trigger error can be fixed using one of the
A judgment process is not following procedure.
performed. yyNext normal trigger input
yyIf a target is to be imaged yyClear Error input
using an external trigger, the yySwitching the program number
external trigger will be input yyProceeding to the settings screen of the sensor
Red during a BUSY status. yyDo not input an external trigger during a BUSY status.
yyIf a target is to be imaged yySet the trigger interval of the internal trigger to a value
using an internal trigger, the that is longer than the processing time.
trigger interval will become yyAn error will not occur if the trigger is set to [OFF]
shorter than the processing described in output assignment for the Settings
Blink time. Navigator (Page 4-64).
An external master image

yyAn external master image registration error can be
registration error (without
fixed using one of the following procedures.
registered master image)
yySuccessful next external master image registration
occurred. The master image
yyClearing the Error input
is not updated.
yySwitching the program number
yyThe image to be registered
yyProceeding to the settings screen for sensor
as a master image was not
yyTaking an image to be registered as a master image
imaged.
and register it as an external master image.
yyThe work memory is
yyDeleting one or more detection tools.
insufficient.

Error Messages
PWR/ERR
Cause Remedy
indicator status
The external master image
registration error (with
registered master image) yyAn external master image registration error can be
occurred. The following fixed using one of the following procedures.
errors occurred even though yySuccessful next external master image registration
the image was updated and yyClearing the Error input
registered as a master image.
yySwitching the program number
yyFor the new master image,
the outline cannot be yyProceeding to the settings screen of the sensor
extracted with the outline yyChecking that the image to be registered and the
tool. detection tools/position adjustment settings are
Red Blink yyFor the new master image, applicable.
the area cannot be extracted
with the color area/area tool.
An FTP error occurred. The
following errors occurred.
yyConnection with the FTP An FTP error can be fixed using one of the following
server failed. procedures.
yyTranfer to the transfer yyClick the [OK] button on the Error screen.
destination folder failed. yyClear Error input.
yyThe transfer speed could yyResolve the causes of transfer failure.
not catch up the sensor
processing speed.
A yyPower is not supplied to this
device. yyConnect the power cable correctly.
OFF yyDuring focusing position yyUse a power source of the correct rating.
adjustment. yyComplete the focusing position adjustment.
(Manual focus type only)
Errors in a state that the PWR/ERR indicator light lights in red or blinks in red turn the error output ON.
Cables (Page 2-17)

Error Messages
Confirming error messages of the monitor
Output/
Message Cause Remedy
Indicator
Sensor system error happens. A system error occurred yyTurn on the power of the sensor
in the sensor. again.
Turn on sensor. yyIt is conceivable that a yyIf the same error occurs, contact *1
If not turned on, contact local fault occurred inside the your nearest KEYENCE office.
service center. sensor.
Sensor internal memory reading A memory read error yyInitialize the settings following
has failed. occurred when the the instructions on the screen.
sensor started. yyTurn on the power of the sensor
Turn on or initialize sensor.
yyA data trouble occurred. again.
*1
After this message is closed, yyIt is conceivable that yyDo not turn OFF the power
[Initialize] button will be displayed. the power was switched while saving the settings.
OFF during writing, or yyIf the same error occurs, contact
noise was picked up. your nearest KEYENCE office.
Sensor program xx is damaged. A memory read error yyInitialize the settings following
Initialization is necessary. occurred when the the instructions on the screen.
sensor started. yyTurn on the power of the sensor
After this message is closed, yyA data trouble occurred again.
[Initialize] button will be displayed. during the execution of yyDo not turn OFF the power
program number xx. while saving the settings.
*1
A
yyIt is conceivable that yyIf the same error occurs,
the power was switched contact your nearest KEYENCE
OFF during writing, or office.
noise was picked up.
Trigger error A trigger error occurred. yyAn trigger error can be fixed
Judgment processing has using one of the following
not been executed. procedure.
yyIf a target is to be yyNext normal trigger input
imaged using an yyClearing the Error input
external trigger, the yySwitching the program
external trigger will be number
input during a BUSY yyProceeding to the settings
status. screen of the sensor
yyIf a target is to be yyDo not input the external trigger
*2
imaged using an during a BUSY status.
internal trigger, the yySet the trigger interval of the
trigger interval will internal trigger to a value that
become shorter than is longer than the processing
the processing time. time.
yyAn error will not occur if the
trigger is set to [OFF] described
in output assignment for the
Settings Navigator (Page
4-64).

Error Messages
Output/
Indicator
Some tools can not correctly judge An external master image yyAn external master image
because of insufficient outline registration error (with registration error can be fixed
extraction amount as a result of registered master image) using one of the following
Ext. Master Save. occurred. The following procedures.
(Matching rate is 0.) errors occurred even yySuccessful next external
Check tool configuration. though the image was master image registration
Some tools can not correctly updated and registered yyClearing the Error input
judged because area is 0 as a as a master image. yySwitching the program
result of Ext. Master Save. yyFor the new master number
(Matching rate is 0.) image, the outline yyProceeding to the settings
*2
Check tool configuration. cannot be extracted screen of the sensor
with the outline tool. yyChecking that the image to be
Brightness of brightness adjustment yyFor the new master registered and the detection
area is not adjustable as a result of image, the area cannot tools/position adjustment
Ext. Master Save. be extracted with the settings are applicable.
Check configuration of brightness Color Area/Area tool. yyAdjusting the brightness of the
adjustment. yyThe brightness image to be registered properly.
correction cannot be
performed correctly for
the new master image.
A Outer master registration fails

because image is not captured.
An external master image yyAn external master image
registration error (with no registration error can be fixed
registered master image) using one of the following
occurred. The master procedures.
image is not updated. yySuccessful in next external
yyThe image to be master image registration
Outer master registration fails registered as a master yyClearing the Error input
because of lack of work memory. image was not imaged. yySwitching the program
yyThe work memory is number *2
insufficient. yyProceeding to the settings
screen of the sensor
yyTaking an image to be
registered as a mater image
and registering it as an external
master image.
yyDeleting one or more detection
tools.
Monitor fatal error (XXX) occurred. A system error occurred yyTurn on the monitor power again.
Contact your nearest KEYENCE in the monitor. yyIf the same error occurs,
office. yyIt is conceivable that a contact your nearest KEYENCE
Monitor system error happens. fault occurred inside the office.
monitor. *3
Turn on monitor.
If not turned on, contact local
service center.

Error Messages
Output/
Indicator
Connecting to sensor Connection is not possible Refer to Remedy when the
because there is no Monitor cannot be Connected
response from the sensor. with the Sensor (Page A-29).
Connecting to sensor Connection is not
(XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX) possible because there
is no response from the
sensor with the specified
IP address. *4
Communication timeout to sensor Connection is not possible

happens. because there is no
response from the sensor.
Data transfer to sensor fails. Connection is not possible
because data transmission
to the sensor has failed.
Specified sensor is being Connection is not possible Disconnect the presently
connected to other PC or monitor. because the specified sensor connected monitor or PC and
is connected to a different then re-connect it.
monitor or a different PC. *4
Only one monitor or PC can
be connected to a sensor at
the same time.
A
Writing in file fails. File saving to the USB Replace the USB memory.
memory failed.
Access to file or folder fails. Access to the USB yyFormat the USB memory.
memory failed. yyReplace the USB memory.
Data saving has failed. The USB memory is
If it happens repeatedly: broken.
yyReplace USB memory.
yyFormat USB memory.
Disk space is insufficient. Saving is not possible Increase the amount of free
because the amount of space by deleting files in the USB
free space of the USB memory or by formatting.
memory is insufficient.

Error Messages
Output/
Indicator
This file configuration data is for The setting files for a Read the setting files of a sensor
xxxx. different model of sensors of the same model.
This file is not readable. cannot be read.
FTP Connection Error Connection with the FTP Refer to Remedy when data
server failed. transfer via FTP is unavailable
FTP Transfer Error Data transfer to the (Page A-41).
(Transfer Failed) transfer destination folder
failed.
*2
FTP Transfer Error Data which is larger than
(Insufficient Data Buffer) the remaining storage of
the FTP buffer has been
created and the transfer
failed.
No sensor head is connected to the The sensor head is not Connect the sensor head.
sensor amplifier. connected.
Connect a sensor head to the sensor
amplifier, and then turn on power
again.
If the problem is not solved, contact
your nearest KEYENCE office.
The activation of the Expansion unit The expansion amplifier yyTurn the power off, connect the
amplifier cannot be confirmed. cannot be recognized. main unit and expansion unit
A Check the Expansion unit amplifier
correctly, then turn the power
back on.
connection, and then turn on power yyIf the same error occurs,
to the sensor again. contact your nearest KEYENCE
If the problem is not solved, contact office.
your nearest KEYENCE office.
The load operation failed. The file to be imported is Select the setting file is for the
This setting file is designed for Main not correct. expansion sensor amplifier.
unit sensor amplifiers.
Select a setting file designed for
Expansion unit sensor amplifiers.
The load operation failed. The file to be imported is Select the setting file for the main
This setting file is designed for not correct. sensor amplifier.
Expansion unit sensor amplifiers.
Select a setting file designed for
Main unit sensor amplifiers.
A connection cannot be established with Connection with the Check the items below.
number **. sensor failed. yySpecify the correct IP address
Check the following items. of the sensor.
- The sensors IP address. yyPower supply for the sensor.
- The sensors power supply. yyNetwork connection
- The network wiring. yyNetwork Settings of the monitor
- The network settings of the monitor.
*1 Error output from the sensor: ON, PWR/ERR indicator light of the sensor: Lighting (red),
PWR indicator light of the monitor: Lighting (red)
*2 Error output from the sensor: ON, PWR/ERR indicator light of the sensor: Blinking (red),
PWR indicator light of the monitor: Blinking (red)
*3 PWR indicator light of the monitor: Lighting (red)
*4 SENSOR indicator light of the monitor: Off

Remedy when the Monitor cannot be Connected with the Sensor
Remedy when the Monitor cannot be Connected

with the Sensor
Remedy when direct connection (1unit) is unavailable
Status Remedy
yySupply power to the sensor.
yyConnect the sensor and the monitor correctly and directly
with a monitor cable.
Connecting directly (1 unit) (Page 2-31)
yyAfter a correct connection is established as a result of a
retry, the run screen opens automatically.
yyThe Sensor Connect screen opens when the [Cancel]
button or [OK] button is tapped. Tap the [Connect] button
after a correct connection has been established.
Retries occur repeatedly because
connection is not possible.
The status is as shown below.
yyConnection is not possible after power ON.
yyConnection is not possible using the [Connect]
button of the sensor connection setup screen.
If the problem is not solved using one of the above

remedies, reset (initialize) the sensor network settings. A
Initializing the Network Settings (IP Reset Switch)
(Page A-43)
yyThe error (381) "Data transfer to sensor

fails." may also be displayed.
yyConnection became impossible after
connection was established once.
yyConnect the sensor and the monitor correctly and directly
with a monitor cable.
yyTap the [OK] button and close the message.
yyIn the case of a network connection, change the
configuration to network connection.
When connecting with the sensor via a network
(Page 6-57)
The network is connected to other network
devices such as multiple sensors or
computers.

Remedy when direct connection (2 units or more) is unavailable
Status Remedy
yyConnect the sensor and the monitor correctly.
Connecting via network (Direct connection (2 units or
more)/Network connection) (Page 2-31)
yyAfter a correct connection is established as a result of
yyThe Sensor Connect screen opens when the [Cancel]
button or [OK] button is tapped. Tap the [Connect] button
after a correct connection has established.
Retries occur repeatedly because connection
is not possible.
The status is as shown below.
yyConnection is not possible after power ON.
yyConnection is not possible using the [Connect]
button of the sensor connection setup screen.
If the problem is not solved using one of the above

remedies, reset (initialize) the sensor network settings.
A Initializing the Network Settings (IP Reset Switch)
(Page A-43)
Connection became impossible after

Turn the sensor off, connect the sensor head and sensor
amplifier correctly, then turn the power on.
Communication between the sensor head

and sensor amplifier became impossible
after connection was established once.
yyThe protocol setting for the field network is [PROFINET].
Set the protocol setting for the field network to OFF. To
set to it OFF, a network connection is required.
yyTo use PROFINET, use the network connection.
yyTap the [OK] button and close the message.
The version of the IV-series Vision Sensor is older than
R3.00.00. Update the version of the IV-series Vision
When the connected sensors were searched for, the Sensor.
sensors connected to the monitor were not listed.

Remedy when connection via a network is unavailable
Status Remedy
yySupply power to the sensor and the network equipment.
yyCorrectly connect with the sensor and the network
equipment.
yyAfter a correct connection is established as a result of
The Sensor Connect screen opens when the [Cancel]

Retries occur repeatedly because
button or [OK] button is tapped.
connection is not possible after the power is
turned on.
yyTap the [Connect] button after a correct connection has

established. A
yyTap the [Search Sensor] button to search for the sensor.

Searching for and connecting to sensors on the
network (Page 6-57)
If a connection is unavailable, refer to When the
connection cannot be established by searching for the
yyAn error (381) "Data transfer to sensor
sensor (Page A-32).
fails." may also be displayed.
yyConnection became impossible after yyTap the [Specify Sensor] button to connect the sensor.
Specifying the IP address of and connecting to the
sensor (Page 6-58)
connection cannot be established by specifying the
sensor (Page A-33).

Status Remedy
When the connection cannot be established by
searching for the sensor
yyCorrectly connect with the sensor and the network
equipment.
Connecting via network (Direct connection (2 units
or more)/Network connection) (Page 2-31)
yyConfirm that the IP address of the monitor does not
The sensor was not found using the [Search coincide with that of the sensor or another device. Also,
Sensor] button on the Sensor Connect correctly set the subnet mask and the default gateway.
screen. Confirming/Setting the IP address of the monitor
(Page A-38)
yyChange to direct connection (1 unit or 2 units or more)
and confirm that the IP address of the sensor does not
coincide with that of the monitor or another device. Also,
reset (initialize) the network setting for the sensor.
When directly connecting with a sensor (1 unit) (Page
6-55)
When directly connecting with multiple sensors (2
units or more) (Page 6-56)
A Confirming/Setting the IP address of the sensor
(Page A-39)
(Page A-43)
yyThe following conditions are required for a successful
sensor search.
yyThe subnet masks of the sensor and monitor are matched.
yyThe sensor network setting is not set or the IP address
is not duplicated.

Status Remedy
When the connection cannot be established by
specifying the sensor
yyCorrectly connect with the sensor and the network equipment.
Connecting via network (Direct connection (2 units
or more)/Network connection) (Page 2-31)
yySpecify the correct IP address of the sensor.
yyIf the sensor IP address has not been set, establish a
Connection is not possible using the [Specify
connection using the [Search Sensor] button.
Sensor] button or the [Connect] button on

Searching for and connecting to sensors on the network
the Sensor Connect screen.
(Page 6-57)
yyConfirm that the IP address of the monitor does not
coincide with that of the sensor or another device. Also,
correctly set the subnet mask and the default gateway.
Confirming/Setting the IP address of the monitor
(Page A-38)
yyChange to direct connection (1 unit or 2 units or more)
and confirm that the IP address of the sensor does not
coincide with that of the monitor or another device. Also,
correctly set the subnet mask and the default gateway.
Also, reset (initialize) the network setting for the sensor. A
When directly connecting with a sensor (1 unit)
(Page 6-55)
When directly connecting with multiple sensors (2 units
or more) (Page 6-56)
Confirming/Setting the IP address of the sensor
(Page A-39)
(Page A-43)
yyTap the [Search Sensor] button to search for the sensor.

Searching for and connecting to sensors on the
network (Page 6-57)
connection cannot be established by searching for the
sensor (Page A-32).
yyTap the [Specify Sensor] button to connect.
Specifying the IP address of and connecting to the sensor
First connection after purchasing, or (Page 6-58)
connection after monitor initialization. If a connection is unavailable, refer to When the
connection cannot be established by specifying the sensor
(Page A-33).

Confirming the status by observing the indicator light of the sensor
LINK/ACT (link/activity) indicator light

Displays the link status with the network.
zz
IV-G10/IV-G15 zz
IV-500/IV-150/IV-2000
LINK/ACT LINK/ACT indicator

indicator light light
Status of the
LINK/ACT Status Remedy
indicator light
Correct link with the monitor
A ON
or the Ethernet switch.
Link is normal.
Green Correct link with the monitor When connection with the monitor is not possible, check
or the Ethernet switch. the STATUS indicator light.
Blink
Data are being sent and
received.
No correct link with the
monitor or the Ethernet
switch.
yySupply power to the monitor or the Ethernet switch of
OFF yyPower is not supplied to this
the connection target.
unit or the connection target.
yyConnect the cable correctly.
yyThe cable is not connected
correctly.

STATUS indicator light

Indicates the connection status with the monitor.
Confirm that the LINK/ACT indicator light is green (lighting) or green (blinking) and then check the STATUS
indicator light.
zz
IV-G10/IV-G15 zz
IV-500/IV-150/IV-2000
STATUS indicator STATUS indicator

light light
Status of the STATUS

Status Remedy
indicator light
Correct connection with the
monitor.
ON The connection with the -
monitor has been established A
by acquiring the IP address.
For direct connection (1 unit)
Green No correct connection with unavailable (Page A-29)
the monitor.
For direct connection (2 units or more)
The IP address of the sensor
Blink Remedy when direct connection (2 units or
has been acquired, but
more) is unavailable (Page A-30)
connection with the monitor
has not been established. For network connection
No correct connection with
the monitor.
OFF Remedy when direct connection (2 units or
The IP address of the sensor
more) is unavailable (Page A-30)
has not been acquired.
For network connection
If the light is ON (red), the IP address coincides or a network loop is detected.
yyThe communication timeout time is 1 minute.

yyDuring the timeout interval after trouble has occurred, the monitor screen may fail to be updated while
the STATUS indicator light turned on, or the monitor may not accept an operation.
yyDuring the timeout interval, devices other than the previously connected monitor cannot be connected.

Confirming the status by observing the SENSOR indicator light of the monitor
The causes of an unavailable connection and countermeasures can be confirmed by checking the
SENSOR indicator light of the monitor.
SENSOR indicator light
Status of
the SENSOR Status Remedy
indicator light
Correct connection with the
ON -
sensor.
No correct connection with the Remedy when direct connection (1unit) is
A Green
sensor.
The link with the sensor or
Blink the Ethernet switch has been Remedy when direct connection (2 units or more) is
established, but connection unavailable (Page A-30)
with the sensor has not been For network connection
established. Remedy when connection via a network is unavailable
(Page A-31)
No correct connection with the
yySupply power to the monitor.
sensor.
yySupply power to the sensor or the Ethernet switch of
OFF The link with the sensor or the
the connection target.
Ethernet switch has not been
yyConnect the cable correctly.
established.
yyThe communication timeout interval is 1 minute.

yyDuring the timeout interval after trouble has occurred, the screen may fail to be updated while the
SENSOR indicator light in on, or the monitor may not accept an operation.

Other methods of confirming 3 Input the IP address of the sensor whose

a network connection existence is to be confirmed and tap the
[Ping Test] button.
Confirming the existence of the sensor

from the monitor
Whether or not the sensor is correctly connected can
be confirmed by performing a test communication
from the monitor to the sensor to be connected.
1 Displays the Sensor Connect screen.

The confirmation result will be displayed on the
monitor.
zz
When the confirmation result is OK
zz
When the confirmation result is NG
zz
For the first startup of the monitor or after
monitor initialization

If the displayed confirmation result is
(Network Connection) (Page 3-9)
NG A
Confirm the following contents.
zz
If not connected with the sensor via a
yySupply power to the sensor and the network
network
equipment.
Automatically opens after the power is turned on.
yyCorrectly connect with the sensor and the
zz
If connected with the sensor via a network network equipment.
When connecting with the sensor via a Connecting via network (Direct connection
network (Page 6-57) (2 units or more)/Network connection)
(Page 2-31)
When the monitor and the sensor are connected yyCorrectly set the IP address, the subnet mask,
via a network, the [Network Connection] will be and the default gateway of the monitor and
displayed and the IP address of the connected sensor.
sensor will be displayed. Searching for a sensor to be connected
(Page 3-10)
2 Tap the [Specify Sensor] button. Confirming/Setting the IP address of the
monitor (Page A-38)
Confirming/Setting the IP address of the
sensor (Page A-39)
The existence confirmation function utilizes the ping

command. Note that even when this is executed
for devices other than a sensor, confirmation will
succeed if there is a response to the ping command.

Confirming/Setting the IP address of 4 After confirmation/setting is completed,

the monitor
yyIf the setting has not been changed, system
1 Open the Monitor Device Settings screen. returns to the Monitor Settings screen.
yyIf the setting has been changed, the message
zz
If not connected with the sensor via "Monitor will be restarted." appears.
network
After the power turned on, the Sensor Connect 5 Tap the [OK] button if the setting has been
screen opens automatically. Tap the [Monitor changed.
Device Settings] button. The monitor restarts.
zz
If connected with the sensor via a network zz
If the monitor could be connected with the
Monitor Settings (Page 6-54) sensor
The run screen opens.
2 Tap the [Network Settings] button. zz
If the monitor could not be connected with
the sensor
The Sensor Connect screen opens. Set the
connection method etc. and connect the monitor
with the sensor.
Sensor Connect (Page 6-54)
A
The monitor network setting screen opens. For details of the connection method after initial
startup of the monitor or after monitor initialization
3 Confirm the IP address of the monitor. (Page 3-16), refer to Operation for initial startup
of the monitor (Network Connection) (Page 3-9).
To change the settings, tap the [Edit] button

and display the editing screen. Set an arbitrary
address and tap the [OK] button.

Confirming/Setting the IP address of 5 Confirm the IP address of the sensor.

the sensor
Directly connect (1 unit) the sensor and monitor,
and confirm the IP address of the sensor.
After returning to the network connection, set
the confirmed IP address of the sensor, and then
confirm whether or not to connect with the sensor.
1 Directly connect (1 unit) the monitor and yyTapping the [Edit] button displays the screen
the sensor of the confirmation/setting to edit the address. Set the arbitrary address
target. and tap the [OK] button.
yyWhen the [Reset] button is tapped, the setup
values for the [IP Address], [Subnet Mask], and
When directly connecting with a sensor [Default Gateway] will be reset and nothing will
(1 unit) (Page 6-55) be set. Again, set an arbitrary address.
2 Display the Sensor Setup Menu screen. 6 After confirmation/setting is completed, tap
the [OK] button and exit from the network
(Page 6-7) settings.
3 Tap the [Sensor Advanced] button. 7 Turn OFF the power and connect the
sensor and monitor via a network.
Connecting via network (Direct connection
(2 units or more)/Network connection)
A
(Page 2-31)
8 Turn on the power.

zz
If the monitor could be connected with the
sensor
The run screen opens.
4 Tap the [Environmental] button, and then zz

If the monitor could not be connected with
the sensor
the [Network Settings] button.
The Sensor Setup Menu screen opens. Set the
connection method etc. and connect with the
sensor.

Confirming the router settings

When a router is used, confirm that the following
port is opened.
Sensor : 63000 (default value)
For the setting methods of the sensor port

number, refer to the following.
yyBOOTP is fixed as 67 or 68.
yyThe FTP port number can be changed on the
server. It is generally 20 or 21.

Remedy when data transfer via FTP is unavailable
Status Remedy
yyConfirm the IP address of the FTP server and set it
correctly.
yyConfirm the port number of the FTP server and set it
correctly. Moreover, confirm the firewall software on the
PC whether the port is available or not.
yyConfirm the user name for logging in to the FTP server
and set it correctly.
yyConfirm the password for logging in to the FTP server
and set it correctly.
Connection with the FTP server failed.
FTP Destination Settings (Page 6-41)

yyAuthorization for accessing the transfer destination folder A
is not granted. Acquire the access authorization of the
transfer destination folder and perform the operation
again.
yyConfirm that there is no file with the same name as the
transfer destination folder name which has been set. If a
file with the same name exists, change the file name or
change the transfer destination folder.
Transfer Destination Folder Settings (Page 6-44)
Data transfer to the transfer destination
yyWhen you switched from the [Run] screen to the
folder failed.
[Program] screen, the screen is switched to the [Program]
screen after the transfer of untransferred data has
finished.
If you click the [Cancel] button during the transfer, the

transfer will be forcibly finished and the Error screen will
appear.

Status Remedy
yyChange the trigger cycle of the sensor.
Setting the Trigger Options (Page 4-11)
yyConfirm the stress status of the network.
Data which is larger than the remaining

storage of the FTP buffer has been created
and the transfer failed.

The network settings such as the IP address can Initializing the network settings
be initialized to the factory default by means of the
IP reset switch of the sensor.
For the IV-G10 / IV-G15
yyThe IP reset switch is used when joining the
sensor used in another network to a new network, 1 Insert a long and thin pin (1 to 2 mm in
or when trouble occurs during connection. diameter) into the screw hole and press
yyDo not initialize a correctly connected sensor. the IP reset switch for about 3 seconds
The connection will be interrupted. with the power on.
STATUS
indicator
Settings after initialization light
Settings after
Setting Items
initialization
100/10Mbps
Communication speed
Automatically switches
IP address setting BOOTP
method (Bootstrap Protocol) Long and thin pin
IP Address 0.0.0.0*1, *2 The STATUS indicator light will blink twice
Subnet Mask 0.0.0.0*2 (orange) and then turn off. The network setting
Default Gateway 0.0.0.0*2

is initialized.
A
*1 If the IP address is 0.0.0.0, only the BOOTP
For the IV-500/IV-150/IV-2000
client function can be used.
Do not assign an IP address from the BOOTP
server or DHCP server except the monitor to be
1 Remove the fixing screw of the front cover
indicated by the mark.
connected.
*2 In the Network Settings screen of the sensor,
Remove only the fixing screw of the front
[Empty] is displayed.
cover indicated by the mark. Do not remove
Network Settings (Page 6-39) the front cover.
Connecting method after initialization Indicator light
For direct connection

There is no need to set the IP address.
When directly connecting with a sensor
mark
(1 unit) (Page 6-55)
When directly connecting with multiple
sensors (2 units or more) (Page 6-56)
For network connection

Search for the sensor to be connected. Search will
be made for a sensor without IP address, set the IP
address by following the instructions on the screen.
When connecting with the sensor via a
network (Page 6-57)

2 Insert a long and thin pin (1 to 2 mm in

diameter) into the screw hole and press
the IP reset switch for about 3 seconds.
Long and
thin pin
The STATUS indicator light will blink twice

(orange) and then turn off.
The network setting is initialized.
3 Tighten the fixing screw of the front cover.


Maintenance
Maintenance
Attaching the protection sheet Replacing the front cover

A protection sheet (OP-87463) can be attached to
yyIV-500 yyIV-150 yyIV-2000
protect the LCD panel.
The front cover can be replaced with the optional
1 Remove the backing film (transparent) spare front cover (OP-87461) if it became dirty or
from the back and front sides of the damaged.
protection sheet.
Replace the front cover with the correct
procedure by following the precautions
below. Otherwise the enclosure rating (IP67)
may not be maintained.
yyDo not let dust or dirt stick to the O-shaped ring.
yyAttach the O-shaped ring on the correct position.
1 Remove the old front cover and the

O-shaped ring.
Backing film O-shaped ring (small)

(back)
Adhesive side
(back of the protection O-shaped ring (large)
sheet)
A
Protection sheet
Backing film (front)
Front cover
2 Apply the protection sheet on the monitor Dedicated screw
display with the tab at the lower right.
2 Install the front cover after embedding the
O-shaped ring.
yyScrew: Dedicated screw 2
Use the attached dedicated screw.
Tab
O-shaped ring (small)
O-shaped ring (large)
Protection sheet
Apply the protection film while make sure that

no trash tucked in.
Dedicated screw
Front cover

Index
Index
Numerics C
1. Image Optimization....................................... A-15 Cables................................................................2-17
1. Image Optimization (Clearly Image a Target)....4-6 Cancelling One-Shot output.................................7-7
2. Master Registration....................................... A-16 Capturing the monitor screen and saving to
2. Master Registration (Registering the USB memory................................................6-30
an Image as a Reference for Judgment)............4-24 Capturing the screen..........................................6-30
3. Tool Settings.................................................. A-16 Changeover for a Target (Program Functions)....6-15
3. Tool Settings Changing Over.....................................................7-8
(Setting the Judgment Method for Targets)........4-32 Changing the logging conditions of
4. Output Assignment........................................ A-19 the image history................................................6-24
4. Output Assignment Changing the Sensor Displayed on the Monitor
(Setting Details of Outputting to Output Line).....4-64 (Change Connected Sensor Function).................6-8
Changing the sensor to be displayed on
A a monitor..............................................................6-9
Changing the timing of the status output..............7-7
Achieving adequate image brightness...............5-33
Checking errors by observing the PWR/ERR
If the brightness cannot be adjusted due to
indicator light..................................................... A-23
uneven brightness........................................5-33
Checking the Package Contents........................1-10
If the brightness cannot be adjusted in
the Auto Brightness Adjustment....................5-33
(IV-G series).........................................................2-2
Achieving good focus.........................................5-34
Clearing Errors...................................................7-11
If good focus cannot be achieved by
the Auto Focus Adjustment...........................5-34 Clearing the saved images.................................6-23
Adding a tool......................................................4-35 Color Area/Area tool...........................................4-44
A Adding/Editing/Deleting a tool............................4-35
Adjustable bracket for IV-G series......................1-12
Color Filters (color type only).............................4-22
Communication Cable........................................1-16
Adjusting the color tint (for color type only)........5-36 Confirming error messages of the monitor........ A-25
Adjusting the installed distance (WD).................5-32 Confirming or deleting
Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment....................5-15 the images registered for the Tool Auto Tuning....5-26
Advanced Brightness Adjustment.......................4-21 Confirming/Setting the IP address of
Advanced Color Extraction/ the monitor........................................................ A-38
Advanced Brightness Extraction........................4-53 Confirming/Setting the IP address of
Advanced Network Settings...............................6-40 the sensor.......................................................... A-39
Attaching the optional mounting bracket..............2-4 Confirming the existence of the sensor from
Attaching the protection sheet........................... A-45 the monitor........................................................ A-37
Auto Brightness Adjustment...............................4-12 If the displayed confirmation
Auto Focus Adjustment Position result is NG................................................ A-38
Confirming the router settings........................... A-40
(auto focus type only).........................................6-51
the SENSOR indicator light of the monitor........ A-37
B
Connecting directly.............................................2-31
Backing up in a batch.........................................6-26 Connecting directly (1 unit).................................2-31
Backlight.............................................................6-62 Connecting method after initialization............... A-43
Basic adjustments........................... 5-37, 5-38, 5-39 For direct connection................................... A-43
Basic configurations of IV/IV-G Serie...................1-2 For network connection............................... A-43
Basic Operation Flow...........................................3-4 Connecting the monitor cable/Ethernet cable....2-32
Basic Operation for the Monitor..........................3-17 Connecting the sensor head/amplifier cable for
Basic Operation of the Settings Navigator...........4-3 IV-G series and sensor amplifier........................2-17
Bracket...............................................................1-14 Connecting the sensor head/amplifier cable for
Brightness correction..........................................4-30 IV-G series and sensor head..............................2-17
Connecting the Ultra Compact Vision Sensor
(IV-G series).......................................................2-17
Connecting the Vision Sensor (IVseries)...........2-22

Index
Connecting via network (Direct connection Extended functions for the Output Assignment....4-66
(2 units or more)/Network connection)...............2-31 Extended functions for the Position
Connecting via network (Direct Connection Adjustment tool...................................................4-61
(2 units or more)/Network Connection)..............2-28 Extended functions for the Tool settings.............4-62
Controlling Timing of Judgment with Triggers......7-2 Extended functions items for
Copying a program.............................................6-19 the Output Assignment.......................................4-66
Copy Tool............................................................4-62 Extended functions of the Color Area/
Correcting the distorted images due to Area tool.............................................................4-52
the installation....................................................5-33 External trigger.....................................................7-2
Cut-off process of the matching rate................... A-5
F
D Field Network.....................................................6-46
Default value......................................................4-65 Finishing by completing all steps..........................4-5
Deleting a tool....................................................4-35 Finishing the Settings Navigator...........................4-5
Device name......................................................6-37 Finishing without completing the step..................4-5
Device settings...................................................6-37 Fixed Reference Area.........................................4-54
Dimensions...........................................................8-8 Flow in the Settings Navigator..............................4-2
DIN mounting adapter........................................1-15 Flow of the internal process...............................5-40
Displaying and outputting the status result.......... A-4 Focus Adjustment...............................................4-13
Displaying and outputting the status result at Focus adjustment for the auto focusing type......4-13
the time of position adjustment............................ A-4 Folder composition and file naming rules...........6-31
Displaying from the run screen................. 6-21, 6-25 For the processing time......................................5-40
Displaying from the Sensor setup For Ultra Compact Vision Sensor (IV-G series)....2-2
menu screen............................................. 6-21, 6-25 For Vision Sensor (IV series)................................2-3
Displaying the histogram....................................5-12 Front cover (for replacement).............................1-14 A
Displaying the Sensor Image History screen.....6-21 FTP.....................................................................6-40
Displaying the Sensor Setup Menu Screen..........6-7 FTP Destination Settings....................................6-41
Displaying the Settings Navigator guide...............4-5
Displaying the statistical information..................5-10 H
Displaying the USB Memory screen...................6-25
Hanging on the hook..........................................2-13
Display Method of Extended Functions Menus....4-70
Hiding the histogram..........................................5-14
Display methods for tools.....................................5-8
Hiding the statistical information.........................5-12
For color type..................................................5-8
For monochrome type.....................................5-9
Display Settings..................................................6-59
I
Dome attachment...............................................1-13 Imaging Area......................................................4-20
Imaging the target widely...................................5-32
E Importing the individual status output of
each detection tool/logic.......................................7-6
Editing a program name.....................................6-19
Importing the Status Output.................................7-5
Editing a tool.......................................................4-35
Importing the total status output...........................7-5
Editing the tool window.......................................3-18
Infrared polarization filter attachment.................1-13
Editing the value with the slider..........................3-17
Initialize Monitor.................................................6-64
Enabling the screen capturing function..............6-30
Initializing a program..........................................6-20
Enlarging the image display.................................5-6
Initializing the monitor.........................................3-16
Environmental....................................................6-32
Initializing the network settings.......................... A-43
Error Messages................................................. A-23
Ethernet cable (M12 4pin - RJ-45).....................1-16
(IP Reset Switch)............................................... A-43
Exiting the sensor settings and starting
Initializing the sensor................................ 3-15, 6-53
an operation.........................................................5-2
Input circuit.........................................................2-25
Extended functions for the Image Optimization....4-18
Input Response Time.........................................7-13
Extended functions for the Master Registration....4-26
Description for symbols................................7-13
Extended functions for the Outline tool..............4-41
Response time for the error clear input........7-13

Index
Response time for the external master Monitor Settings screen....................................... A-9
registration input...........................................7-13 Mounting adapter...............................................1-13
Response time for the switch program input....7-13 Mounting the attachment for IV-G series..............2-6
Input Settings.....................................................6-33 Mounting the dome attachment..........................2-11
Inputting characters............................................3-19 Mounting the IV-G10 (Main).................................2-5
Installed distance of the dome attachment.........2-11 Mounting the IV-G15 (Expansion)........................2-5
Installing/Removing the USB memory................6-25 Mounting the Monitor..........................................2-13
Installing the sensor at an angle.........................5-35 Mounting the mounting adapter............................2-9
Installing the USB memory.................................6-25 Mounting from the jig side...............................2-9
Intelligent Monitor...............................................1-14 Mounting on the wall.......................................2-9
Internal trigger......................................................7-3 Mounting the polarizing filter attachment for
I/O cable for IV-G series.....................................1-11 IV-G500CA/500MA/150MA (OP-87899),
I/O Monitor..........................................................6-36 polarizing filter attachment for IV-G300CA
I/O Settings.........................................................6-33 (OP-87900), or polarizing filter attachment for
Items of extended functions for IV-G600MA (OP-87901).......................................2-8
the Image Optimization......................................4-18 Mounting the Sensor............................................2-2
Items of extended functions for Mounting the sensor amplifier of
the Master Registration......................................4-26 the Ultra Compact Vision Sensor (IV-G series)......2-5
Items of extended functions for Mounting the sensor head............................ 2-2, 2-4
the Tool settings..................................................4-62 Mounting the sensor head of the Ultra Compact
Vision Sensor (IV-G series)..................................2-4
J Mounting the sensor onto
the mounting adapter.........................................2-10
Judgment processing flow....................................1-8
Mounting the spread lens attachment for
A L IV-G150MA (OP-87902) (for the IV-G150MA)......2-9
Mounting the Vision Sensor (IV series)................2-9
LAN cable (RJ-45 - RJ-45).................................1-16 Mounting to a panel............................................2-15
Language...........................................................6-61 Mounting to a wall..............................................2-13
Lighting...............................................................4-21 Mounting to the DIN rail......................................2-16
LINK/ACT (link/activity) indicator light............... A-34 Mounting using DIN mounting adapter...............2-16
List of the Useful Features...................................6-2 Mounting with the wall mounting adapter...........2-13
Loading and confirming the saved images.........6-22
Logic Settings.....................................................4-67 N
Name and Function of Each Part.......................1-17
M Name and function of each part of the sensor...1-20
Main screen for the Image Optimization...............4-7 Name and function of each part
Main screen for the Master Registration............4-24 of the sensor amplifier........................................1-18
Main screen for the Output Assignment.............4-64 Names and Functions of the Operation Screen....5-4
Main screen for the Tool Settings.......................4-34 Network Settings...................................... 6-39, 6-59
Maintenance...................................................... A-45 No-voltage input
Mask settings.....................................................4-49 (When the NPN output is selected)....................2-25
Master image registration from
the image history in the sensor..........................4-26 O
Matching rate at the time of protrusion................ A-5
Operating in the shortest cycle.............................7-4
Operation flow for the Tool Auto Tuning..............5-17
Position Adjustment Tool..................................... A-5
Operation flow when the power is turned on........3-5
Menu Screen........................................................5-4
Operation for changing the sensor head
Monitor...............................................................1-22
(IV-G series only)................................................3-14
Monitor Device Settings.....................................6-54
Monitor Environment..........................................6-54
(Direct Connection (1 unit))..................................3-6
Monitor Information............................................6-63
Monitor power cable (M8 4pin - strand wire)......1-15
Monitor Settings.................................................6-54

Index
Operation for initial startup of the monitor Registering the images from the file saved in
(Direct Connection (2 units or more))...................3-7 the USB memory................................................5-23
Operation for initial startup of the monitor Registering the images from the image history
(Network Connection)...........................................3-9 saved in the sensor............................................5-21
Operation for initial startup of the sensor...........3-13 Registering the images taken in the Test mode....5-19
Operation of the indicator light...........................1-21 Registering the master image............................4-25
Operation of the sensor amplifier indicator light....1-19 Registering the Master Image..............................7-9
Operations when Power of the Sensor is Registering the OK/NG images to be used for
Turned on...........................................................7-12 the Tool Auto Tuning...........................................5-19
Operation when the Power is Turned on..............3-5 Remedy when connection via a network is
Optional parts for the monitor.............................1-15 unavailable........................................................ A-31
Optional parts for the Ultra Compact Remedy when direct connection
Vision Sensor (IV-G series)................................1-11 (2 units or more) is unavailable......................... A-30
Optional parts for the Vision Sensor Remedy when the Monitor cannot be
(IV series)...........................................................1-13 Connected with the Sensor............................... A-29
Other connections..............................................2-29 Removing the USB memory...............................6-25
Other methods of confirming Replacing the front cover.................................. A-45
a network connection........................................ A-37 Response time for the error clear input..............7-13
Outline tool.........................................................4-36 Response time for the external master
Output circuit......................................................2-25 registration input.................................................7-13
Output Settings...................................................6-35 Response time for the switch program input......7-13
Overview of IV Series...........................................1-6 Rotate 180........................................................6-49
Overview of Screen and Operation......................3-2 Rotation Range........................................ 4-42, 4-61
Overview of the Operation Screen.......................5-3 RUN screen (menu display OFF)........................ A-6
Overview of the program functions.....................6-15 RUN screen (menu display ON).......................... A-6
A
P S
Panel cutting dimension.....................................2-15 Saving the image history individually.................6-27
Panel mounting adapter.....................................1-15 Saving the Sensor Settings or Images to
Password Lock...................................................6-38 the USB Memory................................................6-25
Polarity...............................................................6-36 Saving the sensor settings or the image history....6-26
Polarized visible light filter attachment...............1-13 Search Algorithm................................................4-42
Position Adjustment tool.....................................4-55 Searching for a sensor to be connected.............3-10
Power I/O cable (M12 12pin - strand wire).........1-13 Selecting a display method for tools.....................5-7
Preparation flow.................................................6-16 Selecting a tool according to
Preparation procedures......................................6-16 its intended purpose...........................................4-32
Preparing the program functions........................6-16 Selecting the file in the USB memory.................3-20
Processing during an operation..........................5-36 Selecting the tool................................................5-41
Program..............................................................6-32 Selecting the tool by tapping it on the monitor.....5-7
Program Switch Method.....................................6-51 Selecting the tool from the pull-down menu.........5-7
Protection sheet.................................................1-15 Selecting the tool whose information to be
displayed..............................................................5-7
R Sensor...................................................... 1-12, 1-20
Sensor Advanced screen.................................. A-11
Reducing the effect of illumination variation.......5-36
Sensor advanced settings..................................6-32
Reducing the image blur....................................5-34
Sensor Connect........................................ 6-54, 6-55
Reducing the shininess of
When connecting with the sensor via
the glossy or metal surface................................5-35
a network......................................................6-57
Registering from the image in
Sensor head/amplifier cable for IV-Gseries.......1-11
the USB memory................................................4-28
When using batch backup files (*.iva)...........4-28
whose Status Result is NG)...............................6-21
When using image capture files (*.ivp).........4-29
Sensor Information.............................................6-52
Sensor Setup Menu screen................................. A-7

Index
Sensor Setup screen......................................... A-15 If the detection becomes unstable due to

Setting a search region............................ 4-39, 4-59 the effect of the unwanted outline
Setting a sensitivity................................... 4-40, 4-60 other than the target.....................................5-38
Setting items for the Color Area/Area tool..........4-44 If the match rate difference between
Setting items for the Outline tool........................4-36 the high and low-quality-targets is small.......5-39
Setting items for the Position Adjustment tool....4-56 If the outline cannot be detected when
Setting range of the Output Assignment.............4-64 the target becomes out of position................5-38
Settings after initialization.................................. A-43 If the outline of the target cannot be detected....5-39
Settings for disabling outlines................... 4-39, 4-59 If the target tilts and the outline
Settings for the Trigger Options............................4-8 cannot be detected.......................................5-39
Settings List......................................................... A-6 Stabilizing the position adjustment.....................5-37
Settings Navigator................................................4-2 If the outline of the reference target
Settings Navigator screen and operation flow......4-4 cannot be detected.......................................5-38
Setting the Advanced Monitor Information.........6-54 If the position adjustment becomes
Setting the Color Area/Area tool.........................4-46 unstable due to the effect of
Setting the Extended Functions of the Sensor....6-32 the unwanted outlines...................................5-37
Setting the Image Optimization............................4-6 If the target tilts and the position
Setting the network address of the monitor..........3-9 adjustment becomes unstable......................5-37
Starting and finishing the Tool Auto Tuning........5-17
Setting the Outline tool.......................................4-37
Starting an Operation...........................................5-2
Setting the Output Assignment...........................4-65
Starting the Settings Navigator.............................4-3
Setting the Position Adjustment tool...................4-57
Status table......................................................... A-2
Setting the Trigger Options..........................4-8, 4-11
Stylus..................................................................1-15
Setting the upper limit.........................................4-50
Switching the display to the full-screen mode......5-6
Setting to the Factory Default.............................3-15
System..................................................... 6-32, 6-54
A Setup Adjustment...............................................6-32
Shortening the imaging processing time............5-41
System Configuration...........................................1-2
Shortening the Processing Time........................5-40
Shortening the processing time of each tool......5-41 T
Shortening the processing time of Things can be performed with
the Color Area/Area tool.....................................5-42 the program functions.........................................6-15
Shortening the processing time of Tilt Correction.....................................................6-47
the Outline tool...................................................5-41 Time....................................................................6-62
Shortening the processing time of Tool Auto Tuning (Automatically Adjusting
the position adjustment......................................5-42 the Judgment Condition)....................................5-16
Specification of I/O circuit and current Tool Auto Tuning by the previous registration
of the sensor.......................................................2-25 information..........................................................5-27
Specification of I/O circuit and current of Tool name................................................. 4-43, 4-53
the Ultra Compact Vision Sensor (IV-G series)....2-24 Tool settings.......................................................5-36
Specification of I/O circuit and current of Total Status Conditions.......................................4-69
the Vision Sensor (IV series)..............................2-25 Touch Panel Calibration.....................................6-63
Specifications.......................................................8-2 Touch Screen Lock.............................................6-60
Specifying sensor to be connected by Transfer Condition Settings................................6-42
IP address..........................................................3-12 Transfer Destination Folder Settings..................6-44
Spread lens attachment.....................................1-11 Transferring the settings backed up in
Stabilizing by correcting the misaligned the USB memory to the sensor..........................6-28
target position.....................................................5-36 Transverse mounting bracket for IV-Gseries.....1-12
Stabilizing the Color Area/Area tool....................5-39 Trigger number...................................................5-11
If the area search becomes unstable due to Troubleshooting................................................. A-20
unwanted colors being extracted..................5-39 Turning on the power and starting an operation....5-2
If the color to be judged cannot be detected....5-39 Types of tools.....................................................4-32
Stabilizing the Judgment Process......................5-32
Stabilizing the judgment process by taking
a clear image of the target..................................5-32
Stabilizing the Outline tool..................................5-38
Index
U
Sensor amplifier....................................... 1-10, 1-18
Sensor head.......................................................1-17
Unmounting from the DIN mounting adapter......2-16
Unmounting from the wall mounting adapter......2-14
Unmounting the sensor......................................2-10
Update Monitor...................................................6-64
Updating the sensor...........................................6-53
USB memory (1GB)............................................1-15
Useful features during installation/adjustment......6-4
Useful features while running...............................6-2
Using the Auto Brightness Adjustment...............5-35
Using the digital zooming function......................5-32
Using the dome attachment...............................5-35
Using the dome attachment
(IV-GD05/IV-GD10)..............................................2-6
Using the image files saved in
the USB memory................................................5-16
Using the image history saved in the sensor......5-16
Using the images taken in the Test mode...........5-16
Using the polarizing filter attachment....... 2-12, 5-35
(OP-87899/OP-87900/OP-87901) or
A
spread lens attachment (OP-87902)....................2-8
Using the program functions (changing over)....6-17
When the [External IN] is selected in
the Program Switch Method.........................6-18
When the [Monitor/PC] is selected in
the Program Switch Method.........................6-17
Using with the intelligent monitor (IV-M30)...........1-6
Using with the IV-Navigator (IV-H1)......................1-7
V
Vertical mounting bracket for IV-Gseries...........1-12
Voltage input (When the PNP output is
selected).............................................................2-25
W
Wall mounting adapter........................................1-15
Vision Sensor (IV-G Series)..................................1-3
Vision Sensor (IV-Gseries) and the monitor......2-27
When connecting with the Vision Sensor
(IV Series)............................................................1-2
When the NPN output is selected......................2-25
When the PNP output is selected.......................2-25
White Balance (for color type only)....................6-50

Index
MEMO

Copyright notice
Copyright notice
/*
* EDMA3 LLD
*
* Copyright (C) 2009 Texas Instruments Incorporated - http://www.ti.com/
*
*
* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
* modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
* are met:
*
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
*
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
* documentation and/or other materials provided with the
* distribution.
*
* Neither the name of Texas Instruments Incorporated nor the names of
* its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived
* from this software without specific prior written permission.
* A
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS
* "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
* LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
* A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT
* OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
* SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
* LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
* DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
* THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
* (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE
* OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
*/

Revision history
Revision history Edition number Revision details
January, 2012 1st edition
May, 2012 2nd edition Addition of screw hole (1/4-20UNC) to the mounting adapter.
Revision for German / Chinese (Simplified) / Chinese (Traditional).
Revision for Tool Auto Tuning by registration information file.
August, 2012 3rd edition Corresponds to the simulator function of the IV-Navigator.
December, 2012 4th edition Compatibility with Italian / French / Spanish / Portuguese / Korean.
Addition of Logic output / Total Status NG output / RUN output.
Addition of the FTP client function.
Compatibility with field networks (EtherNet/IP, PROFINET).
December, 2013 5th edition Ethernet and Monitor cable changed
November, 2014 Revised 1st Supported for IV-G Series

edition
August, 2016 Revised 2nd

edition
February, 2017 Revised 3rd

edition
WARRANTIES AND DISCLAIMERS
(1) KEYENCE warrants the Products to be free of defects in materials and workmanship for a period of
one (1) year from the date of shipment. If any models or samples were shown to Buyer, such models
or samples were used merely to illustrate the general type and quality of the Products and not to
represent that the Products would necessarily conform to said models or samples. Any Products
found to be defective must be shipped to KEYENCE with all shipping costs paid by Buyer or offered
to KEYENCE for inspection and examination. Upon examination by KEYENCE, KEYENCE, at its sole
option, will refund the purchase price of, or repair or replace at no charge any Products found to be
defective. This warranty does not apply to any defects resulting from any action of Buyer, including but
not limited to improper installation, improper interfacing, improper repair, unauthorized modification,
misapplication and mishandling, such as exposure to excessive current, heat, coldness, moisture,
vibration or outdoors air. Components which wear are not warranted.
(2) KEYENCE is pleased to offer suggestions on the use of its various Products. They are only
suggestions, and it is Buyers responsibility to ascertain the fitness of the Products for Buyers intended
use. KEYENCE will not be responsible for any damages that may result from the use of the Products.
(3) The Products and any samples (Products/Samples) supplied to Buyer are not to be used internally in
humans, for human transportation, as safety devices or fail-safe systems, unless their written specifications
state otherwise. Should any Products/Samples be used in such a manner or misused in any way,
KEYENCE assumes no responsibility, and additionally Buyer will indemnify KEYENCE and hold KEYENCE
harmless from any liability or damage whatsoever arising out of any misuse of the Products/Samples.
(4) OTHER THAN AS STATED HEREIN, THE PRODUCTS/SAMPLES ARE PROVIDED WITH
NO OTHER WARRANTIES WHATSOEVER. ALL EXPRESS, IMPLIED, AND STATUTORY
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF PROPRIETARY
RIGHTS, ARE EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL KEYENCE AND ITS AFFILIATED
ENTITIES BE LIABLE TO ANY PERSON OR ENTITY FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
PUNITIVE, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION,
ANY DAMAGES RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF
INFORMATION, LOSS OR INACCURACY OF DATA, LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF SAVINGS,
THE COST OF PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTED GOODS, SERVICES OR TECHNOLOGIES,
OR FOR ANY MATTER ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR INABILITY TO
USE THE PRODUCTS, EVEN IF KEYENCE OR ONE OF ITS AFFILIATED ENTITIES WAS ADVISED
OF A POSSIBLE THIRD PARTYS CLAIM FOR DAMAGES OR ANY OTHER CLAIM AGAINST
BUYER. In some jurisdictions, some of the foregoing warranty disclaimers or damage limitations may
not apply.
BUYERS TRANSFER OBLIGATIONS:

If the Products/Samples purchased by Buyer are to be resold or delivered to a third party, Buyer must
provide such third party with a copy of this document, all specifications, manuals, catalogs, leaflets
and written information provided to Buyer pertaining to the Products/Samples.
E 1101-3
Copyright (c) 2012 KEYENCE CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 244009E 1027-3 440GB Printed in Japan

IV-series-monitor Monitor Um 440gb GB WW 1027-3

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

IV-series-monitor Monitor Um 440gb GB WW 1027-3

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

IV-series-monitor Monitor Um 440gb GB WW 1027-3

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

440GB

Ultra Compact Vision Sensor 2 Installation and

IV-G Series 3 Basic Operation

Vision Sensor 4 Settings Navigator

Read this manual before use. 8 Specifications

It indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result

It indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could

It indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could

It indicates a situation which, if not avoided, could result in

It indicates cautions and limitations that must be followed during

It indicates additional information on proper operation.

It indicates tips for better understanding or useful information.

Ethernet/IP is a trademark of ODVA, inc.

Safety Information for IV/IV-G Series

2 - IV/IV-G Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Measures to be taken when an abnormality occurs

- IV/IV-G Series User's Manual (Monitor) - 3

Precautions on Regulations and Standards

UL Certification For IV-M30

4 - IV/IV-G Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

- IV/IV-G Series User's Manual (Monitor) - 5

Version of the IV/IV-G Series

Operation software of the Vision Sensor (IV-150/500/2000)

Operation software of the Ultra Compact Vision Sensor (IV-G150/500/300/600)

6 - IV/IV-G Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Operation software of the monitor (IV-M30)

- IV/IV-G Series User's Manual (Monitor) - 7

8 - IV/IV-G Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Structure of This Manual

A Appendices This chapter explains error messages and troubleshooting, etc.

- IV/IV-G Series User's Manual (Monitor) - 9

Introduction I/O cable for IV-G series..............................1-11

10 - IV/IV-G Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

- IV/IV-G Series User's Manual (Monitor) - 11

Connecting the monitor cable/ Extended functions for the Image

12 - IV/IV-G Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Setting items for

- IV/IV-G Series User's Manual (Monitor) - 13

14 - IV/IV-G Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Advanced Network Settings............................6-40 Response time for the

- IV/IV-G Series User's Manual (Monitor) - 15

Initializing the network settings...................... A-43

16 - IV/IV-G Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

- IV/IV-G Series User's Manual (Monitor) - 1-1

1 Basic configurations of IV/IV-G Serie

When connecting with the Vision Sensor (IV Series)

Monitor power cable

Monitor cable for a

Photoelectric/ Indicator light/buzzer PLC

1-2 - IV/IV-G Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

Monitor power cable

Photoelectric/ Indicator light/buzzer PLC

- IV/IV-G Series User's Manual (Monitor) - 1-3

1 Connecting the monitor and multiple sensors

Intelligent Monitor Ethernet switch

1-4 - IV/IV-G Series User's Manual (Monitor) -

- IV/IV-G Series User's Manual (Monitor) - 1-5

Overview of IV/IV-G Series

Using with the intelligent monitor (IV-M30)

3 Focusing position adjustment screw

3 yyGreen (ON).......The power is turned ON.